Aurora Gold Project

Appendix 7C:
Standard Operating Procedures
ENVIRON
SOP No. SOP Title
GG-01 “Solid Waste Management”
GG-02 “Preparation, Review, Approval, and Update of Standard Operating Procedures”
GG-03 “Field Inspections”
GG-04 “Identification of Non-conformances and Corrective/Preventive Action”
GG-05 “Records Management”
GG-06 “ESMS Training Program”
GG-07 “Distribution and Control of ESMS Documents”
GG-08 “Environmental and Social Footprint Surveys”
GG-09 “Identification of Project-related Safety Hazards and Assessment of Risks”
GG-10 “Prevention and Monitoring of Communicable Diseases”
GG-11 “Personal Protective Equipment”
GG-12 “First Aid and Emergency Medical Response”
GG-13 “Transportation Safety- Light Vehicles”
GG-14 “Handling and Storage of Hazardous Materials”
GG-15 “Forklift Safety”
GG-16 “Safe Operation of Heavy Equipment”
GG-17 “Vehicle Fuelling and Spill Prevention”
GG-18 “Machine Guards and Safety Barriers”
GG-19 “Welding and Cutting Safety”
GG-20 “Electrical Safety”
GG-21 “Confined Space Work Safety”
GG-22 “Fire Prevention Program”
GG-23 “Operational Safety Meetings”
GG-24 “Recognition and Reporting of Safety Hazards”
GG-25 “Chance Archaeological Finds”
GG-26 “Safe Use of All-Terrain Vehicles”
GG-27 “Chainsaw Safety”
GG-28 “Heat Stress”
GG-29 “Determination of Environmental and Social Aspects and Significant Impacts”
GG-30 “Environmental and Social Objectives, Targets, and Performance Improvement Program”
GG-31 “Development and Maintenance of Legal and Regulatory Requirements Register”
GG-32 “Regulatory Compliance Verification Audits”
GG-33 “Internal ESMS Audits”
GG-34 “Management Reviews”
GG-35 “Community Health and Safety Awareness Meetings”
GG-36 “Lockout/Tag-out Requirements”
GG-37 “Control of Erosion and Sedimentation”
GG-38 “Working from Heights”
GG-39 “Monitoring and Maintenance of Potable Water Quality”
GG-40 “Site Security”
GG-41 “Management of Aviation Fuel and Fuelling Operations”
GG-42 “Helicopter Safety”
GG-43 “Safe Operation of Grove Model 530 Hydraulic Cranes”
GG-44 “Management of Land Clearances”
ENVIRON
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
GG-01: Solid Waste Management
Approved by: Approved by:

(VP, Aurora Project) (Environmental Manager)
Effective Date: August 21, 2012 Revision Level: -1-
1.0 PURPOSE AND SCOPE
This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) provides minimum requirements for the
segregation and recycling or controlled disposal of solid waste (and certain categories of
hazardous waste in liquid or sludge form) generated during the Exploration/Early Works
Construction (E/EWC) phase of the Guyana Goldfields, Inc. (GGI) Aurora Project;
applicability to other (non-Aurora) exploration projects shall be governed by the current
approved version of the GGI Exploration Management Plan. The requirements
established by this SOP are based on current Guyanese landfill disposal criteria and
international best management practices (BMPs) for mining exploration1, development,
and operation.2 This SOP is intended as a bridging document pending:
 the development of engineered onsite hazardous waste storage, municipal solid

waste, and inert waste disposal facilities;
 completion of municipal solid waste landfill permitting requirements pursuant to

Guyana Environmental Protection Agency requirements; 3;
 identification of potential recycling/reuse options for selected waste streams, and
 completion of a comprehensive Waste Management Plan for the major

construction and operational phases of the Aurora Project.
This SOP supports Section 4.3.2 (“Management of Social and Environmental Impacts”)
of the GGI Environmental and Social Management System Plan (ESMS Plan), and other
GGI Management Plans and SOPs when specified therein.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
1
Prospectors & Developers Association of Canada (PDAC) “e3-Plus Excellence in Environmental
Stewardship e-toolkit (EES)”, Version-01 (PDAC, 2009)
2
“Environmental, Health and Safety Guidelines for Mining”, December 10, 2007” (IFC, 2007)
3
“Criteria for the Identification and Approval of Landfill Sites for Solid Waste Disposal in Guyana”,
(Guyana Environmental Protection Agency - Special Projects Unit, no date)
GG-01 1 Revision -1-

2.1 Municipal Solid Waste
Per the Guyana EPA landfill criteria document3, municipal solid waste includes non-
hazardous waste generated in households, commercial and business establishments,
institutions, and light industrial process wastes, agricultural wastes, and sewage sludge.
2.2 Other Solid Waste
Per the Guyana EPA landfill criteria document3, other (non-hazardous) solid waste may
includes agricultural waste, commercial waste, debris, demolition waste, garbage,
household waste, non-hazardous industrial waste, inert waste, putrescible solid waste,
refuse, residential waste, and rubbish.
2.2 Special Waste
Per the Guyana EPA landfill criteria document3, special wastes include hazardous
wastes, ship-generated waste, clinical waste, and aircraft waste.
2.3 Hazardous Waste
Per Prospectors & Developers Association of Canada (PDAC) guidance1, in the absence
of definitive national guidance, the United Nations hazardous waste system classification
should be applied. For the purposes of this SOP, hazardous wastes are therefore
considered to be wastes that are highly ignitable, reactive, corrosive, radioactive, or
toxic. It is also understood that hazardous wastes may be in solid, liquid (e.g., waste oil
or coolant) or sludge (e.g., waste grease) form.
3.0 RESPONSIBILITIES
3.1 Environmental Officer
The Environmental Officer is responsible for monitoring overseeing the proper

segregation, safe storage, and/or disposal of solid wastes (including hazardous liquids or
sludges) at the various Aurora Project sites in accordance with this procedure, and for
assisting the Environmental Manager in identifying any new waste streams and the
development of appropriate updates to the waste segregation and disposal guidelines
provided in Table 4-1.
3.2 Environmental Manager
The Environmental Manager is responsible for establishing appropriate solid waste

management strategies, in keeping with applicable Guyanese regulations and
international BMPs, and for documenting and, as necessary, updating such strategies in
the waste segregation and disposal guidelines provided in Table 4-1. The
Environmental Manager will also coordinate with the Construction Manager and key

contractors in the development and periodic update of a comprehensive Waste
Management Plan to support the major construction and operational phases of the
Project, and for assisting in efforts to site and permit appropriately designed sanitary and
inert waste landfills, to locate appropriate recycling options for recyclable waste streams,
and to identify acceptable hazardous waste storage and disposal options. The
Environmental Management is also responsible for periodically conducting due-diligence
assessments of medical waste incinerator to verify the adequacy of waste handling and
disposal practices and facilities at the Georgetown hospital, and for conducting due-
diligence assessments of any offsite commercial hazardous or non-hazardous waste
disposal facilities prior to their inclusion as an element of the waste management
strategy to be defined by the Project Waste Management Plan.
.
4.0 PROCEDURE
The following section describes the process to be followed for the segregation and
disposal of E/EWC phase solid waste at the various sites that comprise the Aurora
Project; the process is represented as a flowchart in Figure 1.
4.1 Segregation and Disposal of E/EWC Phase Solid Waste and Associated Staff
Training
The Environmental Manager and Environmental Officer shall present the solid waste
disposal scheme summarized in Table 4-1 in training sessions to the Camp Managers
and Area Supervisors stationed at the various work sites that comprise the Aurora
Project. Training shall be documented in accordance with SOP GG-06, “ESMS Training
Program.” Implementation of Table 4-1 requirements shall be initiated upon completion
of training.
4.2 Monitoring of Waste Segregation and Disposal Actions
Progress in the implementation of Table 4-1 requirements shall be periodically

monitored by the Environmental Officer and reported to the Environmental Manager on
at least a monthly basis, through the completion of the E/EWC phase of the Project. Any
observed non-conformances in the implementation of Table 4-1 requirements shall be
documented and resolved as required by GG-04, “Identification of Non-conformances
and Corrective /Preventive Action.”
4.3 Records
Records associated with the implementation of this procedure include historical copes of
all version of this procedure and Table 4-1; records of Project workforce training; and
records of any Corrective and Preventive Action Request (CPAR) forms generated as a
result of implementation monitoring.

Table 4-1: GGI – Aurora Project Solid Waste Inventory and Waste Disposal Guidelines (Exploration/Early Works Construction Phase)
Lower-tier Waste
Waste 1 Subcategory Aurora Project Wastes, Disposal Method6 Disposal Method
Waste Subcategory
Category4 (Hazardous Waste by Subcategory (Exploration/Early Works Construction Phase) Improvement Actions
Only)5
Sanitary Municipal solid waste: includes non- hazardous waste N/A Junked all-terrain Drain all fuel and oil into waste oil storage tanks; remove tires, In order to minimize impact on sanitary
Landfill Waste generated in households, commercial and business vehicles (ATVs) and segregate and store at Aurora Base boneyard, pending landfill capacity, investigate potential for
establishments, institutions and light industrial process scrap metal and plastic identification of recycling or disposal options in establishing special inert waste landfill cell
wastes, agricultural wastes, and sewage sludge parts construction/operation phase Waste Management Plan or in waste rock stockpile early in the
disposal in inert waste disposal cell to be constructed in operational phase of the Project; discuss
waste rock stockpile with Guyana EPA and obtain permit if
required.
N/A Construction waste Segregate clean paper, cardboard, and unusable wood, and In order to minimize impact on sanitary
incinerate in controlled burn pit; segregate usable wood and landfill capacity, investigate potential for
metal and send to Aurora Base boneyard for storage pending establishing special inert waste landfill cell
re-use or identification of recycling options; route remaining in waste rock stockpile early in the
waste to “dry” pit pending completion of inert waste disposal operational phase of the Project; discuss
cell; cover with clean soil 2-3 times per week with Guyana EPA and obtain permit if
required.
N/A General garbage from Separate clean paper, cardboard, wood, and incinerate in Disposal method assumes no food
living quarters controlled burn pit; route remaining garbage to “dry” pit preparation or food waste will be
pending completion of approved sanitary landfill; cover with permitted in living areas; finalize design
clean soil 2-3 times per week and seek permit approval of lined sanitary
landfills at Aurora Base and Buckhall4;
construct landfill when permit is granted.
Tapir Camp waste will be collected and
disposed of at the Aurora landfill.
N/A Drained oil filters, Separate clean paper, cardboard, wood, and incinerate in Controlled burning is permitted or volume
containers, rags, other controlled burn pit; route remaining garbage to “dry” pit reduction of clean combustible waste only;
mechanical shop waste pending completion of approved sanitary landfill; cover with finalize design and seek permit approval
clean soil 2-3 times per week of lined sanitary landfills at Aurora Base
4
and Buckhall ; construct landfill when
permit is granted. Tapir Camp waste will
be collected and disposed of at the Aurora
landfill.
N/A Grease rags from drilling Route to “dry” pit pending completion of approved sanitary Investigate potential conversion to
operations landfill or inert waste disposal cell; cover with clean soil 2-3 vegetable oil-based drilling grease
times per week
4
Per “Criteria for the Identification and Approval of Landfill Sites for Solid Waste Disposal in Guyana”, Guyana Environmental Protection Agency, Special Projects Unit, no date.
5
Per United Nations hazardous waste system classification, as recommended in Table 7 of Prospectors & Developers Association of Canada (PDAC) e”3-Plus Excellence in Environmental Stewardship e-toolkit (EES)”, Version-01 (PDAC, 2009)
6
Disposal methods are based PDAC e3 and IFC, 2007 guidance and a subject to review when integrated into the comprehensive Project Waste Management Plan; see Section 4.4.

Lower-tier Waste
Waste Subcategory
Only)5
Sanitary Municipal solid waste (cont.) : includes non- hazardous N/A Used paint cans (non- Remove covers and let dry; crush all containers and route to Finalize design and seek permit approval
Landfill Waste waste generated in households, commercial and business aerosol) “dry” pit pending completion of approved sanitary landfill; of lined sanitary landfills at Aurora Base
establishments, institutions and light industrial process cover with clean soil 2-3 times per week and Buckhall4; construct landfill when
wastes, agricultural wastes, and sewage sludge permit is granted.
Other Solid Waste: includes non-hazardous agricultural N/A Canteen waste Segregate clean paper and cardboard, and incinerate in Investigate availability of recycling options
waste, commercial waste, debris, demolition waste, controlled burn pit; bag all remaining garbage to reduce for glass and recyclable plastics, and
garbage, household waste, non-hazardous industrial attractiveness to wild animals/insects, send to “wet” pit institute segregation and recycling
waste, inert waste, putrescible solid waste, refuse, pending approval of sanitary landfill; puncture bags program when identified. Finalize design
residential waste and rubbish immediately prior to daily clean soil cover and seek permit approval of lined sanitary
4
landfills at Aurora Base and Buckhall ;
construct landfill when permit is granted.
N/A Used tires from all Segregate and store in covered storage in Aurora Base Covered storage is to prevent
vehicles boneyard pending identification of recycling or inert waste cell accumulation of water and creation of
disposal options in construction/operation phase Waste mosquito habitat; investigate potential for
Management Plan in-country recycling or disposal as inert
waste. In order to minimize impact on
sanitary landfill capacity, investigate
potential for establishing special inert
waste landfill cell in waste rock stockpile
early in the operational phase of the
Project; discuss with Guyana EPA and
obtain permit if required.
N/A Building construction or Separate clean paper, cardboard, wood, and incinerate in In order to minimize impact on sanitary
demolition waste controlled burn pit; route remaining garbage to “dry” pit landfill capacity, investigate potential for
pending completion of inert waste cell; cover with clean soil 2- establishing special inert waste landfill cell
3 times per week in waste rock stockpile early in the
operational phase of the Project; discuss
with Guyana EPA and obtain permit if
required.
Special waste Hazardous Waste: includes recyclable and non- Ignitable Hazardous Waste oil and grease Accumulate in covered steel or plastic barrels on covered, Identify options for in-country and regional
recyclable dangerous wastes Waste; includes waste bermed concrete or high-density polyethylene (HDPE) lined waste oil/grease recycling
grease and oil pad or steel intermodal container with containment
modifications, pending offsite shipment for recycling. Control
access to storage areas and provide appropriate
“Hazardous/Flammable Waste” warning signs and
appropriately rated fire extinguishers. Maintain documented
running inventory of type and volumes of materials stored.

Lower-tier Waste
Waste Subcategory
Only)5
Special waste Hazardous Waste (cont.): includes recyclable and non- Used grease rags from Accumulate in covered steel or plastic barrels on covered, Investigate options for both in-country and
recyclable dangerous wastes drill rigs bermed concrete or HDPE lined pad or steel intermodal regional hazardous waste disposal
container with containment modifications, pending
identification of approved hazardous waste disposal facility.
Control access to storage areas and provide appropriate
Fuel/oil spill clean-up Accumulate in covered steel or plastic barrels on covered, Investigate options for both in-country and
waste, from mechanical bermed concrete or HDPE lined pad or steel intermodal regional hazardous waste disposal
shops, drill rigs, and other container with containment modifications, pending
sources identification of approved hazardous waste disposal facility.
Corrosive hazardous Used Pb-acid batteries Drain and neutralize acid with sodium bicarbonate in Identify options for in-country or regional
waste; includes Pb-acid (with battery acid) controlled drainage barrel; accumulate drained batteries on Pb-acid battery recycling
and vehicle batteries pallet pending offsite shipment for recycling. Let neutralized
acid evaporate, route residual sludge to “dry” pit pending
completion of approved sanitary landfill; cover with clean soil
2-3 times per week.
Reactive Hazardous Used aerosols (paints, Remove covers and let dry; for aerosol cans, puncture in safe Finalize design and seek permit approval
Waste; includes sprays, no insecticides or fixture prior to disposal; crush all containers and route to “dry” of lined sanitary landfills at Aurora Base
4
explosives, compressed pesticides) pit pending completion of approved sanitary landfill; cover with and Buckhall ; construct landfill when
gases, or substances clean soil 2-3 times per week. permit is granted.
dangerous when wet
Radioactive hazardous None N/A None

waste
Toxic hazardous Waste insecticide/ Accumulate in covered steel or plastic barrels on covered, Investigate long-term options for both in-
waste; includes all fungicide/rodenticide/ bermed concrete or HDPE lined pad or steel intermodal country and regional hazardous waste
poisonous (toxic) herbicide containers container with containment modifications, pending disposal.
materials identification of approved hazardous waste disposal facility.
For aerosol cans, puncture in safe fixture prior to disposal.

Lower-tier Waste
Waste Subcategory
Only)5
Special waste Hazardous Waste (cont.): includes recyclable and non- Toxic hazardous waste Waste Tyvek coveralls, Accumulate in covered steel or plastic barrels on covered, Investigate long-term options for both in-
recyclable dangerous wastes (cont.); includes all gloves, and used bermed concrete or HDPE lined pad or steel intermodal country and regional hazardous waste
poisonous (toxic) respirator cartridges from container with containment modifications, pending disposal.
materials mosquito fogging identification of approved hazardous waste disposal facility.
For aerosol cans, puncture in safe fixture prior to disposal.
Used/broken fluorescent Crush in controlled fixture, accumulate in covered steel or Investigate long-term options for both in-
tubes plastic barrels on covered, bermed concrete or HDPE lined country and regional hazardous waste
pad or steel intermodal container with containment disposal.
modifications, pending identification of approved hazardous
waste disposal facility. Control access to storage areas and
provide appropriate “Hazardous/Flammable Waste” warning
signs and appropriately rated fire extinguishers. Maintain
documented running inventory of type and volumes of
materials stored.
Hg ballasts from Accumulate in covered steel or plastic barrels on covered, Investigate long-term options for both in-
fluorescent light fixtures bermed concrete or HDPE lined pad or steel intermodal country and regional hazardous waste
container with containment modifications, pending disposal.
Non-lead acid batteries Accumulate in covered steel or plastic barrels on covered, Investigate long-term options for both in-
(all types) bermed concrete or HDPE lined pad or steel intermodal country and regional hazardous waste
container with containment modifications, pending disposal.
Waste ethylene glycol Accumulate in covered steel or plastic barrels on covered, Investigate long-term options for both in-
coolant bermed concrete or HDPE lined pad or steel intermodal country and regional hazardous waste
container with containment modifications, pending disposal options.

Lower-tier Waste
Waste Subcategory
Only)5
Special Waste Clinical waste N/A Medical waste from Collect in dedicated medical waste containers at the camp Conduct due-diligence assessment of
(cont.) Project clinics (includes clinics, transport to licensed medical waste incinerator at the licensed medical waste incinerator at
sharps, examination Georgetown hospital when full. Control access to storage Georgetown hospital.
gloves, and all medical containers and provide appropriate “Biohazardous Waste”
treatment waste) warning signs. Maintain documented running inventory of
type and volumes of materials sent for disposal.
Ship-generated waste N/A None; no ship-generated N/A N/A

waste will be permitted to
be offloaded a Buckhall.
Aircraft waste N/A None; no onsite aircraft N/A N/A

fuelling or maintenance
will be permitted at the
Aurora Base airstrip.

4.4 Withdrawal of SOP from Service
The Environmental Manager shall coordinate with the Construction Manager and Vice
President, Aurora Project in the integration of the phase waste segregation and disposal
requirements described in Table 4-1 into the overall Waste Management Plan planned
to be developed prior to the major construction and operations phases of the Project.
This SOP shall be withdrawn from service after the final approval and issue of the
comprehensive Project Waste Management Plan.
5.0 REFERENCES
 GG-04, “Identification of Non-conformances and Corrective /Preventive Action”
 GG-05, “Records Management”
 IFC, 2007; “Environmental, Health and Safety Guidelines for Mining”, December
10, 2007; http://www.ifc.org/ifcext/enviro.nsf/AttachmentsByTitle/gui_
EHSGuidelines2007_Mining/$FILE/Final+-+Mining.pdf ; World Bank
Group/International Finance Corporation, Washington, DC. 2007.
 Guyana EPA, no date; “Criteria for the Identification and Approval of Landfill
Sites for Solid Waste Disposal in Guyana”, Guyana Environmental Protection
Agency, Special Projects Unit, no date.
 PDAC, 2009; “e3-Plus Excellence in Environmental Stewardship e-toolkit (EES)”,

Version-01; http://www.pdac.ca/e3plus/English/toolkits/es/index.aspx ;
Prospectors and Developers Association of Canada, Toronto, Ontario, Canada,
2009.

Figure 1: E/EWC Phase Waste Management and Segregation Process
Environmental Officer/
Environmental Manager
Provide training in
GG-01 and Table 4-1
contents,
per GG-05
Areas Managers/
Project staff
Implement Table 4-1
requirements at all
Project sites
Areas Managers/
Environmental Officer
Project staff
Resolve CPAR per

Monitor compliance with
GG-04 requirements
Table 4-1 requirements
Env. Officer
Yes
CPAR indicated?
No
Assist Construction
Manager/Aurora Project
Manger in development
and final approval of
Waste Management Plan
Environmental Manager Records
Issue Waste Management

Plan, withdraw File records
GG-01 from service per GG-05
GG-01
GG-02: Preparation, Review, Approval, and Update
of Standard Operating Procedures
This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) defines the methods that Guyana Goldfields,
Inc. (Guyana Goldfields) will use to create or revise other SOPs for the Aurora Project.
This SOP will apply over the life of the Project; it supports Section 1.2 (“ESMS
Documentation”) and Section 1.3 (”Change Management”) of the GGI Environmental
and Social Management System Plan (ESMS Plan), and other GGI Management Plans
and SOPs when specified therein.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Standard Operating Procedure
Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) describe the detailed processes that support
individual Management Plans, the GGI Environmental and Social Management System
Plan (ESMS Plan), or other Environmental, Social, and Health and Safety (ESHS)
planning documents that may be developed and/or adopted by the Aurora Project.
3.1 Operations Managers
Aurora Project Operations Managers are responsible for assisting the Environmental
Manager, as necessary, in the identification needs for SOPs or SOP modifications that
relate to ESHS functions within their area of responsibility.
The Environmental Manager or his designee will:
 identify or confirm the need for the development or revision of an SOP;

 assign a proper document control number, title, and/or revision number;
 prepare or update the SOP, or delegate to a designated preparer;

 review and approve SOPs against relevant planning documents; and
 ensure that final review and approval by the VP, Aurora Project or their designee
is obtained prior to issue of the SOP.
3.3 Vice President (VP), Aurora Project
The VP, Aurora Project will review and approve all new or updated SOPs prior to issue.
4.0 PROCEDURE
The general process for evaluating the need for creation or modification of an SOP is
described in the following steps. This process is also summarized as a flowchart in
Figure 1.
4.1 Prepare or Update an SOP
SOPs will be prepared by the Environmental Manager or a designated preparer. SOP

formats shall follow the general format conventions (e.g., header style, font, justification)
established by of this procedure.
All SOPs will contain a header that includes the names of the procedure, the revision
level, and the effective date, following the example of this procedure. The
Environmental Manager will assign a unique “GG-XX” format numerical designator to
new SOPs.
General guidelines for SOP format and content are provided as follows:
1. Purpose and Scope
Describe the purpose that the procedure is attempting to fulfil. Provide a

statement that describes the life-cycle applicability of the SOP, and cross-
reference the specific section of the ESMS Plan that the SOP supports; see
Section 1 of this SOP for an example of a typical statement.
2. Definitions
Define any terms that are unique or important for the end user to understand in
the proper implementation of the SOP.
3. Responsibilities
List the different position titles or categories of personnel who have significant
responsibilities for carrying out the procedure, and describe their specific duties.
4. Procedure
Create a simple flowchart illustrating the process flow of the procedure, and in
corresponding text briefly describe the activities that must take place during each
step of the procedure, giving due consideration to the level of experience and
other characteristics of the intended end users of the SOP. Note any specific
regulatory requirements, voluntary standards, plans, other GGI SOPs, or other
documents which support the procedure and play a significant role in its proper
implementation. Provide for appropriate workforce training activities; specify
training/refresher training frequency, as appropriate, and provide a cross-
reference to GG-06, “ESMS Training Program.” Discuss the keeping of
appropriate records that will demonstrate that key steps in the process have
been properly completed and documented; cross-reference GG-05, “Records
Management.” Include any specific internal or external reporting requirements.
5. References
List any regulatory requirements, voluntary standards, plans, procedures or other

documents which are specifically cross-referenced in the procedure and must
also be understood for the SOP to be properly implemented.
6. Figures, Tables, or Attachments.
Any diagrams, forms, photographs, or tables used to illustrate or support the

process should be included in this section. Figure 1 should be reserved for the
procedural flowchart. Other appropriate types of figures could include examples
of forms, checklists, labels, photographs of acceptable/unacceptable conditions,
or logs that are necessary for documenting the implementation of the specified
process.
4.2 Review and Approval
New or revised SOPs shall be reviewed and approved by the Environmental Manager
and the VP, Aurora Project, or their designees. All comments shall be addressed to the
satisfaction of the Environmental Manager and the VP, Aurora Project. Final approvals
shall be indicated by the signatures in the title block on the first page of the SOP, and by
assigning an effective date for the implementation of the SOP.
4.3 Controlled Distribution
Once the SOP or SOP update has been finalized with signatures and an effective date,
the SOP will be subject to controlled distribution to individuals with a specific need to
know, at the Environmental Manager’s discretion. A list of individuals receiving
controlled copies shall be maintained by the Environmental Manager.

4.4 Procedural Training
Any training required to implement a new or revised SOP shall be scheduled and
coordinated by the Environmental Manager or his designee in accordance with GG-06,
“ESMS Training Program.”
4.5 Project Records
Records produced as a result of the implementation of the SOP will include master
copies of each version of the SOP and a list of recipients of controlled copies, which
shall be retained as described by GG-05, “Records Management.”
5.0 REFERENCES
 GGI ESMS Plan

 GG-06, “ESMS Training Program”
 GG-07, “Distribution and Control of ESMS Documents”

Figure 1: Preparation, Review, Approval, and Issue of SOPs

GG-03: Field Inspections

1.0 PURPOSE
This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) defines minimum requirements for

conducting documented in-process or field inspections of the environmental, social, and
health and safety (ESHS) aspects of the Aurora Project, when specifically requested by
the Environmental Manager or other Guyana Goldfields, Inc. (GGI) management staff.
This SOP will apply over the life of the Project; it supports Sections 7.2.1 (“ESMS
Monitoring”) and 7.3 (“Non-conformance Reporting and Corrective and Preventive
Action”) of the GGI Environmental and Social Management System Plan (ESMS Plan).
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Field Inspection
Field inspection is defined as the monitoring or witnessing the performance of field

work in process by designated inspectors, in order to verify that it is being conducted in
accordance with approved plans, procedures, methods, or other specified requirements.
Field inspections are management tools that may be used to detect and correct
observed or potential deficiencies in any phase of a mining project, in order to detect or
minimize or eliminate the potential for non-conformances. Field inspection methods are
applicable to a broad range of activities that may be conducted in all phases of the
mining life cycle.
2.2 Non-conformances
Non-conformances are defined as conditions that the Aurora Project can reasonably
control or substantially influence that:
 are contrary to the commitments of GGI’s management policies or ESMS

requirements;
 can be classified as accidents or significant near-misses;
 violate a legal or regulatory requirement, or represent a worsening condition that

could result in a violation if not corrected;
 could potentially result in negative environmental or social impacts; or

 represent a lack of conformance with the GGI ESMS Plan or its supporting
Management Plans or procedures.
Minor deficiencies that are not related to regulatory compliance issues, stakeholder
complaints, or workforce health and safety that can be brought fully into conformance
with immediate corrective action are not considered non-conformances as long as the
circumstances and corrective action are documented in the inspection report required by
this procedure. However, if the nature of such a deficiency precludes immediate
correction, it must be formally documented and resolved as described in GG-04,
“Identification of Non-conformances and Corrective/Preventive Action.”
2.3 Corrective Action
Corrective action refers to those measures taken to correct conditions adverse to

quality and, where necessary, prevent repetition; this includes the action taken to
eliminate the cause of a detected non-conformance.
2.4 Preventive Action
Preventive action refers to those actions that are focused on eliminating the cause of a
potential non-conformance or other undesirable potential situation.
The Environmental Manager (or other GGI management staff) may request field
inspections wherever deemed necessary to assess ESHS performance. Inspection
responsibilities may be delegated to the Aurora Base Health and Safety or
Environmental Officers or other designated inspectors as noted herein. The
Environmental Manager shall review and approve inspection plans or checklists prior to
the inspection activity, and will coordinate appropriate inspection schedules with affected
area managers.
3.2 Designated Inspectors
Designated inspectors are responsible for: 1) preparing inspection plans or checklists

prior to the inspection; 2) performing the inspection in accordance with the approved
plan or checklist; 3) documenting inspection results on the form provided in Figure 2;
4) initiating Corrective/Preventive Action Requests (CPARs; see GG-04, “Identification of
Non-conformances and Corrective/Preventive Action”) for any non-conformances; and
5) identifying other appropriate action items that are recommended as a practice
improvement or to prevent the worsening of an observed ESHS-related trend or
condition.

4.0 PROCEDURE
The overall process for conducting a field inspection is presented in the following
paragraphs, and summarized as a flowchart in Figure 1.
4.1 Initiation of Inspection Process
The Environmental Manager may (at his discretion or upon request from GGI
management) use this procedure to conduct documented overchecks on the
performance of specific tasks or areas of the project in order to minimize or eliminate the
potential for adverse environmental, health and safety, or social impacts. Such
inspections may be performed directly by the Environmental Manager, the Aurora Base
Health and Safety or Environmental Officers, or other designees.
4.2 Selection and Qualification of Inspectors
Designated inspectors may be selected and qualified by the Environmental Manager on

the basis of:
 relevant experience with the Aurora Project and prior inspection experience
under the requirements of this procedure; or
 participation in a documented training session led by the Environmental Manager

that presents the requirements of this procedure and SOP GG-04, “Identification
of Non-conformances and Corrective/Preventive Action” ; any such training shall
be documented in accordance with GG-06, “ESMS Training Program.”
4.3 Inspection Planning
After completion of any necessary training as noted in Section 4.2, the designated
inspector shall prepare an appropriately detailed inspection plan or checklist using the
form provided as Figure 2, based on the general inspection scope defined by the
Environmental Manager. The inspection plan or checklist may be prepared in any
convenient format, provided that it is designed to verify and document:
 conformance with the technical procedures, drawings, specifications, or other

specified references;
 personnel contacted during the inspection;
 as applicable, conformance of operations and sequencing with the requirements

of governing plans or procedures;
 completion of all required data sheets, logbook entries, or other records, to the
extent appropriate for the type of activity observed; and

 environmental or other conditions that could affect the accuracy or completeness
of the inspection.
The Environmental Manager will review and approve inspection plans or checklists prior
to commencing the inspection. The Environmental Manager shall also coordinate
appropriate inspection schedules with affected Operations Managers to minimize
disruptions to work in progress.
4.4 Conduct Inspection
The designated inspector shall conduct the inspection in accordance with the plan or
checklist developed under Section 4.3, and document the results on the inspection
report (Figure 2). Photographs, sketches, or other information may be attached as
necessary to illustrate a specific condition.
Any deviations from the plan or checklist shall be documented and explained or justified.
If non-conformances are observed, the inspector shall initiate a CPAR in accordance
with SOP-10, “Identification of Non-conformances and Corrective/Preventive Action.”
Any non-conformances involving emergency situations, accidents, endangerment of the
workforce or a health or safety issue requiring an immediate response shall be brought
to the immediate attention of the affected Operations Manager for initiation of an
appropriate response action under the requirements of the GGI ESMS.
Noted deficiencies that are corrected immediately in the presence of the inspector (see
Section 2.2) shall be fully described. CPAR control numbers shall be noted on the
inspection record in the block provided. Other action items shall be noted that represent
appropriate practice improvements or are deemed necessary to prevent the worsening
of an observed trend or condition.
4.5 Review and Approval
The Environmental Manager shall review and approve the final inspection report. The
completed report shall then be submitted to the affected Area Manager for resolution of
any CPARs and Action Items. CPAR resolution shall be documented as noted in GG-
04; resolution of action items shall be confirmed by the designated inspector and
documented in the “Comments” block of the inspection report.
4.6 Records
Records generated from the routine implementation of this procedure shall be retained in
accordance with GG-05, “Records Management” and include training records for
designated inspectors and completed inspection plan and report forms, with all
attachments.

5.0 REFERENCES
 GGI ESMS Plan;

 GG-04, “Identification of Non-conformances and Corrective/Preventive Action”;
 GG-05, “Records Management”; and
 GG-06, “ESMS Training Program.”

Figure 1: Field Inspection Process

Figure 2: Inspection Plan and Report Form
Field Inspection Plan/Report

Page 1
of:__
1. Inspection Location: 2. Operations Manager/Supervisor:
3. Inspection Plan/Checklist (attach extra sheets as required):
Approval: ______________________________________________ Date:_______________

4. Inspection Date:________ Start time: ________ End time: ________
5. Personnel Contacted:
6. Reference Procedures/Requirements:
7. Inspection Observations/Comments (attach extra sheets as required):
8. CPAR references (if any)
9. Action Items (attach extra sheets as required):
Inspector: ___________________ Date: ______ Approval: __________________ Date: ______

15. Comments:

GG-04: Identification of Non-conformances
and Corrective/Preventive Action
This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) describes a controlled process for initiating
corrective and preventive actions in response to externally or internally reported non-
conformances that relate to the environmental, social, and health and safety (ESHS)
aspects of the Guyana Goldfields, Inc. (GGI) Aurora Project. This SOP will apply over
the life of the Project; it supports Section 7.3 (“Non-conformance Reporting and
Corrective and Preventive Action”) of the GGI Environmental and Social Management
System Plan (ESMS Plan), and other GGI Management Plans and SOPs when specified
therein.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Non-conformances
Non-conformances are defined as conditions that the Aurora Project can reasonably
control or substantially influence that:
 are contrary to the commitments of Guyana Gold’s management policies or

Environmental and Social Management System (ESMS) requirements;
 can be classified as accidents or significant near-misses;
 violate a legal or regulatory requirement, or represent a worsening condition that

could result in a violation if not corrected;
 could potentially result in negative environmental or social impacts; or
 GGI ESMS Plan or supporting Management Plans and procedures.
Minor deficiencies that are not related to regulatory compliance issues, stakeholder
complaints, or workforce health and safety that can be brought fully into conformance
with immediate corrective action are not considered non-conformances as long as the
circumstances and corrective action are documented in the inspection report required by
GG‐04 1 Revision ‐1‐
this procedure. However, if the nature of such a deficiency precludes immediate
correction, it must be formally documented and resolved as described in this SOP.
2.2 Corrective/Preventive Action Request (CPAR) Forms
CPAR forms (see Figure 2) are documents prepared by the Environmental Manager or
designee, in the event a non-conformance is identified, in order to facilitate investigation,
the determination of fundamental or “root” causes, the immediate correction of
nonconforming conditions, and the undertaking of specific preventive actions or tasks as
necessary to reduce or preclude the possibility of recurrence.
3. RESPONSIBILITIES
3.1 All Personnel
All Aurora Project personnel should bring suspected ESHS non-conformances to the
immediate attention of their supervisors, the Aurora Base Environmental or Health and
Safety Officers, or the Environmental Manager.
3.2 Responsible Operations Managers
Operations Managers determined to have primary responsibility for a non-conformance

shall assist the Environmental Manager in the evaluation of the non-conformance, the
determination of appropriate measures to be taken to correct the immediate situation,
and selection of appropriate preventive measures that can be reasonably taken to
reduce or preclude the possibility of recurrence.
The Environmental Manager (or their designee) will evaluate reported conformance to
determine whether or not a nonconforming condition actually exists, and for initiating the
CPAR process when non-conformances are confirmed. The Environmental Manager
will:
 actively engage responsible Operations Manager(s) in the resolution process for

all applicable non-conformances;
 verify completion of all tasks requested as part of the agreed-upon corrective and
preventive action;
 monitor the overall completion of CPAR closure actions via a departmental

CPAR Status Tracking Log (see Figure 3); and
 Approve and formally close each CPAR when all required actions are completed.
4.0 PROCEDURE
The CPAR process consists of the following steps, which are also summarized as a
flowchart (Figure 1).
4.1 Evaluation of Potential Non-conformances
The Environmental Manager will review all notifications of potentially nonconforming

conditions to determine whether or not the criteria noted in Section 2.1 are actually met.
If the Environmental Manager determines that a non-conformance does not exist, an e-
mail message will be sent to the originator, with a hard copy sent to file. If the originator
is external to Aurora Project, then appropriately documented communications shall be
made through the processes described in GG-01, “Management of Environmental
Complaints and Information Requests.”
4.2 CPAR Documentation, Logging, and Distribution
The Environmental Manager or their designee will document the confirmed non-
conformance on a CPAR form (see Figure 2), assign the CPAR a unique tracking
number, and enter basic information in the CPAR Status Tracking Log (see Figure 3).
The initiator of the CPAR will be identified, as well as the Operations Manager with
primary responsibility for the circumstances resulting in the non-conformance. The non-
conformance shall be briefly described, include details on location, frequency, and
relative severity. Photographs, sketches, or other information may be attached as
appropriate. A copy of the open CPAR shall be forwarded to the responsible Area
Manager and a meeting scheduled within 10 working days for the joint development of
appropriate corrective and preventive actions.
4.4 CPAR Disposition and Resolution
The Environmental Manager and responsible Operations Manager (or their designees)
shall meet, discuss the observed condition and its root causes, and jointly develop
appropriate measures that can be taken to correct the immediate condition as well as
reduce or preclude the recurrence of similar non-conformances. Root causes and
agreed-upon corrective and preventive actions shall be summarized, and due dates
established for the completion of both types of action. Authorization to proceed with the
recommended course of action will be indicated by the signatures of the Environmental
Supervisor and the responsible Operations Manager. Approved target completion dates
shall be entered into the appropriate line of the CPAR Status Tracking Log. If the
Environmental Manager and Operations Manager are unable to agree on an appropriate
course of action, the CPAR will be referred to the Vice President (VP), Aurora Project for
resolution.
4.5 CPAR Completion Status Tracking and Closure
The corrective and preventive actions authorized by the approved CPAR shall be
accomplished as stated, and progress tracked through completion by the Environmental
Manager on the CPAR Status Tracking Log. Completion of all required tasks will be
verified by the Environmental Manager or their designee; verification shall be
documented by signature closure on the CPAR form and an appropriate note in the
CPAR Status Tracking Log.
4.6 Records
Completed CPAR Status Tracking Log pages and hard copies of all completed CPARs
(plus copies of notes to originators of issues that did not result in CPARs) shall be filed
and maintained in accordance with GG-05, “Records Management.”
5.0 REFERENCES
 GGI ESMS Plan

 GG-01, “Management of ESHS Complaints and Information Requests.”
Figure 1: CPAR Process
Figure 2: CPAR Form
Control No._________
CORRECTIVE/PREVENTIVE ACTION Date issued:________
REQUEST (CPAR) Assigned to: ________

(Responsible Area
Manager)
Initiated by:___________
Source/Reference Requirement:
Description of non-conformance (attach additional infuriation as required)
Root cause:
Corrective Action (describe or attach additional information): Complete by:
Corrective Action (describe or attach additional information): Complete by:
Approved:_____________________ Date:___ Approved:_____________________ Date:___

Environmental Manager Responsible Manager
Comments:
Closure verified:________________ Date:___

Figure 3: CPAR Status Tracking Log Form
CPAR STATUS TRACKING LOG
Corrective Preventive Verification/

CPAR Responsible
Date Issued Subject Action Due Action Due Closure
No. Manager
Date Date Date
GG-05: Records Management

management of environmental, social, and health and safety (ESHS) records for the
Guyana Goldfields, Inc. (GGI) Aurora Project. This SOP will apply over the life of the
Project; it supports Section 7.1 (“ESMS Records”) of the GGI Environmental and Social
Management System Plan (ESMS Plan), and all other GGI Management Plans and
SOPs as noted therein.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Records
Records are defined as legible, completed documents, in hard-copy or electronic

format, that provide objective evidence of the completion of required regulatory
submittals and other recordkeeping needs defined by the GGI Environmental and Social
Management System Plan (ESMS Plan) and supporting Management Plans or SOPs.
3.1 All Personnel
All personnel involved in activities that produce environmental records are responsible
for the timely submittal of legible and complete copies (in hard copy or .pdf format) to the
Environmental Manager or his designee.
The Environmental Manager or his designee shall maintain an ESMS Records Index and
Filing Plan and establish appropriate records retention, archiving and disposal time
requirements for the various categories of records identified. The Environmental
Manager may also conduct an annual review of files to determine which files should be
purged and archived or disposed of according to the latest version of the ESMS Records
Index and Filing Plan.

4.0 PROCEDURE
The procedure consists of the following steps, which correspond to the general
sequence of activities depicted in the flowchart provided as Figure 1.
4.1 Records Organization
The Environmental Manager or their designee shall prepare and maintain an EMS
Records Index and Filing Plan based on the major regulatory areas governing mine
operations, as well as other specific records requirements established by the GGI ESMS
Plan and its supporting Management Plans and SOPs.
4.2 Records Preparation
Personnel responsible for completing ESHS records shall submit completed documents
to the Environmental Manager or his designee. Completed records in electronic format
shall be saved in .pdf format; original or best available copies of hard copy records shall
be routed for filing wherever possible. Records shall contain sufficient identification to
permit logical association of the document to the relevant regulatory agency or activity.
4.3 Records Identification, Filing, Storage, and Access Control
The Environmental Manager or his designee shall file received records in the locations
specified in the ESHS Records Index and Filing Plan. Individual records may be
accumulated chronologically within any specifically assigned hard copy or electronic
folder. Direct access to hard-copy environmental records shall be restricted to the Vice
President (VP), Aurora Project and Environmental and Health and Safety Department
staff.
4.4 Record Copying and Checkout
Aurora Project personnel may request working copies of records may also check out file
folders or individual hard copy records for review purposes only. Working copies of
records shall be made whenever possible, and original documents shall be promptly
returned to the files in their original condition.
4.5 Records Retention and Disposal or Archiving
All environmental records shall be retained for a minimum of 7 years unless a longer
retention period is specifically directed by GGI management. They may be archived
(i.e., placed in secure storage that need not be readily accessible) after 3 years at the
Environmental Manager’s discretion in order to make space for more recent and more
frequently used records, and (unless specified otherwise) may be destroyed following
the required 7 year retention period. The requirements for retention, disposal and

archiving for each record are included in the EMS Records Index and Filing Plan (see
Figure 2). All updates to the Plan shall be approved by the Environmental
Superintendent.
The Environmental Manager or his designee may periodically review retained records
against the approved EMS Records Index and Filing Plan and may initiate appropriate
archiving and disposal actions. A memo to file shall be prepared that documents which
specific files were involved.
5.0 REFERENCES
 GGI ESMS Plan

Figure 1: Management of ESHS Records

GG-06, ESMS Training Program

Environmental and Social Management System (ESMS) training program established for
the Guyana Goldfields, Inc. (GGI) Aurora Project. This SOP will apply over the life of the
Project; it supports Section 5.2 (“Training, Awareness, and Competence”) and 4.3.3
(“Control of Contractor Operations”) of the GGI Environmental and Social Management
System Plan (ESMS Plan), and other GGI Management Plans and SOPs when specified
therein.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Introductory Training
Introductory Training (IT) is defined as the initial training of new hires in the general
requirements of the GGI ESMS, with emphasis on safe work practices, vehicle safety,
spill response, and waste management. Selected aspects of this employee IT can be
applied to the training of contractors (see ESMS Plan Section 4.3.3 (“Control of
Contractor Operations”) and site visitors. Completion of all IT is documented via a
standard GGI training record (see Figure 2).
2.2 Supervised On-the-Job Training
Supervised On-the Job Training (OJT) is defined as the practical demonstration of the
requirements of a procedure by a senior, experienced staff member for the benefit of
less experienced or newly hired staff. The trainee is expected to work closely with the
OJT trainer until such time that the trainer is satisfied that work can be performed
independently. Completion of OJT may be documented via a simple written or e-mailed
memo to file from the OJT trainer that is communicated to the Training Clerk.
2.3 Self-Directed Training
Self-directed Training (SDT) is a training method that involves the self-directed reading
and/or study of controlled documents. Each trainee assumes personal responsibility for
completing the requested reading assignments. Completion of training is acknowledged
by a simple written or e-mail or verbal notification to the Training Clerk.
2.4 Class Room Training
Class Room Training (CRT) is a training method that involves the Environmental and
Health and Safety Officers or other experienced GGI staff member instructing a group on
a specific task or one or several of the requirements of the GGI ESMS Management
Plan or its supporting Management Plans or SOPs. Completion of CRT may be
documented through completion of a standard GGI training record (see Figure 2) that
lists the key subjects covered.
2.5 Training Needs Assessment
Training needs assessment is defined as the process of identifying the minimum

individual minimum levels of training and appropriate training frequencies (i.e., one-time,
annual refresher, or other) required for GGI employees to properly implement the ESMS
and conduct their work in compliance with the GGI policies and applicable regulations.
Training needs assessments are performed by the Environmental and Health and Safety
Officers with input from individual Area Supervisors as needed. Such assessments are
documented in the Training Requirements Register spreadsheet (see Figure 3).
3.1 All Personnel
All GGI personnel are responsible for participating in the training program established by
this procedure, and for seeking supplemental training or guidance from their Area
Supervisors or the Environmental and Health and Safety Officers if procedural
responsibilities are not well understood. Contractors and visitors are required to
participate in a contractor/visitor training presentation (see Section 4.1). Contractors
shall participate in such other training sessions as may be required by applicable
Purchase Order or Contract requirements; see ESMS Plan Section 4.3.3, “Control of
Contractor Operations.”
3.2 Environmental and Health and Safety Officers
The Environmental and Health and Safety Officers are jointly responsible for ensuring
that GGI workers and management are trained in the applicable requirements of the
ESMS Plan and its supporting Management Plans and SOPs, as appropriate for their
work areas and job assignments and the frequency requirements that may be specified
in the training needs assessment or by governing documents. The Environmental and
Health and Safety Officers may be assisted by a designated Training Clerk who will
receive and maintain training records and keep the Training requirements Register up to
date.
4.0 PROCEDURE
The general processes for the ESMS training program are described in the following
steps, and summarized as a flowchart in Figure 1.
4.1 Contractor/Visitor Training
All contractors and site visitors shall attend a contractor/visitor training presentation prior
to traveling to the Aurora Project site; contractors/visitors arriving by air shall participate
in a presentation after clearing security as soon as possible after arrival. Contractors
shall participate in such other training sessions as may be required by applicable
Purchase Order or Contract requirements; see ESMS Plan Section 4.3.3, “Control of
Contractor Operations.” The training presentation and any addition contractor training
shall be adapted from the IT presentation discussed in Section 4.3, and shall be
delivered by the Environmental or Health and Safety Officers or their designees.
Completion of all contractor/visitor training shall be documented on a standard GGI
training record (see Figure 2).
4.2 Training Needs Assessment – GGI Staff
The Environmental and Health and Safety Officers, with the assistance of the Area
Supervisors, shall conduct and periodically update a training needs assessment for all
employees. Such assessments include an evaluation of typical or anticipated
responsibilities, and identification of minimum training requirements appropriate for those
responsibilities. Training methods and frequencies appropriate for each subject are then
selected. Such decisions are documented by entering appropriate frequencies (one-
time, annual refresher, or other) and training methods codes in the Training
Requirements Register spreadsheet, for each required training subject and for each
individual job position. See Figure 3 for guidance on minimum fields and content for the
Training Requirements Register spreadsheet. Training codes include:
 IT - Introductory Training
 SDT – Self Directed Training
 OJT – On-the-job Training
 CRT – Classroom Training
4.3 Introductory Training
The Environmental and Health and Safety Officers shall deliver a PowerPoint™-based
IT presentation to all new hires that describes the general requirements of the GGI
ESMS, with emphasis on safe work practices, vehicle safety, spill response, erosion
control, waste management, labour grievance procedures, and expected behaviour with
respect to external stakeholders. Attendance and training materials shall be
documented using the form provided in Figure 2.
4.3 Position-Specific ESMS Training
The Environmental and Health and Safety Officers and the Area Supervisors are
responsible for ensuring each GGI employee is trained according to the requirements of
their job position as specified in the current version of the Training Requirements
Register, using one or more of the SDT, OJT, and CRT methods. Methods should be
selected to be commensurate with the trainee’s experience and the nature of their
probable work assignments, as discussed in Section 2.
4.4 Training Status Updates/Re-training
All training records for GGI employees are received by a designated Training Clerk, who
will enter the date of completion and training subject for each individual into the Training
Requirements Register. Hard copies of the EMS training records will be retained as
noted in Section 4.5. The Training Clerk and Environmental and Health and Safety
Officers will monitor the frequency requirements of the Training Requirements Register,
as well as any ESMS changes. In addition to any required refresher training or re-
training noted on the Training Requirements Register, any substantial non-editorial
changes to the ESMS Plan or its supporting Management Plans or SOPs will prompt re-
training of affected project staff via one or more of the methods specified by this
procedure.
4.5 Records
Records generated from the routine implementation of this procedure will include copies
of e-mailed records for SDT or OJT, and completed training records from IT or CRT with
copies of any materials disseminated during training. All records will be filed and
retained in accordance with GG-05, “Records Management.”
5.0 REFERENCES
 ESMS Plan
Figure 1: Training Process
Figure 2: IT/CRT Training Session Attendance Record
Guyana Goldfields, Inc. – Aurora Project

TRAINING SESSION ATTENDANCE RECORD
Training subject(s): ___________________________________________________________________
Trainer(s) _________________________________________________________ Date: ___________
Attendees:
________________________________________ ________________________________________
Name (print) Signature
________________________________________ ________________________________________
________________________________________ ________________________________________
________________________________________ ________________________________________
________________________________________ ________________________________________
________________________________________ ________________________________________
________________________________________ ________________________________________
________________________________________ ________________________________________
________________________________________ ________________________________________
________________________________________ ________________________________________
________________________________________ ________________________________________
________________________________________ ________________________________________
Summary (attach copies of all hand-outs as appropriate)
Figure 3: Training Requirements Register – Spreadsheet Field and Content Guidelines
GGI Staff Member GGI ESMS Documents – Training Requirements, Frequency, Methods, and Training Status, by Individual
(insert (Insert other

Position/ ESMS other Management
Name IT GG-01 GG-02 GG-03 GG-04 GG-05 GG-06 GG-07 GG-08 GG-09 GG-10 GG-11 GG-12 GG-13 GG-14
Title Plan SOPs) Plans)
Training Methods Codes Frequency:

 SDT – Self Directed Training  One-time
 OJT – On-the-job Training  Annual refresher
 CRT – Classroom Training  Other (specify)
GG-07: Distribution and Control of ESMS Documents

This procedure defines the methods that Guyana Goldfields, Inc. (GGI) will use to
ensure that current approved versions of the GGI Environmental and Social
Management System Plan (ESMS Plan) and all supporting Management Plans and
Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) are distributed for use; and to ensure that
obsolete documents are removed from controlled circulation.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Controlled ESMS Documents
Controlled ESMS documents have specific work-controlling functions, and include the:
 GGI ESMS Plan;

 GGI Management Plans, as identified in the current iteration of the ESMS Plan;
and
 GGI SOPs.
The Environmental Manager is responsible for ensuring that ESMS documents are
approved, issued, updated, and distributed to appropriate end users in a controlled
manner.
3.2 Designated Records Clerk
The designated Records Clerk is responsible for monitoring receipt of reading training
acknowledgements from recipients, maintaining the master Document Control Log (see
Figure 2), and filing hard-copy records of all current and superseded ESMS documents.

3.2 All Employees
All GGI employees who receive copies of controlled documents are responsible for
removing obsolete versions of documents from use, deleting or destroying any outdated
copies, for reading the newly distributed document, and for returning e-mails that
acknowledge receipt and completion of reading to the designated Records Clerk.
4.0 PROCEDURE
The procedure consists of the following steps, which are summarized as a flowchart in
Figure 1.
4.1 Review and Approval Requirements
All controlled documents are to be reviewed and revised at the direction of the
Environmental Manager; updated documents will be entered into a master Document
Control Log (see Figure 2).
If revisions are made, the revision level in the text of the document will be updated as
required, and the revised document submitted for review and approval in accordance
with the requirements of Section 1.3 of the ESMS Plan (for Management Plans or the
ESMS Plan) or GG-11, “Preparation, Review, Approval, and Update of Standard
Operating Procedures” (for SOPs). All comments shall be resolved, and approval shall
be indicated in the appropriate column of the Document Control Log.
4.2 Distribution
New or revised controlled ESMS documents shall be saved in read-only (.pdf) format
and forwarded via e-mail to all recipients with a cc: to the designated Records Clerk.
4.3 Master Document Control Log
The designated Records Clerk shall update the Document Control Log to note all
recipients, the revision level(s) of the document(s) distributed, and the distribution date.
4.4 Acknowledgement of Receipt and Reading Training
Recipients are expected to read all distributed documents and e-mail an

acknowledgement of receipt and completion of reading back to the Records Clerk,
who shall update the Document Control Log accordingly. Hard copies of ESMS
documents may be made for the convenience of the recipient, but only the electronic
copy is considered to be controlled. Recipients are expected to remove obsolete hard
copies from service.

Copies of e-mails from all recipients shall be retained as reading training records, as
noted in GG-06, “ESMS Training Program.” Additional levels of training may be required
by the Environmental Manager as discussed in GG-06.
4.5 Records
Records resulting from this procedure include:
 current and superseded copies of controlled documents,

 file copies of e-mail acknowledgements from document recipients, and
 the Document Control Log.
Records shall be maintained in accordance with GG-05, “Records Management.”
5.0 REFERENCES
 GGI ESMS Plan


Figure 1: Controlled Distribution and Update of ESMS Documents
Env. Manager
Release new or
updated document
via e-mail distribution;
cc: Records Clerk
Records Clerk
Review distribution e-
mail, update
distribution log
Recipients
E-mail
acknowledgement
when document has
been read
Records Clerk
Update Document
Control Log
Records Clerk
File superseded
document masters
F Clerk
Records Records Clerk
File reading Retain records per

acknowledgement GG-05
e-mail

Figure 2:
ESMS Document Control Log
GGI ESMS Document Control Log
Receipt/
No./Name of Document Date
Intended Recipient(s) reading
Distributed
confirmed

GG-08: Environmental and Social Footprint Surveys

(Aurora Project Manager) (Environmental Manager)
This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) defines the minimum requirements for
conducting environmental and social “footprint” surveys within the boundaries of GGI’s
Aurora Project concession. Areas to be cleared may include prospecting/exploration
trails; surface sampling areas; drill pad areas; surface trenches; roadway alignments;
forested areas; and/or other undeveloped areas to be cleared for construction of facilities
or supporting infrastructure for the Guyana Gold, Inc. (GGI) Aurora Project. Surveys will
be performed by qualified field ecologists or biologists, who will identify potentially
sensitive environmental features or habitats as well as note any evidence of current or
historical human use, and provide guidance on appropriate realignments or setbacks.
This SOP will apply through the end of the operational phase of the Project (assuming
no exploration activities will take place during decommissioning and closure), and
supports Section 4.3.2 (“Management of Social and Environmental Impacts”) of the GGI
Environmental and Social Management System Plan (ESMS Plan), and other GGI
Management Plans and SOPs when specified therein.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Environmental and Social Footprint Survey
An Environmental and Social Footprint Survey is defined as a field examination of a

proposed trail, roadway alignment, sampling area, or other clearance area within the
Aurora Project concession, for purposes of identifying and protecting surface water
features and other potentially sensitive environmental areas or habitats, as well as
noting any evidence of current or historical human use.
2.2 Archaeological Find
An archaeological find is defined as the chance discovery, during an environmental

and social footprint survey, of relics or human artefacts with potential archaeological or
historical significance. Archaeological finds could include human remains, especially in
association with artefacts or articles that indicate ritual burial; pottery or pottery shards;
stone tools or implements; or metal, glass, or ceramic objects that could date to the
colonial or pre-colonial era. Refuse from artisanal mining or other intrusive activities that
are clearly dated later than 1900 will generally not be considered to be of archaeological
or historical significance. Examples of potentially significant pre-colonial artefacts that

could be found in the Project area are depicted in Figure 2 of SOP GG-25, “Chance
Archaeological Finds.” All such discoveries will be documented and reported to the GGI
Environmental Manager for further evaluation and reporting, as appropriate, in
accordance with GG-25. Evidence of current or recent human use or direct encounters
with illegal/artisanal or small-scale miners (ASMs) during footprint surveys will be
immediately referred to GGI security for their evaluation and further investigation if
determined to be a potential breach in site security, as noted in GG-40, “Site Security.”
The Environmental Manager shall identify one or several qualified field ecologists or
biologists, from GGI staff or contractor resources, to conduct documented environmental
and social footprint surveys in accordance with this procedure. The Environmental
Manager shall ensure that appropriate contract agreements are in place, if required, and
provide the selected field ecologists or biologists. The Environmental Manager shall
coordinate with the Environmental Officer and affected Area Supervisors or Construction
Managers to schedule footprint surveys in advance of a specific clearance need, and
shall review and approve all survey reports.
The Environmental Officer is responsible for training affected Area Supervisors or

Construction Managers in the requirements of this procedure, as well as the designated
field ecologists/biologists, prior to conducting any field activities. The Environmental
Officer shall also assist in the scheduling of footprint surveys in advance of a specific
clearance need, and shall monitor clearance activities to ensure that requested
realignments or setbacks are properly implemented.
3.3 Area Supervisors/Construction Manager
Affected Area Supervisors or Construction Managers will coordinate with the

Environmental Manager and Environmental Officer in scheduling footprint surveys in
advance of a specific clearance need. They shall also enforce decisions on any required
realignment or construction setback that may be required as a result of the footprint
survey.
3.4 Site Security Personnel
By definition , all footprint surveys will be conducted within the boundaries of the Aurora
Project concession, and any authorized ASM, logging, hunting, settlement, or other
intrusive human activities encountered in preparation for site clearance represents a
breach of security. Site security personnel are responsible for assessing the nature and
significance of the intrusive activities that may be reported as part of footprint surveys,
and for negotiating with the individuals involved or otherwise resolving the incursion
within the guidelines provided in GG-40, “Site Security” and the Project Community
Relations Management Plan.
3.5 Designated Field Ecologists/Biologists
Designated GGI or contractor field ecologists/biologists shall conduct environmental and

social footprint surveys in the manner specified in this SOP. Change archaeological
finds shall be referred to the Environmental Officer for appropriate action per GG-25,
“Chance Archaeological Finds.” Designated GGI or contractor Field
Ecologists/Biologists shall immediately advise GGI security if ASMs, other unauthorized
persons, or evidence of recent incursions by such individuals are observed in the
clearance area.
4.0 PROCEDURE
The process to be used in the performance of environmental and social surveys is

summarized in the following sections, and is depicted as a flowchart in Figure 1.
4.1 Selection and Training of Field Ecologists/Biologists
The Environmental Manager shall identify one or more qualified field ecologists or
biologists from GGI staff or contractor resources, to conduct documented environmental
and social footprint surveys. The Environmental Manager shall ensure that appropriate
contract agreements are in place, if required, and provide current site-specific biological
baseline studies or other appropriate reference information derived from the most
current Project ESIA. The selected field ecologists/biologists shall be trained in the
requirements of this procedure in accordance with GG-06, “ESMS Training Program”;
copies of the field ecologist/biologist’s professional resumes shall be appended to the
training record prior to filing as noted in Section 4.7.
4.2 Scheduling of Environmental and Social Footprint Surveys
The Environmental Manager shall coordinate with the Aurora Base Environmental
Officer and affected Area Supervisors or Construction Managers to schedule
environmental and social surveys sufficiently in advance of a specific clearance need to
permit the completion of the field portion of the survey and documentation of results as
described herein.
4.3 Establishment of Survey Boundaries
The nominal boundaries of the proposed survey shall be defined in advance by the
affected Area Supervisors or Construction Managers using Geographic Positioning
System (GPS)-referenced maps, photos, and/or sketches; coloured stakes or signs or
recognizable landscape features may be used as field reference points when
appropriate. Field marking using coloured plastic flagging is not permitted due to the
potential for ensnaring avian or terrestrial wildlife.
4.4 Conducting the Environmental and Social Footprint Survey
The survey may be conducted in daylight and/or at night, as directed by the field
ecologist/biologist based on the habits of the species indicated by available baseline
studies. The field ecologists/biologists shall be accompanied by GGI staff members who
have participated in the initial site or alignment definition discussed in Section 4.3. All
personnel participating in the survey shall wear appropriate personal protective
equipment (e.g., hard hat, high boots or snake leggings, headlamp) in accordance with
GG-11, “Personal Protective Equipment.” Field ecologists/biologists shall carry a hand-
held GPS device, camera, field notebook, a laminated copy of Figure 3 from GG-25, ,
“Chance Archaeological Finds,” along with appropriately detailed habitat data sheets,
species checklists, or other field references as necessary to support the survey.
Species and habitat observations shall be made visually and should be confirmatory in
scope. The survey should not require field sampling, the intentional capture of any
species, or the duplication of the level of effort that, for example, would typically be
involved in a definitive baseline study. Appropriately detailed field notes and
photographs shall be recorded, however, to facilitate the preparation of the report
discussed in Section 4.5. If any chance archaeological finds are encountered, as noted
in Section 2.2, they shall be photographed or marked with coloured stakes or signs, GPS
coordinate recorded, and referred to the GGI Environmental Manager for further
evaluation in accordance with GG-25. If ASMs, other unauthorized persons, or evidence
of recent incursions by such individuals are observed in the clearance area, immediately
leave the site and report the incursion to GGI security for their appropriate action
pursuant to GG-40, “Site Security.” The survey may not be resumed until cleared by
Security and re-scheduled by the Environmental Manger and/or Construction Manager.
4.5 Environmental and Social Survey Report
The field ecologist/biologist shall prepare a brief letter report (or internal memorandum. If
conducted by GGI staff) that documents the results of specific area or alignment
surveys. At a minimum, the report shall include:
 the date of the survey;
 a simple map or sketch showing the approximate location of the survey,
 the precise GPS locations of survey points along an alignment, or the corners of
any polygonal survey area;

 a general description of the alignment or area surveyed, including discussion of
the relative level of current or prior human disturbance [i.e., evidence (or no
evidence) of previous logging; evidence (or no evidence) of recent ASM
activity)];
 a definition of the forest type (e.g., “white sand wallaba forest” or “floodplain mora
forest”), if forested areas are included in the survey scope;
 discussion of any specific surface water features (e.g., seeps, springs, creeks,
ponds, bogs, swamps) encountered in the survey;
 general discussion of the avian, terrestrial, and aquatic species encountered in

the survey and any associated habitat issues;
 a note on the presence or absence of any chance archaeological finds, or any

debris, garbage, or erosion damage or conditions from ASM activities;
 identification of any specific environmental features or species habitat requiring

realignment or construction setbacks;
 recommendations on appropriate realignment locations and setback distances;
 sketch maps, photographs, and GPS coordinates of any recommended

realignments or construction setbacks; and
 the names the GGI staff members accompanying the surveyor(s).
The report will be submitted to the Environmental Manager for review; all questions or
comments will be resolved by the field ecologist/biologist and the report revised
accordingly.
The approved report will then be discussed with the affected Area Supervisor or
Construction Manager. Any technical adjustments in the recommended realignment or
setback will be discussed with the field ecologist/biologist; any final adjustments resulting
from this review will be noted in comments at the end of the report. Copies of the final
report will then be released to the Area Supervisor or Construction Manager to guide
construction activities, and to the Environmental Officer for monitoring purposes as
noted in Section 4.6.
4.6 Monitoring of Realignments and Setbacks
At the Environmental Manager’s direction, the Environmental Officer shall periodically

monitor the construction activities associated with a given environmental and social
survey to ensure that any required realignments or setbacks are observed during
construction. If discrepancies are noted, they will be documented as a non-conformance
on a Corrective and Preventive Action Request (CPAR) form and resolved as required
by GG-04, “Identification of Non-conformances and Corrective/Preventive Action.”
4.7 Records
Training records, copies of field ecologist/biologist resumes, copies of all final footprint
survey reports, and copies of any required CPARs will be retained in accordance with
GG-05, “Records Management.”
5.0 REFERENCES
 GGI ESMS Plan

 GGI Community Relations Management Plan
 GG-04, “Identification of Non-conformances and Corrective/Preventive Action”
 GG-11, “Personal Protective Equipment”
 GG-25, “Chance Archaeological Finds”
 GG-40, “Site Security”

Figure 1: Environmental and Social Footprint Survey Process
Env. Manager/Area
Supervisors/Constr. Mgr.
Select field ecologists/ Schedule environmental

biologists, provide and social footprint
baseline/ESIA data survey
Environmental Manager Survey Crew
Train field ecologists/ Flag boundaries/

biologists in GG-08 alignment of survey area,
requirements, per GG-06 record GPS data
Survey Crew
Yes
Current ASM
or other human
use?
No
Field Ecologist/
Biologist
Conduct footprint survey;
record observations, GPS
data, photos of
sensitive areas
Survey Crew/Field
Field Ecol./Bio Ecologist/Biologist
Yes
Current ASMs or Leave area immediately,
other intruders? advise security and
Construction Mgr.
No
Field Ecologist/
Biologist Security Officer
Field Ecol./Bio Security Officer
Yes
Flag site, refer to Potential
chance arch.
Investigate site,
Environmental Officer for negotiate exit of intruders Advise when
find?
action per GG-25 per GG-40 and intruders
No Community Relations have departed
Management Plan
Field Ecologist/ Field Ecologist/
Biologist Biologist
Prepare Environmental
Resolve questions/
and Social
comments
Footprint report
Env. Mgr.
No Yes
Approve?
Yes
Forward Environmental
and Social
Footprint Report to
Construction Manager
with any recommended
setbacks
Area Supervisors/
Environmental Officer Records Clerk
Construction Managers
Monitor clearance; File records
Initiate clearance if required, per GG-05
initiate CPARs
and resolve per GG-04

GG-09: Identification of Project-related Safety Hazards
and Assessment of Risks

conducting occupational health and safety (OHS) risk assessments for the various
work sites that comprise the Guyana Gold, Inc. (GGI) Aurora Project. Specifically,
this SOP addresses requirements to identify hazards, assess the associated risks,
and identify control measures to manage the risks so identified. This SOP also
addresses requirements to record the outcome of the risk assessment in an annually
updated risk register, and to inform and instruct employees on the nature of the
assessed hazards and proper risk control measures. OHS risk assessments are to
be carried out for each significant operation, process, and activity conducted by the
GGI workforce, at all Aurora Project worksites.
This SOP will apply over the life of the Project; it supports Section 3.3 (Occupational
Health and Safety Hazard Identification, Risk Assessment, and Risk Management
Planning”) of the GGI Environmental and Social Management System Plan (ESMS
Plan), the GGI Occupational Health and Safety/Accident Prevention Plan, and other
GGI Management Plans and SOPs when specified therein.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Accident
An accident is defined an unintended mishap that results in injury or other harm to a

human being and/or damage to equipment or property.
2.2 Hazard
A hazard is a condition that could make an accident more likely or more severe.
2.3 Risk
For the purposes of this procedure, risk is an expression of the probability of

incurring an accident, considering the likelihood that the potential mishap will occur,
and the potential severity of the consequences.

2.4 Risk Assessment
A risk assessment is an exercise intended to identify hazards, evaluate the nature

and extent of the risk posed by those hazards, and assist management in selecting
and prioritizing effective control measures. The goal of the risk assessment is
ultimately to prevent work-related injuries and illnesses, and unintended damage to
the environment as well as GGI equipment or property.
A risk assessment may be considered sufficient if it:
 realistically identifies workplace hazards;
 reliably predicts the potential injury or harm related to those hazards;
 does not unduly emphasize insignificant or inconsequential risks;
 evaluates the severity of the potential consequences and the workers (and/or
visitors, contractors, or members of the public) who would be affected; and
 provides sufficient information to enable management to select or develop

appropriate control measures, taking into account available and appropriate
methods or technologies.
3.1 Health and Safety Officer
The Health and Safety Officer is responsible to the GGI Environmental Manager for:
 performing (and properly documenting risk assessments in accordance with

the requirements of this SOP;
 ensuring that hazard analyses are performed for each significant process,
operation, job, or task performed, at all Aurora Project sites;
 ensuring that appropriate control measures are selected, developed, and

implemented in keeping with the findings of the risk assessment;
 providing information, instruction, and training to employees on the control

measures to be used to prevent or mitigate risks; and
 ensuring that the risk assessments are reviewed and on at least an annual
basis, revised as required, and preventive or mitigative measures adjusted as
appropriate.

3.2 Area Supervisors
Area Supervisors have general responsibility for establishing and maintaining a safe
working environment in their assigned areas of responsibility. Area supervisors or
their designees should collaborate with the Health and Safety Officer in initial risk
assessment exercises, and should notify the Health and Safety Officer about any
potential hazards of which the supervisor may already be aware. Area Supervisors
must remain vigilant with respect to changing workplace hazards, and must notify the
Health and Safety Officer with respect to any previously unrecognized hazards
and/or changes in operating conditions or practices. The supervisor is also
responsible for monitoring employee performance to ensure that work is performed in
accordance with applicable SOPs and information provided in training.
3.3 GGI Employees
All GGI employees are responsible for:
 attending OHS meetings (see GG-23, “Operational Safety Meetings”) and

participating in training exercises, as requested by their supervisors or the
Health and Safety Officer;
 performing work safely in accordance with the SOPs provided and the training
received; and
 informing their supervisor or the Health and Safety Officer with respect to any
observations of dangerous or deteriorating situations, or any other perceived
shortcoming in GGI’s OHS practices.
The Environmental Manager shall review and approve each update for all Risk
Registers and present the results to upper management for consideration in the
authorization of additional risk reduction measures.
3.5 Vice President (VP), Aurora Project/GGI Management
GGI management shall consider the current OHS Risk Registers in the establishment
of annual operational budgets and, where deemed practicable and appropriate,
authorization of additional OHS risk reduction measures.
4.0 PROCEDURE
The general process for conducting OH&S risk assessments is described in the
following steps. The process is also summarized as a flowchart in Figure 1.
4.1 Identify Hazard Category or Source

The Health and Safety Officer shall identify the various departments or areas that
comprise a particular site (e.g., security, medical, stores, road transportation,
geotechnical) and represent a general category or source of OHS hazards. The
categories or sources so identifies will be recorded on the risk register.
4.2 Analyse Hazards and Identify Risks
The Health and Safety Officer shall evaluate the hazard source areas identified in
Section 4.1, and identify the specific risks that are known to be, or could be
associated with a given source. The Health and Safety Officer should identify as
many credible risks as possible in each area; the risks so identified shall be record on
the Risk Register form. For example, evaluation of the hazards associated with a
camp kitchen would likely note the potential risk of foodborne illness; in the medical
area, there are known risks associated with potentially serious illness; and in the area
of transportation, risks of vehicle accidents are always present.
At a minimum, the Health and Safety Officer should consider the risks associated
with work areas, departmental functions, and work activities that involve:
 working with or near boats,  working with food

barges, ferries, or aircraft  working near or handling hot
 working with or near explosives materials
 lifting and chopping  using chainsaws
 carrying materials or equipment  working near or handling toxic or
 sanding or grinding corrosive chemicals including
 pushing/pulling paints/solvents
 drilling and sampling  using hammers or jackhammers
 working with or near sources of  spraying insecticide
electricity  demolition
 oxy/acetylene cutting  shovelling
 working with compressed gases  trenching/excavation
 welding  working with hand tools
 working with fuels or lubricants  working with power tools
 operating machinery  working at heights
 driving ATVs and light trucks  working with wheelbarrows
 driving heavy equipment  climbing
 providing medical care to ill  working in confined spaces
patients  working in forest areas
Potential hazards to be noted may also include:
 communicable diseases
 rotating equipment
 falling from heights
 slippery surfaces slips/trips/falls
 being struck by flying objects expelled from vehicles, machinery, or tools
 being struck by falling objects either from overhead or dropped on foot
 rolling objects (foot injury)
 being trapped under machinery or materials

 being impacted by a fixed (protruding) object
 getting caught in or between moving parts
 being burned by hot materials
 splashing fuel, lubricants, or chemicals
 electric shock
 electric arc flash
 heat stroke
 excessive noise, dust, or vibration
 sharp equipment or materials that could cause potential cuts or punctures
 oxygen deficient atmospheres (confined spaces)
 toxic atmospheres (gases or vapors)
 snakebite
 exposure to vectors of serious disease
4.3 Identify Current Preventive Measures
For each of the risks elaborated in Section 4.3, the Health and Safety Officer should
accurately describe the current measures (preventive or mitigative) that are currently
used to manage the risk. These should include any and all engineered measures,
training programs, planning or other administrative controls, and/or Personal
Protective Equipment (PPE; see GG-11, “Personal Protective Equipment”).
4.4 Identification of Persons at Risk
The Health and Safety Officer shall assess the extent of the potential impact of a
given risk to determine the categories of persons at risk; these individuals could be
GGI employees, as well as visitors to the Project sites, transient artisanal miners or
members of local communities, and/or GGI contractors. Record this determination
by a tick mark in the “persons at risk” columns on the Risk Register form.
4.5 Estimation of Risk Severity with Current Preventive Measures Applied
The Health and Safety Officer should estimate the relative severity (i.e., minor,
moderate, or major) of the risk, taking into account all current preventive or mitigative
measures, as discussed in Section 4.4. The next-to-last column of the Risk Register
should be marked and colour-coded accordingly.
4.6 Identify Additional Preventive Measures
The Health and Safety Officer shall evaluate the relative severity of the risk, as
determined in Section 4.6, and consider additional reasonable control measures that
could potentially be implemented over the next planning year to further reduce the
severity of the noted risk, especially for all risks identified as moderate or major. In
identifying any such improvements, the Health and Safety Officer should ensure that
each additional preventive measure:
 meets specific standards set by applicable legal requirements;

 complies with a recognized industry standard;
 represents a good industrial, engineering, or management practice;

 is consistent with GGI’s corporate policies; and
 reduces risk to levels that are reasonably practicable.
Examples of potentially appropriate additional control measures could include:
 development of (or refinement of existing) Action Plans, as discussed in

Section 1.2 of the GGI Environmental and Social Management System Plan
(ESMS Plan);
 management of new or inadequately controlled solid waste streams in

accordance with the GGI Waste Management Plan;
 identification and use of appropriate additional PPE (see GG-11, “Personal

Protective Equipment”);
 additional staff training (see GG-23, “Operational Safety Meetings” and GG-
06, “ESMS Training Program”);
 installation/re-installation of appropriate machinery safeguards (see GG-18,

“Machine Guards and Safety Barriers”);
 improved fire prevention measures (see GG-22, “Fire Prevention Program,”

GG-20, “Electrical Safety,” and GG-19, “Welding and Cutting Safety”);
 implementation of special procedures for working in confined spaces (see

GG-21, “Confined Space Work Safety”); or
 development and implementation of new SOPs in accordance with GG-02,

“Preparation, Review, Approval, and Update of Standard Operating
Procedures.”
The proposed control measures shall be documented on the Risk Register and
submitted to the Environmental Manager for review and approval.
4.7 Review, Approval, and Update
The Environmental Manager shall review the completed Risk Register; all comments
shall be resolved, and the completed Risk Register submitted to the VP, Aurora
Project and GGI’s upper management for consideration in the annual budgeting
process, and for the evaluation and potential authorization of specific risk reduction
improvements. The approved Risk Register will also be used as a key reference by
the Health and Safety Officer in providing annual OHS refresher training to Project
staff.
4.8 Risk Assessment Records
Once the Risk Register is approved, a master copy shall be routed to the designated
Records Clerk for retention in accordance with GG-05, “Records Management.”

5.0 REFERENCES
 GGI ESMS Plan

 GGI Waste Management Plan
 GGI Occupational Health and Safety/Accident Prevention Plan
 GG-02, “Preparation, Review, Approval, and Update of Standard Operating
Procedures”
 GG-05, “Records Management.”
 GG-18, “Machine Guards and Safety Barriers”
 GG-19, “Welding and Cutting Safety”
 GG-20, “Electrical Safety”
 GG-21, “Confined Space Work Safety”
 GG-22, “Fire Prevention Program”; and
 GG-24, “Operational Safety Meetings.”

Figure 1: Risk Assessment Process
H&S Officer
Schedule risk assessment,

select Risk Teams for
each Project site
H&S Officer
Identify hazard categories

or sources;
record on Risk Register
H&S Officer
Identify significant risks

associated with hazard
categories or sources;
record on Register
H&S Officer
Identify current
preventive/mitigative
measures for each risk
H&S Officer
Identify persons at risk

and relative severity;
record on Register
H&S Officer H&S Officer
Identify additional
Resolve comments preventive and mitigative
risk reduction measures
Env. Manager
No
Approve updated
registers?
Yes
Upper Management
Consider suggested
risk reduction measures
in annual budgeting
exercise
H&S Officer Records Clerk
Conduct annual
File records
OHS refresher training
per GG-05
per GG-06

Figure 2: Risk Register Form
Guyana Goldfields, Inc.

Date: [insert date]
OHS Risk Register
Severity Minor Moderate Major

Prepared by: [insert name]
Site: [insert site name] Approved By:

Persons at
Risk
Contractors
Community
Employees
Hazard category or source Risks Current preventive measures Severity of risk with
Additional preventive measures
Visitors
current preventative
to be considered in next year
measures applied

GG-10: Prevention and Monitoring
of Communicable Diseases
The protection of the health of Guyana Goldfields, Inc. (GGI) employees, contractors,
and visitors is vital to the success of the Aurora Project. This Standard Operating
Procedure (SOP) establishes minimum requirements for the prevention, detection,
minimization of exposure to, and treatment of communicable diseases in temporary
prospecting and exploration camps, as well as the semi-permanent man camp
established for the construction and operational phases of the Project.
This SOP will apply over the life of the Project; it supports Section 4.3.2 (“Management
of Social and Environmental Impacts’) of the GGI Environmental and Social
Management System Plan (ESMS Plan), and other GGI Management Plans and SOPs
when specified therein.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Blood-borne Diseases
Blood-borne diseases are spread by direct contact with blood; examples include
hepatitis and human immunodeficiency virus (HIV)/ acquired immune deficiency
syndrome (AIDs).
2.2 Communicable or Contagious Diseases
Communicable or contagious diseases are generally defined as diseases that are

readily transmitted from person to person by direct contact with an infected individual or
indirectly through a vector (e.g., insects or rodents). Such diseases (e.g., malaria,
dengue fever, HIV/AIDS) may be contracted as a result of insect or rodent bites; direct
contact with blood from an infected patient; by inhaling or ingesting contaminants or
pathogens through the respiratory or gastrointestinal systems, respectively; by skin-to-
skin contact; or from sexual activity.
2.3 Dermatological Diseases
Contagious dermatological diseases are conditions related to skin or hair (e.g., body
lice) that can be spread through direct contact, or through shared clothing, or from
shared use of combs or razors. Although not life-threatening, such diseases may cause
substantial discomfort and can create significant tension in a camp living situation.

2.4 Gastrointestinal Diseases
Contagious gastrointestinal diseases affect the stomach or intestines and may be

caused by contamination of food or water supplies; examples include dysentery,
salmonella, trichinosis, and diarrhea.
2.5 Respiratory Diseases
Respiratory diseases affect the organs that are involved in breathing (i.e., the nose,
throat, larynx, trachea, bronchial tubes, and lungs). These diseases are typically spread
by airborne contaminants or pathogens; examples include common colds, influenza, and
pneumonia.
2.6 Sexually Transmitted Diseases (STDs)
STDs are typically spread from person to person by sexual activity and include such
diseases as genital herpes, gonorrhea, syphilis, and HIV/AIDS. Without treatment,
many STDs can lead to major health problems such as infertility, permanent brain
damage, heart disease, cancer, or death.
3.1 Site Medics
Site medics are trained and qualified medical professionals assigned to the medical
clinics at individual Project camp sites, and are responsible to the Health and Safety
Officer and the Environmental Manager for providing communicable disease prevention
training to Project staff and contractors. Site medics will ensure that monitoring and
treatment guidelines are followed, and that all employees and visitors to the mine
receive appropriate instruction on preventive hygiene. Medics are also responsible for
monitoring the health of the workforce and investigating any potential outbreaks of
communicable diseases, as well as for treating patients and/or arranging for transport
and treatment at an appropriately staffed and equipped offsite clinic or hospital. Medics
are also responsible for reporting such incidents to the Health and Safety Officer and the
Environmental Manager, and for initiating appropriate corrective and preventive action.
Medics may also initiate emergency evacuation of workers or visitors when, in their
professional judgment, such evacuation is a medical necessity [e.g., traumatic injury or
inability to walk (see GG-12, “First Aid and Emergency Medical Response”)] or if
symptoms of serious communicable diseases are observed.
3.2 Area Managers and Supervisors
Area Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring that employees in their
assigned areas of responsibility have undergone communicable disease prevention
training as outlined in this SOP. Supervisors shall immediately advise the Safety Health
and Safety Officer and the Environmental Manager if they observe potential symptoms
of communicable diseases, or are advised by workers about any observed incidences of
communicable diseases, and ensure that proper steps are taken to treat those afflicted.
See GG-12, “First Aid and Emergency Medical Response.”
3.3 Project Workforce
The Aurora Project workforce shall implement proper personal and industrial hygiene
and communicable disease prevention practices, and shall immediately bring any
concerns to the attention of their Supervisor or camp medics should they notice
symptoms of a potentially communicable disease.
4.0 PROCEDURE
The process for preventing, detecting, minimizing exposure to, and treating
communicable diseases is presented in the following paragraphs and is summarized as
a flowchart in Figure 1.
4.1 Physical Examinations
All potential GGI employees shall pass a physical and medical examination administered
by a GGI medic or another licensed medical professional, as a condition of employment.
Any applicants who exhibit symptoms of a communicable disease in this examination
shall be required to seek treatment prior to completing the application process. Interim
treatment may be provided in keeping with the professional judgment of the site medics,
and the applicant will be referred to local or regional clinics or hospitals for completion of
medical treatment.
4.2 Communicable Disease Prevention Training
The Health and Safety Officer and/or site medics shall provide periodic disease
prevention training to project staff (and contractors, as appropriate) using one or more of
the methods specified in GG-06, “ESMS Training Program.”
4.3 Code of Conduct Review
Trainees shall be reminded of several key elements of the GGI “Labour Grievance
Policy” that are related directly to the prevention of communicable diseases. These
include:
 Use of alcohol or illegal drugs: Use of alcohol or illegal drugs is expressly

forbidden within the boundaries of the Project concession and by any contractors
or employees traveling to any Project site.

 Waste collection and disposal: All workers shall ensure that hazardous waste
and medical, canteen, and other wastes that could attract dangerous animals or
animal or insect disease vectors (e.g., snakes, rats, mice, flies, mosquitoes) is
disposed of in proper collection bins or containers as described by the Project
Waste Management Plan. Littering is prohibited within the boundaries of the
Project concession and by any contractors or employees traveling to any Project
site.
 Minimization of interactions with the local population: Project employees

shall not visit local artisanal miner encampments or local community residents
except as part of their Project work assignments. Project employees shall not
allow local residents to ride in Project vehicles except in case of an extreme
medical or humanitarian emergency. Project or contractor vehicles shall not stop
at any location along the transportation corridor to the mine site except where
required to show travel passes at established Barama or police checkpoints
 Harboring of animals or plants: No indoor pets, wild animals, or gardens may

be kept by any Project employees who are quartered in exploration camps or the
semi-permanent man camp.
4.3.1 General Requirements – Personal and Industrial Hygiene
Because of the close proximity of workers in a camp-based living situation, outbreaks of

communicable disease at any level could have serious operational consequences for the
Project. However, much of the risk associated with such outbreaks can be substantially
minimized by relatively simple methods, e.g., by paying close and consistent attention to
basic personal and industrial hygiene. The following points should therefore be
emphasized in training:
 All staff shall be instructed regarding the importance of personal cleanliness in

preventing disease, especially the importance of washing hands with soap and
water before any activity that brings hands in contact with the mouth (e.g., eating,
drinking, smoking), and after using the toilet.
 All staff are expected to practice appropriate cough or sneeze etiquette (e.g.,
covering coughs or sneezes, washing hands).
 Staff shall not share eating or drinking utensils, towels, washcloths, clothing,
hats, Personal Protective Equipment (PPE), or personal items such as combs,
soap, or razors.
 All workers are expected to wash or shower regularly.
 Clothing and bed linens shall be washed regularly.

 All staff shall immediately report any cuts, burns, abrasions, wounds, or other
illness to the medic (see GG-12, “First Aid and Emergency Medical Response”).
First Aid Providers are immediately recognizable by the “red cross” decals on
their hard hats and identification badges.
 Minor wounds shall be kept clean and covered with clean, dry bandages until
healed, in accordance with the medic’s instructions.
Areas such as kitchens, dining areas, bathrooms, First Aid stations, and medical clinics
all have potentially high concentrations of germs, and must be periodically disinfected to
minimize the possibility that germs will spread. Janitorial workers shall therefore comply
with the following guidelines:
 Clean working surfaces thoroughly with soap and water, a chlorine-based

disinfectant, or a solution of 5 milliliters (mL) chlorine bleach in 1 liter of water.
Let disinfected areas stand for a few minutes before wiping the excess with clean
cloths or paper towels; collect and properly dispose of cleaning waste.
 When cleaning areas such as bathrooms or clinic areas that may have been
contaminated by excreta, blood, or other bodily fluids, wear disposable rubber
gloves; this is especially important if janitorial staff have any cuts or scratches on
their hands, or if patients with communicable disease symptoms have used the
areas being cleaned.
4.3.2 Minimum Requirements for Food Preparation and Handling
Careless food handling and improper cooking are often the source of disease-causing
organisms. Cooks and canteen workers shall therefore observe the following minimum
requirements:
 Frozen meat, fish, and poultry shall be inspected upon receipt at the camp to
ensure that it has not thawed in transit.
 Cutting boards and kitchen utensils used to prepare meat, fish, or poultry must
be cleaned with a scrub brush, soap, and hot water before being used for
another food, in order to prevent potential cross-contamination.
 Personnel with symptoms of diarrhea, respiratory or gastrointestinal infections, or

other communicable diseases shall not be permitted to work as food handlers
until they have recovered and are cleared to return to work by the camp medic.
 Kitchen areas shall be cleaned and putrescible wastes removed and properly
disposed of at least daily. Grease traps should be cleaned at least monthly, with
waste grease collected and properly disposed.

 Food handlers shall wash hands before starting to prepare a meal, and after
handling raw meat, fish, or poultry. Servers and kitchen helpers shall use
disposable polyethylene gloves.
 Lids of canned foods shall be washed before opening to keep dirt from getting
into the food, and the blade of the can opener shall be washed after each use.
 Fresh fruits and vegetables shall be washed thoroughly and rinsed in potable
water.
 Food preparation machinery such as mixers or meat grinders shall be

disassembled and cleaned with soap and water as soon as possible after they
are used.
 Countertops shall be washed at least daily with a solution of 5 mL chlorine bleach

in 1 liter of water or with a commercial kitchen cleaning agent.
 Dishcloths and kitchen sponges shall be washed in the canteen’s automatic

dishwashing machine at least daily.
 Meat thermometers and recipe temperature references shall be used to ensure

that pork, poultry, and other meats are not served in a raw or underdone
condition.
4.3.3 Recognition of Symptoms of Communicable Diseases
Trainees shall be provided general information on symptoms and appropriate

precautions associated with major communicable diseases. Attachment 1 is a table
summarizing current World Health Organization (WHO) profiles for communicable
1
diseases of potential concern in the area of the Aurora Project. Informational copies of
Attachment 1 may be provided to trainees or other interested parties at the discretion of
the Health and Safety Officer.
4.4 Planning of Sanitary Facilities and Hygienic Considerations in Man

Camp/Canteen Construction
The Procurement Manager shall ensure that procurement specifications for the design
and construction of new man camp and canteen facilities are routed to the
Environmental Manager and Health and Safety Officer and for review and comment prior
to issue, in order to ensure that appropriate hygienic measures are properly considered.
At a minimum, the following features should be evaluated for adequacy relative to the
maximum expected occupancy of any new camp:
1
See World Health Organization, 2011; International Travel and Health, http://www.who.int/ith/en/, Chapters
5 and 7.

 potable water arrangements;
 provisions for toilets, showers, and sinks in bathroom areas;
 laundry facilities;
 grey water and sanitary effluent collection and treatment systems, septic
systems, drain fields, and/or backflow prevention systems;
 garbage/solid waste collection containers and accumulation areas;
 cooling/ventilation arrangements in living spaces and canteen areas;
 refrigeration systems;
 ranges, ovens, grease traps, exhaust fans, dishwashers, and other kitchen
equipment;
 backup generator arrangements;
 first aid station locations;
 fire suppression systems/extinguishers in living spaces and canteen/kitchen
areas; and
 vector control considerations.
4.5 Field Inspections
On at least an annual basis the Health and Safety Officer shall perform an inspection of
the sanitary/hygienic conditions and related infrastructure in the man camp and canteen
areas. The inspection shall be documented as noted in GG-03, “Field Inspection,” and a
copy of the inspection report shall be forwarded to the site medic and the Health and
Safety Officer. Any observed non-conformances shall be separately documented and
resolved in accordance with GG-04, “Identification of Non-conformances and
Corrective/Preventive Action.” Similar inspections shall be scheduled for evaluating the
sanitary/hygienic conditions of any temporary exploration camps with overnight
accommodations and cooking facilities; such inspections shall be conducted as soon as
possible after the camp is considered operational.
4.6 Monitoring of Workforce Health
Camp medics shall monitor trends in staff health through the routine provision of medical
care, in response to specific staff requests or as prompted by First Aid or emergency
response requirements (see GG-12, “First Aid and Emergency Medical Response”).
Incidents or observations requiring reporting or other actions under applicable national l
regulations shall be acted on and submittals prepared as required; any such submittals
shall be forwarded to the Environmental Manager and Health and Safety Officer for
review prior to submittal, with copies retained in the project records as noted in Section
4.8. Any detected conditions that could represent an outbreak of a communicable
disease shall be addressed as noted in Section 4.7.
4.7 Provision of Medical Services to Transients, Groups, or Local Communities
Although the Project is located in a very remote area, the Health and Safety Officer or
Medics may be called upon to provide emergency medical assistance to transient
individuals or groups of artisanal miners. Responses to such requests shall be discussed
with the Camp Manager and Health and Safety Officer prior to taking any action, as
noted in the Project Influx Management Plan.
4.8 Actions in Event of Suspected Outbreak of Communicable Disease
In the event of a suspected outbreak of a communicable disease, site medics shall take
the following actions:
 Notify: Immediately notify the Health and Safety Officer, Camp Manager,
Environmental Manager, and Aurora Project Manager. National health
authorities shall also be notified as specified in governing regulations.
 Isolate: The patient shall be immediately isolated and emergency treatment

provided. Isolation shall be maintained for the minimum period of time required
for the specific disease in accordance with national regulations or WHO
guidelines, whichever are more stringent. Isolation required for the specific
disease may be terminated only with the approval of the medic in order to
minimize the possibility for transmission of the disease.
 Quarantine: Potential carriers or individuals who may have been in close

contact with the patient shall be identified, examined, and, if indicated,
quarantined from contacts with other staff and monitored for the development of
disease symptoms. Quarantine times shall be maintained for the minimum
period of time required for the specific disease in accordance with national
regulations or WHO guidelines, whichever are more stringent. Quarantines
required for the specific disease may be terminated only with the approval the
medic in order to minimize the possibility for transmission of the disease.
 Control Wastes and Disinfect: Medical waste from the treatment of isolated or
quarantined patients shall be collected in biohazard containers and accumulated
for safe disposal in a licensed medical waste incinerator in Georgetown. Solid
food wastes from the patient’s room shall be bagged separately and disposed of
as putrescible waste. Liquid food waste may be emptied into dishwashing sinks;
utensils used by isolation patients shall be washed independently, through two
separate dishwashing cycles.
At the end of the period of isolation, bed frames, chairs, and other parts of the
room likely to come in contact with patients’ secretions shall be thoroughly
cleaned with water, soap or detergent, and chlorine-based disinfectant. Cleaning
personnel shall wear rubber gloves. Laundry shall be collected and washed
independently, through two separate automatic washing cycles using hot water.
 Investigate. Each communicable disease case shall be documented on a

Corrective/Preventive Action Request (CPAR) form by the medic in accordance
with an incident report and investigated to determine the source or vector, where
feasible. Other potentially affected individuals shall be identified and
quarantined, as appropriate. Vector controls shall be examined for integrity and
effectiveness, and other corrective/preventive actions taken as warranted,
including the preparation of additional reports or communication with national
health authorities.
If food-borne illness is suspected, an appropriate sample of affected patients with

similar symptoms or diagnostic results should be interviewed. Case histories
should be developed that include:
 date and time of onset of each person’s illness;
 a comprehensive list of signs and symptoms of each ill person, along with
their duration; and
 a list of the food and drinks ingested (and their probable sources) during the
72 hours prior to onset of illness.
If supported by diagnostic observations and the available data, a hypothesis

should be developed regarding a suspect common source; the hypothesis should
be used to guide the selection of preventive and corrective action. In addition,
samples of implicated foods should be collected and tested, when practical, to
confirm the probable source.
4.9 Records
Records shall be retained from any initial medical examination; from each visit made by
an employee, contractor, or visitor to the company medical clinic; and from any referrals
for treatment at an offsite clinic or hospital. Copies of all incident reports or CPARs shall
also be retained. Copies should be forwarded to human resources personnel files (for
workers) or the Health and Safety Officer (for visitors and contractors); records shall be
retained in accordance with GG-05, “ESMS Records Management.”
5.0 REFERENCES
 GGI ESMS Plan

 GGI Influx Management Plan
 GGI “Labour Grievance Procedure”
 GG-03, “Field Inspection”
 GG-12, “First Aid and Emergency Medical Response”

 World Health Organization, 2011; International Travel and Health,
http://www.who.int/ith/en/, Chapters 5 and 7.

Figure 1: Communicable Diseases – Prevention and Monitoring Process
H&S Officer H&S Officer Env. Mgr/H&S Officer

Provide treatment Administer physical exam Procurement Manager
and/or refer to physician or review exam Specify hygienic measures
for treatment records for applicants in procurement documents
for man camp/canteen
construction and operation
Yes H&S Officer

Diagnose disease? H&S Officer Medic/Camp Manager
Conduct acceptance Resolve
No inspection of man camp nonconformances
and canteen construction per GG-04
Medic
Provide disease
prevention/Code of
Conduct training to staff Yes H&S Officer No
Accept?
Medic
Monitor staff health, Yes
provide routine medical H&S Officer
care, reports as required Medic/Camp Manager
Conduct periodic Resolve
surveillance inspections nonconformances
of man camp/ per GG-04
exploration camps
No Medic per GG-03
Potential outbreak?
Yes
H&S Officer No
Medic
Accept?
Isolate patient, arrange
evacuation and offsite
treatment, advise Yes
authorities as required
H&S Officer
Forward inspection
results to
Medic camp medic
Document in incident
reprot; investigate
and treat or evacuate
potentially infected
personnel, other
actions as indicated
Records Clerk
File records
per GG-05

Attachment 1: Profiles for Major Communicable Diseases of Potential Concern in the Locale of the Aurora Project2
Disease Cause Mode of Transmission Description/Symptoms Prevention or Precautions

Prophylaxis
Cholera Vibrio cholerae Infection occurs through ingestion of food or water An acute enteric disease varying in severity. Most infections are Vaccines are As for other diarrhea diseases. All
bacteria contaminated directly or indirectly by feces or vomitus of asymptomatic (i.e., do not cause any noticeable illness). In mild cases, available. precautions should be taken to avoid
infected persons. Cholera affects only humans; there is no diarrhea occurs without other symptoms. In severe cases, there is consumption of potentially
insect vector or animal reservoir host. sudden onset of profuse watery diarrhea with nausea and vomiting and contaminated food, drinks, and
rapid development of dehydration. In severe cases that go untreated, drinking water. Oral dehydration salts
death may occur within a few hours due to dehydration leading to should be taken to combat dehydration
circulatory collapse. in case of severe diarrhea.
Dengue Virus (4 serotypes) Dengue is mostly transmitted by the Aedes aegypti Dengue occurs in three main clinical forms: None. Take precautions to avoid mosquito
mosquito, which bites during daylight hours. There is no  Dengue fever is an acute febrile illness with sudden onset of fever, bites both during the day and evening
direct person-to-person transmission. followed by development of generalized symptoms and sometimes in areas where dengue occurs
a macular skin rash. It is known as “breakbone fever” because of (primarily altitudes <400m).
severe muscle, joint, and bone pains. Pain behind the eyes (retro-
orbital pain) may be present. The fever may be biphasic (i.e., two
separate episodes or waves of fever). Most patients recover after
a few days.
 Dengue haemorrhagic fever has an acute onset of fever followed
by other symptoms resulting from thrombocytopenia, increased
vascular permeability, and haemorrhagic manifestations.
 Dengue shock syndrome supervenes in a small proportion of
cases. Severe hypotension develops, requiring urgent medical
treatment to correct hypovolemia. Without appropriate treatment,
40–50% of cases are fatal; with timely therapy, the mortality rate is
1% or less.
2
Primary source: World Health Organization, 2011; International Travel and Health, http://www.who.int/ith/en/, Chapters 5 and 7.

Prophylaxis
Hepatitis A Hepatitis A virus Acquired directly from infected persons by the fecal–oral An acute viral hepatitis with abrupt onset of fever, malaise, nausea, Vaccine available. Controlled sanitation and prevention of
route, or by close contact, or by consumption of and abdominal discomfort, followed by the development of jaundice a cross-contamination of potable water
contaminated food or drinking water. There is no insect few days later. Infection in very young children is usually mild or supplies.
vector or animal reservoir. asymptomatic; older children are at risk of symptomatic disease. The
disease is more severe in adults, with illness lasting several weeks and
recovery taking several months; case fatality is greater than 2% for
those over 40 years of age and 4% for those over 60.
Hepatitis B Hepatitis B virus Infection is transmitted via contact with infected body fluids. Many HBV infections are asymptomatic or cause mild symptoms, Vaccine available. Implement safe sexual practices and
(HBV) Sexual contact is an important mode of transmission, but which are often unrecognized in adults. When clinical hepatitis results avoid the use of any potentially
infection is also transmitted by transfusion of contaminated from infection, it has a gradual onset, with anorexia, abdominal contaminated instruments for injection
blood or blood products, or by use of contaminated needles discomfort, nausea, vomiting, arthralgia, and rash, followed by the or other skin-piercing activity.
or syringes for injections. There is also a potential risk of development of jaundice in some cases. In adults, about 1% of cases
transmission through other skin-penetrating procedures, are fatal. Chronic HBV infection persists in a proportion of adults,
including acupuncture and tattooing. Perinatal some of whom later develop cirrhosis and/or liver cancer.
transmission may occur from mother to baby. There is no
insect vector or animal reservoir.
Hepatitis C Hepatitis C virus The virus is acquired through person-to-person Most HCV infections are asymptomatic. In cases where infection leads Vaccine available. Implement safe sexual practices and
(HCV) transmission by parenteral routes. Before screening for to clinical hepatitis, the onset of symptoms is usually gradual, with avoid the use of any potentially
HCV became available, infection was mainly transmitted by anorexia, abdominal discomfort, nausea, and vomiting, followed by the contaminated instruments for injection
transfusion of contaminated blood or blood products. development of jaundice in some cases (less commonly than in or other skin-piercing activity.
Nowadays, transmission frequently occurs through use of hepatitis B). Most clinically affected patients will develop a long-lasting
contaminated needles, syringes, and other instruments chronic infection, which may lead to cirrhosis and/or liver cancer.
used for injections and other skin-piercing procedures.
Sexual transmission of hepatitis C occurs rarely. There is
no insect vector or animal reservoir for HCV.
Hepatitis E Hepatitis E virus Hepatitis E is a waterborne disease usually acquired from The clinical features and course of the disease are generally similar to Protection of food Controlled sanitation and food storage,
contaminated drinking water. Direct fecal–oral those of hepatitis A. As with hepatitis A, there is no chronic phase. and water supply and prevention of contamination of
transmission from person to person is also possible. There Young adults are most commonly affected. In pregnant women, there from contamination. potable water supplies.
is no insect vector. It is suspected, but not proved, that is an important difference between hepatitis E and hepatitis A: during
hepatitis E may have a domestic animal reservoir host, the third trimester of pregnancy, hepatitis E takes a much more severe
such as pigs. form with a case-fatality rate reaching 20%.

Prophylaxis
STDs Infection occurs during unprotected sexual intercourse. Most of the clinical manifestations are included in the following Avoid unprotected Male or female condoms, when used
 HIV/AIDS  human HIV and syphilis may also be transmitted in contaminated syndromes: genital ulcer, pelvic inflammatory disease, urethral sexual intimacy with properly and consistently, have proved
immunodeficiency blood and blood products, by contaminated syringes and discharge, and vaginal discharge. However, many infections are casual partners. to be effective in preventing the
virus needles used for injection, and potentially by unsterilized asymptomatic. Sexually transmitted infections are a major cause of transmission of HIV and other sexually
 syphilis  Treponema pallidum instruments used for skin-penetrating procedures such as acute illness, infertility, long-term disability, and death, with severe transmitted infections. Unsterile dental
 gonorrhea  Neisseria acupuncture, piercing, and tattooing. medical and psychological consequences for millions of men, women, and surgical instruments, needles
gonorrhoeae and children. Apart from being serious diseases in their own right, used in acupuncture and tattooing,
 genital herpes  herpes simplex virus sexually transmitted infections increase the risk of HIV infection. The ear-piercing devices, and other skin-
 genital warts  human presence of an untreated disease (ulcerative or non-ulcerative) can piercing instruments can likewise
papillomavirus increase by a factor of up to 10 the risk of becoming infected with HIV transmit infection and should be
and transmitting the infection. On the other hand, early diagnosis and avoided.
improved management of other sexually transmitted infections can
reduce the incidence of HIV infection by up to 40%. Prevention and
treatment of all sexually transmitted infections are therefore important
for the prevention of HIV infection.
Influenza Influenza viruses Respiratory transmission occurs mainly by droplets An acute respiratory infection of varying severity, ranging from Vaccination before Whenever possible, avoid crowded
(A, B, C strains) disseminated by unprotected coughs and sneezes. Short- asymptomatic infection to fatal disease. Classic influenza symptoms the start of the enclosed spaces and close contact
distance airborne transmission of influenza viruses may include fever with rapid onset, sore throat, cough, and chills, often influenza season; with people suffering from acute
occur, particularly in crowded enclosed spaces. Hand accompanied by headache, coryza, myalgia, and prostration. note that influenza respiratory infections. Hand-washing
contamination and direct inoculation of virus is another Influenza may be complicated by viral or more often bacterial viruses evolve after direct contact with ill persons or
potential route of spread. pneumonia. Illness tends to be most severe in the elderly and in rapidly, changing their environment may reduce the risk
infants and young children, and in immunocompromised hosts. Death their antigenic of illness. Ill persons should be
resulting from seasonal influenza occurs mainly in the elderly and in characteristics, so encouraged to practice cough
individuals with pre-existing chronic diseases. that vaccines need to etiquette (i.e., maintain distance, cover
be modified each coughs and sneezes with disposable
Influenza viruses are of types A, B, and C; type A viruses cause most year to be effective tissues or clothing, wash hands).
of the widespread influenza epidemics; type B viruses generally cause against currently
regional or sporadic outbreaks; and type C viruses cause mild disease circulating influenza
in the form of common colds and bronchitis in children. Influenza strains.
viruses evolve rapidly, changing their antigenic characteristics, so that
vaccines need to be modified each year to be effective against
currently circulating influenza strains. Other subtypes of influenza A
viruses occur in animals, and all subtypes are found in birds (mainly
water fowl). Inter-species transmission (such as the 1918 pandemic)
and viral reassortment (1957, 1968 pandemics) may give rise to new
subtypes able to infect humans.

Prophylaxis
Malaria Human malaria is The malaria parasite is transmitted by female Anopheles Malaria is an acute febrile illness with incubation period of 7 days or Take antimalarial Use repellents, netting, long-sleeved
caused by four mosquitoes, which bite mainly between dusk and dawn. longer. The most severe form is caused by P. falciparum, in which drugs clothing, or other methods to avoid
different species of variable clinical features include fever, chills, headache, muscular (Chemoprophylaxis) being bitten by mosquitoes, especially
the protozoan aching and weakness, vomiting, cough, diarrhea, and abdominal pain; when appropriate, to between dusk and dawn.
parasite plasmodium: other symptoms related to organ failure may supervene, such as acute prevent infection from
p. falciparum, p. vivax, renal failure, generalized convulsions, and circulatory collapse, developing into
p. ovale, and followed by coma and death. In endemic areas, it is estimated that clinical disease.
p. malariae. about 1% of patients with P. falciparum infection die of the disease;
mortality in non-immune patients with falciparum infection is
significantly higher. Initial symptoms, which may be mild, may not be
easy to recognize as being due to malaria. It is important to consider
the possibility of falciparum malaria in all cases of unexplained fever
starting at any time between 7 days after the first possible exposure to
malaria and 3 months (or, rarely, later) after the last possible exposure.
Any individual who experiences a fever in this interval should
immediately seek diagnosis and effective treatment, and inform
medical personnel of the possible exposure to malaria infection.
Falciparum malaria may be fatal if treatment is delayed beyond 24
hours after the onset of clinical symptoms.
Young children, pregnant women, people living with HIV/AIDS, people

who are immunosuppressed and the elderly are particularly at risk.
Malaria, particularly P. falciparum, in non-immune pregnant women
increases the risk of maternal death, miscarriage, stillbirth, and
neonatal death. The forms of malaria caused by other Plasmodium
species cause significant morbidity but are rarely life-threatening.
P. vivax and P. ovale can remain dormant in the liver. Relapses
caused by these persistent liver forms (“hypnozoites”) may appear
months, and rarely several years, after exposure. They are not
prevented by current chemoprophylactic regimens, with the exception
of primaquine. Latent blood infection with P. malariae may be present
for many years, but it is very rarely life-threatening. Chemoprophylaxis
and treatment of falciparum malaria are becoming more complex
because P. falciparum is increasingly resistant to various antimalarial
drugs. Chloroquine resistance of P. vivax is rare but increasing. Focal
chloroquine resistance or prophylactic and/or treatment failure have
been observed in some areas of South America.

Prophylaxis
Leishmaniasis Several species of the Infection is transmitted by the bite of female phlebotomine Cutaneous and mucosal leishmaniasis (espundia) causes skin sores None. Minimize potential for contact with
(cutaneous) protozoan parasite sandflies. Dogs, rodents, and other mammals are reservoir and chronic ulcers of the mucosae. Cutaneous leishmaniasis is a sand flies from dusk to dawn. Use
Leishmania. hosts for leishmaniasis. Sandflies acquire the parasites by chronic, progressive, disabling, and often mutilating disease. Espundia protective clothing and DEET-based
biting infected humans or animals. Transmission from (mucocutaneous manifestation) usually is occupationally associated insect repellent. Contact with sand
person to person by injected blood or contaminated (forestry) and does not occur at elevations above 800 meters. flies can be reduced by using bed nets
syringes and needles is also possible. and screens on doors and windows,
but sand flies are so small that they
can pass through the holes in ordinary
bed nets. The effectiveness of bed
nets is enhanced by treatment with a
pyrethroid-containing insecticide
(permethrin or deltamethrin). The
same treatment can be applied to
window screens, curtains, bed sheets,
and clothing, which should be
retreated after five washings. In
addition, spraying the room or dwelling
with insecticide may provide some
protection.3
Measles Rubeola virus. Highly communicable by direct or airborne contact with Measles is an acute, highly communicable rash illness caused by a Combined measles, Patients should be isolated for at least
infectious droplets. virus transmitted by direct contact with infectious droplets or, less mumps, rubella 4 days after the onset of the rash.
commonly, by airborne spread. The incubation period of measles from (MMR) or MMR plus
exposure to rash onset is generally 14 days (range 7-18). Patients are varicella (MMRV)
usually contagious from 4 days before until 4 days after the onset of vaccines are
the rash. Onset of illness is characterized by fever, cough, runny nose, available. There is
conjunctivitis, and rash. The disease can be severe, and the most no specific antiviral
frequent complications include diarrhea (8%), middle ear infection (7%- therapy; basic
9%), and pneumonia (1-6%). Encephalitis, frequently resulting in treatment consists of
permanent brain damage, occurs in approximately 1 per 1,000-2,000 providing hydration
cases of measles. The risk of severe complications and death is and antipyretics and
higher among children younger than 5 and adults older than 20 years treating
of age.4 complications such
as pneumonia.
Vitamin A
supplement may be
appropriate in
children.
3
Source: CDC Health Information for International Travel 2008; Chapter 4 – Leishmaniasis; http://wwwn.cdc.gov/travel/yellowBookCh4-Leishmaniasis.aspx ; US Department for Health and Human Services, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, Atlanta, GA.
4
Source: CDC Health Information for International Travel 2008; Chapter 4 – Measles; http://wwwn.cdc.gov/travel/yellowBookCh4-Measles.aspx ; US Department for Health and Human Services, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, Atlanta, GA.

Prophylaxis
Plague Plague bacillus, Plague is a zoonotic disease affecting rodents and Plague occurs in three main clinical forms: A vaccine effective Avoid any contact with live or dead
Yersinia pestis. transmitted by fleas from rodents to other animals and to  Bubonic plague is the form that usually results from the bite of against bubonic rodents.
humans. Direct person-to-person transmission does not infected fleas. Lymphadenitis develops in the drainage lymph nodes, plague is available
occur except in the case of pneumonic plague, when with the regional lymph nodes most commonly affected. Swelling, exclusively for
respiratory droplets may transfer the infection from the pain, and suppuration of the lymph nodes produce the characteristic persons with a high
patient to others in close contact. plague buboes. occupational
 Septicemic plague may develop from bubonic plague or occur in the exposure to plague; it
absence of lymphadenitis. Dissemination of the infection in the is not commercially
bloodstream results in meningitis, endotoxic shock and disseminated available.
intravascular coagulation.
 Pneumonic plague may result from secondary infection of the lungs
following dissemination of plague bacilli from other body sites. It
produces severe pneumonia. Direct infection of others may result
from transfer of infection by respiratory droplets, causing primary
pulmonary plague in the recipients.
Rabies Rabies virus Rabies is a zoonotic disease affecting a wide range of Rabies is an acute viral encephalomyelitis, which is almost invariably A vaccine is Obey Project prohibitions on harboring
domestic and wild mammals, including bats. Infection of fatal. The initial signs include a sense of apprehension, headache, available. pets or wild animals; avoid contact
humans usually occurs through the bite of an infected fever, malaise, and sensory changes around the site of the animal bite. with wild animals and stray domestic
animal as the virus is present in the saliva. Any other Excitability, hallucinations, and aerophobia are common, followed in animals, particularly bats, dogs, and
contact with a rabies-susceptible species, such as a some cases by fear of water (hydrophobia) due to spasms of the cats. If bitten by an animal that is
penetrating scratch with bleeding and licking of broken skin swallowing muscles, progressing to delirium, convulsions, and death a potentially infected with rabies,
and mucosa in an area where rabies is present, should be few days after onset. A less common form, paralytic rabies, is immediately clean the wound
treated with caution. Transmission through dog bites is characterized by loss of sensation, weakness, pain, and paralysis. thoroughly with disinfectant or with
common in developing countries. Person-to-person soap or detergent and water. Medical
transmission has not been laboratory confirmed. assistance should be sought
immediately and post-exposure
prophylaxis initiated if indicated.

Prophylaxis
Trypanosomiasis Protozoan parasite Infection is transmitted by blood-sucking triatomine insects. In adults, T. cruzi causes a chronic illness with progressive myocardial Avoid exposure to Insecticides can be used to treat
(Chagas disease) Trypanosoma cruzi Transmission by ingestion of unprocessed, freshly damage leading to cardiac arrhythmias and cardiac dilatation, and blood-sucking bugs. housing. Exposure can be reduced by
(T. cruzi) squeezed sugar cane in areas where the vector is present gastrointestinal involvement leading to mega-esophagus and the use of bed nets in houses and
has also been reported. During feeding, infected insects megacolon. T. cruzi causes acute illness in children, which is followed camps.
excrete trypanosomes, which can then contaminate the by chronic manifestations later in life.
conjunctiva, mucous membranes, abrasions, and skin
wounds including the bite wound. Transmission also
occurs by blood transfusion when blood has been obtained
from an infected donor. Congenital infection is possible,
due to parasites crossing the placenta during pregnancy.
T. cruzi infects many species of wild and domestic animals
as well as humans. The vector is found mainly in rural
areas where it lives in the walls of poorly-constructed
housing.
Tuberculosis Mycobacterium Infection is usually by direct airborne transmission from Exposure to M. tuberculosis may lead to infection, but most infections Bacillus of Calmette Avoid close contact with known
tuberculosis, the person to person. do not normally lead to disease. The risk of developing disease and Guerin (BCG) tuberculosis patients. For employees
tubercle bacillus. following infection is generally 5–10% during the lifetime, but may be vaccine may be from low-incidence countries who may
Humans can also increased by various factors, notably immunosuppression (e.g., advised for infants be exposed to infection, a baseline
become infected by advanced HIV infection). Multidrug resistance refers to strains of M. and young children in tuberculin skin test is advisable in
bovine tuberculosis, tuberculosis that are resistant to at least isoniazid and rifampicin some situations. order to compare with retesting after
caused by M. bovis. (MDR-TB). The resistant strains do not differ from other strains in return. If the skin reaction to
infectiousness, likelihood of causing disease, or general clinical effects; tuberculin suggests recent infection,
however, if they do cause disease, treatment is more difficult and the the patient should receive treatment
risk of death will be higher. Extensively drug-resistant TB (XDR-TB) is for latent infection. Patients under
TB that is resistant to at least isoniazid and rifampin, to any treatment for tuberculosis should not
fluoroquinolone, and to at least one of the injectable second-line anti- travel until the treating physician has
TB drugs capreomycin, kanamycin, and amikacin. documented, by laboratory
examination of sputum, that the patient
is not infectious and therefore of no
risk to others. The importance of
completing the prescribed course of
treatment should be stressed.

Prophylaxis
Typhoid fever Salmonella typhi, the Infection is transmitted by consumption of contaminated A systemic disease of varying severity. Severe cases are Vaccine available. Prevent fecal contamination of food
typhoid bacillus food or water. characterized by gradual onset of fever, headache, malaise, anorexia, and potable water supplies; regular,
Occasionally, direct fecal–oral transmission may occur. and insomnia. Constipation is more common than diarrhea in adults controlled collection and disposal of
Shellfish taken from sewage-polluted beds are an important and older children. Without treatment, the disease progresses with putrescible wastes.
source of infection. Infection occurs through eating fruit sustained fever, bradycardia, hepatosplenomegaly, abdominal
and vegetables fertilized by night soil and eaten raw, and symptoms, and, in some cases, pneumonia. In white-skinned patients,
milk and milk products that have been contaminated by pink spots (papules), which fade on pressure, appear on the skin of the
those in contact with them. Flies may transfer infection to trunk in up to 50% of cases. In the third week, untreated cases
foods, resulting in contamination that may be sufficient to develop additional gastrointestinal and other complications, which may
cause human infection. prove fatal. Around 2–5% of those who contract typhoid fever become
chronic carriers, because bacteria persist in the biliary tract after
symptoms have resolved.
Typhus fever Rickettsia prowazekii The disease is transmitted by the human body louse, which The onset is variable but often sudden, with headache, chills, high None. Cleanliness is important in preventing
becomes infected by feeding on the blood of patients with fever, prostration, coughing, and severe muscular pain. After 5–6 infestation by body lice. Insecticidal
acute typhus fever. Infected lice excrete rickettsia onto the days, a macular skin eruption (dark spots) develops first on the upper powders are available for body-louse
skin while feeding on a second host, who becomes infected trunk and spreads to the rest of the body but usually not to the face, control and treatment of clothing for
by rubbing louse fecal matter or crushed lice into the bite palms of the hands, or soles of the feet. The case-fatality rate is up to those at high risk of exposure.
wound. There is no animal reservoir. 40% in the absence of specific treatment. Louse-borne typhus fever is
the only rickettsial disease that can cause explosive epidemics.
Typhus fever occurs in colder, mountainous regions of South America

and other international locations. It typically occurs in conditions of
overcrowding and poor hygiene.
Yellow fever Yellow fever virus Yellow fever in urban and some rural areas is transmitted Although some infections are asymptomatic, most lead to an acute Vaccine available. Take precautions against mosquito
by the bite of infective Aedes aegypti mosquitoes and by illness characterized by two phases. Initially, there is fever, muscular bites in the day and evening.
other mosquitoes in the forests of South America. The pain, headache, chills, anorexia, nausea, and/or vomiting, often with
mosquitoes bite during daylight hours. Transmission bradycardia. About 15% of patients progress to a second phase after
occurs at altitudes up to 2500 meters. Yellow fever virus a few days, with resurgence of fever, development of jaundice,
infects humans and monkeys. In jungle and forest areas, abdominal pain, vomiting, and haemorrhagic manifestations; half of
monkeys are the main reservoir of infection, with these patients die 10–14 days after onset of illness.
transmission from monkey to monkey carried out by
mosquitoes. The infective mosquitoes may bite humans The yellow fever virus is endemic in some tropical areas in central and
who enter the forest area, usually causing sporadic cases South America, and the number of epidemics has increased since the
or small outbreaks. In urban areas, monkeys are not early 1980s.
involved, and infection is transmitted among humans by
mosquitoes.

GG-11: Personal Protective Equipment

This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) establishes minimum requirements for the
use of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) for Guyana Goldfields, Inc. (GGI)
employees working on the Aurora Project. It contains an Appendix that addresses
specific respiratory protection needs, which may require updating in response to any
modifications to the occupational health and safety risk register (see GG-09,
“Identification of Project-related Safety Hazards and Assessment of Risks) that
identify new respiratory hazards that may be encountered in the major construction
or operational phases of Aurora Project operations.
This SOP will apply over the life of the Project; it supports Section 4.3.2,
(“Management of Social and Environmental Impacts”) of the GGI Environmental and
Social Management System Plan (ESMS Plan), and other GGI Management Plans
and SOPs when specified therein.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Affected Employee
For the purposes of this SOP, an affected employee is defined as any GGI
employee whose work assignment requires them to use PPE.
2.2 Contractor
Contractor refers to any worker retained by GGI to undertake work on a contract

basis, and whose work may require them to be exposed to workplace hazards that
warrant the use of PPE.
2.3 Visitor
Visitor refers to other GGI employees or representatives of other organizations who

may visit Aurora Project operations, but are not part of the regular workforce.
2.4 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
PPE refers to an item or items used by an individual to protect the eyes, face, head,
body, arms, hands, legs, and/or feet such as safety glasses, goggles, protective face
shields, hard hats, helmets, head covers, gloves, protective aprons or chaps,
disposable coveralls, life vests (for river transport), and steel-toed safety boots. Ear

protectors or earplugs used to reduce exposure to noise and respirators that protect
the wearer from airborne hazards are also considered PPE.
2.5 Approved PPE
Approved PPE refers to PPE approved by a recognized authority such as the

European Standards Organization (ESO), Canadian Standards Organization (CSA),
American National Standards Institute (ANSI), or the National Institute of
Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), and authorized for distribution to GGI
employees or contractors.
3.1 Affected Employees
Affected employees are responsible for using, properly caring for, cleaning, and
inspecting PPE issued for their personal use, as directed, and for reporting any loss,
damage, or other problems to the site medic(s) or the Health and Safety Officer.
Affected employees shall return all issued equipment to the side medic for safe
storage when they leave the site on regularly scheduled rotations, and for retrieving
their issued PPE from the site medic upon their return to work.
The Health and Safety Officer is responsible for:
 Evaluating the hazards associated with each Project job category as

discussed in GG-09, “Identification of Project-related Safety Hazards, and
Assessment of Risks”, and identifying those situations where the use of PPE
will be required in order to control an identified hazard;
 selecting and purchasing suitable approved PPE;
 ensuring that PPE requirements are clearly posted in all areas where PPE is
required;
 ensuring that employees who are required to use air purifying respirators to
control exposure to potentially hazardous atmospheres are included in the
respiratory protection program described in Appendix A;
 updating the respiratory protection program as necessary to address new

respiratory hazards that may be encountered in major construction or
operation (e.g., working with cyanide and other mineral extraction process
reagents);
 evaluating, and as necessary updating or repeating the safety hazard

assessment required by under GG-09, whenever job requirements undergo
significant changes, new equipment is introduced, or an accident occurs;

 maintaining the risk register required by GG-09, PPE training records, and
ensuring that medics maintain well as records of PPE distribution;
 providing training, guidance, and assistance to GGI and contractor employees

regarding the proper use, care, and cleaning of approved PPE;
.
 periodically evaluating PPE use and the overall effectiveness of PPE training,
in actual practice, through the process described in GG-03, “Field
Inspections” and GG-04, Identification of Non-conformances and
Corrective/Preventive Action”; and
 ensuring that all contractors or visitors to the site are provided with any
required PPE and instructions on its use.
3.3 Area Managers and Supervisors
Area Managers and Supervisors are responsible for coordinating with the Health and
Safety Manager and site medics to implement and enforce PPE requirements that
apply to their assigned work areas. This responsibility includes:
 ensuring that required PPE is made available to employees;
 verifying that employees properly use and care for assigned PPE;
 notifying the Health and Safety Manager of any PPE issues resulting from the
recognition of new hazards, or if work processes are changed;
 ensuring that defective or damaged PPE is immediately replaced, and that

damaged PPE is either repaired or discarded as appropriate; and
 ensuring that visitors to their work areas comply with all applicable PPE
requirements.
3.4 Contractors
Contractors may be contractually requested to provide PPE for their onsite workers
and for assuring its adequacy and proper maintenance; in some cases, PPE may be
provided for temporary use by GGI.
3.5 Site Medic(s)
Site medics are responsible for maintaining a simple spreadsheet (see Figure 2 for
an example) that tracks PPE issue, as well as PPE return for safe storage when an
employee rotates off site, and re-issue when the employee returns.
4.0 PROCEDURE
The selection, distribution, and use of PPE at the Aurora Project shall be
accomplished in accordance with the flowcharts depicted in Figures 1A and 1B, and
as described in the following paragraphs.

4.1 PPE Hazard Assessment
The Health and Safety Officer shall conduct an initial PPE hazard assessment as
part of establishing the risk register for a given Project site, as described in GG-09,
“Identification of Project-related Safety Hazards, and Assessment of Risks.” If
potential respiratory hazards are noted [e.g., exposure to rock dust (free silica);
exposure to irritating or toxic gases or vapors (mosquito fogging with a diesel
oil/malathion mixture); exposure to oxygen-deficient atmospheres (confined spaces)],
see Appendix A, “Respiratory Protection Program” for specific guidance.
The GG-09 risk register entries and PPE needs for a particular work area must be re-
evaluated whenever the job or a procedure changes, new equipment is introduced,
or a PPE-related accident or injury occurs.
4.2 Selection of Suitable PPE
PPE should be considered only if, in the judgment of the Health and Safety Officer,
identified hazards cannot be effectively managed using engineering, administrative,
or work-practice controls. PPE shall be of a safe design and construction with
respect to the type of work that must be performed, and must provide an appropriate
level of protection for the identified hazards.
Gloves, safety glasses, face shields, hard hats, safety shoes or boots, and protective
clothing may be selected and distributed to all employees based on a subjective
evaluation of the hazard. However, as previously noted, the actual working
environment must be evaluated using appropriate test equipment to characterize the
hazards and quantify the exposure levels prior to selecting appropriate respiratory
protection. See Appendix A.
The Health and Safety Officer shall arrange for the purchase of appropriate PPE for
all affected employees, and shall ensure that an adequate stock of the required PPE
is maintained in onsite stores. The Health and Safety Officer shall also provide for
adequate signage that clearly identifies specific PPE requirements in a given work
area.
4.3 Use of PPE
All affected employees shall be trained in the proper use of PPE; the Health and
Safety Officer shall provide or arrange for appropriate the PPE training. Training
shall be conducted and documented using one or more of the methods specified in
GG-06, “ESMS Training Program” and the training form provided as Figure 3.
Selected PPE must be used in accordance with training received and shall be used
to protect the affected employee from only the intended hazards under the conditions
for which it was selected.
Training topics shall include:
 discussion of the specific hazard(s) that the issued PPE is intended to control;
 when (and under what circumstances) the employee must wear or use the
assigned PPE;
 how the assigned PPE will protect the employee;
 the limitations of PPE effectiveness;
 how to use the PPE properly, including how to put it on or take it off, and
making adjustments for a comfortable and effective fit;
 warning signs that indicate that the assigned PPE is not providing the
intended level of protection;
 how to properly care for and maintain the PPE, e.g., how to detect signs of
wear, clean and disinfect, and/or properly dispose of PPE; and
 PPE replacement schedule and procedures.
Documented PPE refresher training (see Figure 3) must be performed annually in

accordance with GG-06.
4.4 Maintenance, Storage, and Return/Reissue of PPE
Affected employees shall clean and maintain the PPE issued for their use in
accordance with training received, and shall store PPE in a manner that protects it
from damage, using storage areas or containers provided by the site medics.
Employees shall notify their Area Supervisor or EHS Coordinator if their PPE is
damaged, ineffective, or lost. When rotating off site for break, employees shall return
their PPE to the site medics for safe keeping, and for re-issue when the employee
rotates back to work.
4.5 Periodic Inspection
On at least an annual basis, the Health and Safety Officer shall conduct a focused
inspection of PPE use in accordance with GG-03, “Field Inspections.” Any observed
non-conformances shall be documented and resolved as required by GG-04,
4.6 Disciplinary Policy
PPE is required control a recognized hazard. Consequently, the identified hazard is

controlled only if the designated PPE is used and used properly, which is
dependent upon employee compliance. Misuse of PPE or not using PPE in required
situations is a serious breach of policy (see the GGI” Labour Grievance Policy” for a
discussion of consequences) that must be remedied both to protect the employee’s
health and well-being as well as protect GGI’s interests.
4.7 PPE for Visitors and Employees
The Health and Safety Officer and/or site medics shall ensure that all visitors to any
Aurora Project site are aware of the health and safety risks associated with the site,
prior to being permitted onsite; this information may be imparted in a short meeting or
by a video presentation approved by the Health and Safety Officer and

Environmental Manager. GGI will provide visitors with suitable PPE throughout the
length of their visit, and retrieve the PPE when the visitors depart
Site medics shall maintain records of PPE issued to all employees and visitors to the
site on the PPE Issue Log shown in Figure 2.
4.8 Records
Records related to the proper implementation of this SOP include:
 The current risk registers for specific Project sites, as required by GG-09,
“Identification of Project-related Safety Hazards and Assessment of Risks”;
 documentation of the PPE Risk Assessment and selection of appropriate

PPE;
 air quality monitoring datasheets (see Appendix A);
 documentation of permanently issued PPE (see Figure 2); and
 documentation of employee PPE training (see Figure 3).
These documents shall be retained in accordance with GG-05, “Records

Management.”
5.0 REFERENCES
 GGI ESMS Plan

 GGI “Labour Grievance Policy”;
 GG-03, “Field Inspections”;
 GG-04, Identification of Non-conformances and Corrective/Preventive Action”;
 GG-06, “ESMS Training Program”; and
 GG-09, “Identification of Project-related Safety Hazards, and Assessment of
Risks.”

Figure 1A: PPE Selection, Training, and Monitoring Process
Area Managers H&S Manager

Develop/implement Perform/update hazard
engineering/admin assessment
controls as required per GG-09
Yes H&S Mgr.

Non-PPE alts?
No
H&S Manager
Select appropriate
PPE
Yes H&S Mgr.

See Fig. 1B Resp. protection?
No
H&S Manager
Issue PPE/provide
PPE supplies, train
workforce per GG-06
H&S Manager
Conduct periodic
Inspection per GG-03
No H&S Manager
CPAR?
Yes
H&S Mgr./Area Mgrs.
Resolve CPAR
per GG-04
H&S Manager
Conduct refresher
training per GG-06
Records Clerk
File records
per GG-05

Figure 1B: PPE Selection, Training, and Monitoring Process:
Respiratory Protection Program
See Fig. 1A
H&S Manager
Select appropriate
respiratory protection
PPE
No
Area Managers H&S Manager
Request medical
Select alternate
approval for
employee
affected staff
No
No Medic
Medical accept?
Yes
Medic
Accept fit test?
Yes
No
H&S Manager
Select alternate
PPE
H&S Manager
Issue PPE/provide
PPE supplies, train
employee per GG-06
Records Clerk
File records
per GG-05

Figure 2: PPE Issue Log
Aurora Project
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT ISSUE/REISSUE LOG
Name Dep’t PPE Issued (list) PPE Returned PPE Re- Date
(Print) issued?

Figure 3: PPE Training Record Form
Aurora Project
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
TRAINING RECORD
Employee Name: _________________________ ID No. _________________
Job Title/Work area: _______________________________________________________
Trainer’s Name (person completing this form):__________________ Date:_____________
Types of PPE employee is being trained to use:

_____________________________ ______________________________
_____________________________ ______________________________
_____________________________ ______________________________
The following items were addressed in the training session:
____ The limitations of PPE; PPE alone cannot protect the employee from all on-the-job
hazards.
____ What workplace hazards the employee faces, the types of PPE that the employee must
use to be protected from these hazards, and how the PPE will protect the employee
while working.
____ When the employee must wear or use the PPE.
____ How to use the PPE properly on-the-job, including putting it on, taking it off, and
wearing and adjusting it (if applicable) for a comfortable and effective fit.
____ How to properly care for and maintain the PPE: look for signs of wear, clean and
disinfect, and dispose of certain types PPE (e.g., nitrile gloves, used respirator
cartridges.
Note to employee: This form will be made a part of your personal file. Please read and
verify that you understand its contents before signing.
I understand the training I have received, and I can use all required PPE properly.
______________________________________ ______________________
Employee’s signature Date
(Trainer must verify)

____ Employee has shown an understanding of the training.
____ Employee has shown the ability to use the PPE properly.
______________________________________ ______________________
Trainer’s signature Date

Appendix A:
RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAM

Exploration/Early Works Construction (E/EWC) Phase
This Appendix to GG-11 establishes requirements and procedures for a respiratory

protection program during the Exploration/Early Works Construction (E/EWC) phase
of the Aurora Project. This program is limited to dust masks and air-purifying
respirators; it applies to all Aurora Project employees who must rely on personal
respiratory protection to work safely in otherwise potentially hazardous atmospheres,
and must be updated prior to the commencement of major construction.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Air-purifying Respirator
An air-purifying respirator is a respirator equipped with an air-purifying element

such as a filter, cartridge, or canister, or having a filtering facepiece such as a dust
mask. The element or filtering facepiece is designed to remove specific
contaminants, such as particles, vapors, or gases, from air in the existing
atmosphere that passes through it.
2.2 Canister or Cartridge (air-purifying)
The air-purifying canister or cartridge refers to the part of an air-purifying respirator

that consists of a container holding materials such as a filter element, treated
charcoal, or a combination of the two, that removes contaminants from the air
passing through the cartridge or canister.
2.3 Dust Mask
Dust mask refers to a simple filtering-facepiece respirator.
2.4 Fit Test
A fit test is a procedure by which the facepiece seal of a half- or full-face respirator is
challenged, using an approved process, to determine if the respirator facepiece
provides an adequate seal.
2.5 Full-Facepiece Respirator
A full-facepiece respirator is a tight-fitting respirator that covers the wearer’s nose,

mouth, and eyes.
2.6 Half-face Respirator
A half-face respirator is a tight-fitting respirator that covers only the wearer’s nose
and mouth.

2.7 Immediately Dangerous to Life or Health (IDLH)
IDLH refers to any atmospheric condition that could cause an immediate threat to
life, cause permanent or delayed adverse health effects, or interfere with an
employee’s ability to escape a dangerous working atmosphere. Air purifying
respirators may not be used in an IDLH atmosphere.
2.8 Oxygen Deficient
Oxygen deficient refers to an atmosphere with oxygen content below 19.5% by

volume.
2.9 Permissible Exposure Limit
Permissible exposure limit (PEL) refers to the airborne concentrations of a toxic

substance or harmful agent, established by a recognized standards organization or
equivalent authority, which must not be exceeded. For the purpose of this
Respiratory Protection Program, the applicable PELs shall be those specified by the
national authority having jurisdiction, or in the absence of such standards, the current
Threshold Limit Values established by the American Conference of Governmental
Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH).
2.10 Positive and Negative Pressure Seal Check
The positive and negative pressure seal check is a procedure performed by the
respirator user each time the respirator is put on, to determine if the respirator is
properly seated on the face.
2.11 Qualitative Fit Test
Qualitative fit test refers to a respirator fit test that relies on the employee’s ability to
detect a test substance in order to determine the adequacy of respirator fit. Test
results are either “passing” or “fail.”
2.12 Respirator
Respirator refers to a type of PPE designed to protect the wearer from harmful
airborne hazards, oxygen deficiency, or both.
In addition to the responsibilities established in Section 3.5 of GG-11, the Health and
Safety Officer shall be responsible for:
 performing or directing respiratory hazard assessment as part of the process

described in GG-09, “Identification of Project-related Safety Hazards and
Assessment of Risks”;

 performing or directing air monitoring, where appropriate, based on the
results of the PPE hazard assessment in order to characterize airborne
hazards and evaluate employees’ exposure levels;
 selecting and distributing appropriate personal respiratory protective devices;
 scheduling medical evaluations for affected employees;
 performing or arranging respirator fit testing for affected employees;
 restricting the use of respirators to those employees who have received

medical clearance and been properly fit tested (except in the case of
voluntary use of dust masks);
 ensuring that employees receive appropriate training; and
 monitoring the proper use, sanitation and maintenance of respirators.
4.0 PROCEDURE
The Aurora Project Respiratory Protection Program shall be administered in

accordance with the following steps and as depicted in Figures 1A and 1B.
4.1 Hazard Evaluation and Respirator Selection
The Health and Safety Officer shall conduct a respiratory hazard evaluation for each
job/task identified in site risk registers (see GG-09) as involving potentially significant
exposure to respiratory hazards. At a minimum, the respiratory hazard evaluation
must include the following elements:
 evaluation of the physical, chemical, biological, and temporal characteristics

of the hazard;
 evaluation of the physical and temporal characteristics of the task itself;
 evaluation of the physical surroundings;
 a semi-quantitative assessment of the nature and extent of exposure based

on professional judgment; and
 where indicated, a quantitative assessment using appropriate air sampling

methodologies.
Where a respiratory hazard is confirmed, alternative control measures must be

considered to reduce the affected employees’ exposure. If alternative control
measures are not feasible or cannot be immediately implemented, respiratory
protection shall be employed to control the hazard.
The Health and Safety Officer shall select the specific type of respirator for each
application based on a thorough assessment of the hazard, task characteristics, and
the limitations and level of protection offered by various respirator options.
The Health and Safety Officer shall revise and update the hazard evaluation
whenever work process changes may potentially affect employee exposure. If an
employee feels that respiratory protection is needed in order to perform a particular
task safely, the employee must notify the Health and Safety Officer, who will evaluate
the potential hazard and will then communicate the results of that assessment back
to the affected employee.
4.2 Medical Evaluation
Medical evaluation is required to determine if employees have any physical condition

that may put them at risk, or limit or restrict their use of respiratory protection
equipment. Employees who are or may be required to wear respirators (voluntary
use of dust masks is exempt) must be examined by a camp medic or a licensed
medical professional.
The Health and Safety Officer shall provide the medic or other medical examiner with
the following information:
 nature of anticipated respiratory hazard(s);

 type and weight of the respirator to be used by the employee;
 duration and frequency of use;
 the nature of the physical work being performed;
 additional PPE to be worn;
 temperature and humidity extremes; and
 a copy of this SOP.
The medic or medical examiner must provide a written recommendation to the Health
and Safety Officer that stipulates any limitations or restrictions on an employee’s
respirator use, and the need for any follow-up medical evaluation.
4.3 Respirator Fit Tests
The Health and Safety Officer shall either perform or arrange respirator fit tests for
employees who are required to use half- or full-face air purifying respirators.
Fit testing must be performed prior to initial use in a hazardous atmosphere and at
least annually thereafter. In addition, fit testing is required whenever a different
respirator facepiece is used or whenever there are changes in the employee’s facial
characteristics due to dental work, surgery, or extreme weight gain or loss.
The fit test must be administered using procedures specified in ANSI/AIHA Standard
Z88.10-2001 or an equivalent standard.
Fit test records will be maintained by the Health and Safety Officer and shall include
the following information:
 type of respirator fit test used;

 manufacturer, model, and size of respirator tested;
 name of person tested, test operator, and date of test; and the
 fit test method used.

4.4 Training
All respirator users must be given appropriate training before using any type of
respiratory protection in a potentially hazardous atmosphere. Each user should be
able to demonstrate competency in the following areas:
 the nature of the respiratory hazards associated with routine and non-routine
situations that they may encounter in the course of their job duties, and the
appropriate respirator for each situation;
 limitations and capabilities of the respirator used;
 inspecting, fitting, donning, and wearing respirators;
 medical signs and symptoms that may limit the use of respirators;
 emergency situations and indications of respirator failure during use; and
 routine respirator maintenance (cleaning and sanitizing, inspection, repair and

storage).
Respiratory protection training must be repeated annually. Records of initial and

annual respiratory protection training must be maintained in accordance with GG-05,
“Records Management.”
4.5 Respirator Procurement and Distribution
GGI shall procure adequate quantities and sizes of appropriate respirators based on
the findings of the respiratory hazard assessment described in this Appendix. All
respirators must be approved by a recognized national or international authority.
The Health and Safety Officer shall provide employees with the proper brand and
model of respirator for which they have been fitted, and will instruct employees
regarding the specific tasks where they are to be used, and, if applicable, the
cartridge replacement frequency.
The camp medic(s) shall document each employee’s name and the make, model,
and size of the respirator issued (see Figure 2).
4.6 Respirator Use
4.6.1 Facial Seal and Valve
No person may use any half- or full-face air purifying respirator, or undergo fit testing
if any of the following conditions apply:
 the user has facial hair including stubble, sideburns, mustache, or beard, or
other hair such as a low hairline or bangs which interferes with the sealing
surface of the facepiece of the respirator, or a mustache or beard that may
interfere with the functioning of the respirator valves;

 the user is wearing a head covering which interferes with the sealing surface
of the respirator facepiece and the wearer's face;
 the user is wearing eyeglasses, goggles, a face shield, welding helmet, or

other eye and face protective device that interferes with the seal of the
respirator; or
 the user has any facial deformities or missing teeth or dentures that could
prevent a respirator from sealing properly.
.
4.6.2 Positive and Negative Pressure Fit Check
Prior to entering any hazardous atmosphere while wearing an air-purifying respirator,

the user must perform a positive and negative pressure fit check.
The fit check is performed by first covering the exhalation valve with the palm of the
hand and exhaling gently into the mask to perform the positive pressure check. The
mask should expand and “balloon out” slightly without any perceptible leaks until the
facial seal finally leaks. The negative pressure fit check is performed by covering the
inlet of the canister or cartridges with the palm of the hand, or a flattened rubber
glove or plastic bag to form an air tight seal and then gently inhaling. The mask
should collapse slightly and hold that position as long as the negative pressure is
maintained without any perceptible leaks.
4.6.3 Maximum Allowable Concentrations for Air-Purifying Respirators
A tight-fitting air-purifying respirator may not be used to protect an individual from

exposures exceeding 10 times the applicable PEL of a contaminant unless a
protection factor greater than 10 has been demonstrated using quantitative fit testing
methods.
Other than for purposes of emergency escape, the maximum allowable concentration
of an airborne contaminant for which the use of an air-purifying respirator is permitted
shall be the PEL of the contaminant times the fit factor as determined by quantitative
fit testing methods, 100 times the PEL, or the maximum allowable concentration
specified on the respirator cartridge or canister, whichever is lowest.
4.6.4 Cartridge Change-Out Frequency
If a chemical cartridge respirator is selected, the cartridge must either have an end-
of-service-life indicator, or a replacement (change-out) frequency must be specified.
The change-out schedule must be determined based on a review of data on the
breakthrough time of the contaminant at the concentrations anticipated. Such data
are deemed reliable if published in a peer-reviewed journal or by established
research agencies. The change-out frequency of particulate filters must also be
specified, but may be based on more subjective concerns such as general hygiene
and breathing resistance.

4.7 Respirator Inspection, Care, and Maintenance
4.7.1 Inspection
Each employee who wears an air-purifying respirator in a hazardous atmosphere

must inspect the device before and after each use. Routine respirator inspection
must include a check of the tightness of connections and the condition of the
facepiece, headbands, valves, air-lines, canisters, and cartridges. Rubber or
elastomer parts must be inspected for pliability and signs of deterioration.
Any malfunction or defect shall be reported to the immediate supervisor, who will
supply replacement parts. Respirators in need of parts and/or repair beyond the
users’ capability must be appropriately tagged and removed from the work area until
they can be properly repaired.
4.7.2 Cleaning and Disinfecting
Respirators issued for the exclusive use of a single worker should be cleaned after
each day’s use. Respirators used by more than one worker must be cleaned and
disinfected after each use. Respirators that are shared among employees shall be
completely cleaned and disinfected after each use by carrying out the following
procedures:
 Remove and set aside the filters or cartridges from the respirator.
Disassemble valves and head strap.
 Immerse the respirator and parts (other than the cartridges/filter) in a warm
aqueous solution of a germicidal detergent (available from the respirator
supplier). The respirator facepiece and parts may be scrubbed gently with a
cloth or soft brush. Make sure that all foreign matter is removed from all
surfaces.
 After washing and disinfecting the respirator, rinse it with clean, warm water
and then allow it to dry.
 After the respirator is dry, attach the air-purifying cartridges, replacing

cartridges if necessary.
4.7.3 Repair
Minor part replacement (such as valves, cartridges, and canisters) can be made to
negative pressure respirators following manufacturer’s instructions. All parts,
couplings, hoses, cartridges, and canisters must be from the same manufacturer as
the respirator.
4.7.4 Storage
After inspection, cleaning, and maintenance, respirators must be stored in a plastic

bags or containers to protect against dust, sunlight, heat, excessive moisture, or
damaging chemicals. Respirators should not be put into lockers, trunks, or toolboxes
unless they are in a hard storage container.

Respirators, cartridges, or canisters must not be stored where chemicals may
contaminate them. Emergency respirators must be stored in special storage
compartments, clearly marked and accessible at all times.
5.0 REFERENCES
 ANSI/AIHA Standard Z88.10-2001;

 GG-05, “Records Management”; and
Risks.”

GG-12: First Aid and Emergency Medical Response

This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) establishes minimum requirements for

training and qualifying selected Guyana Goldfields, Inc. (GGI) employees to serve as
First Aid Providers. This SOP also establishes the process that will be followed in
delivering First Aid and emergency medical treatment to employees and visitors to
Aurora Project sites and facilities.
of Social and Environmental Impacts”) of the GGI Environmental and Social
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 First Aid
First Aid is defined as treatment of minor injuries or illnesses that do not require
immediate attention by a medic, as well as those emergency measures that may be
taken for preserving life or minimizing the consequences of severe injury or illness until
treatment by a doctor or other trained medic can be obtained.
3.1 Upper Management
Upper management will ensure that sufficient resources are allocated to provide:
 adequate quantities of First Aid supplies appropriate for the routine work hazards
associated with the Aurora Project;
 medical clinics at each Project site that are staffed with at least one trained medic
(i.e., doctor, nurse, or medical technician) and equipped to provide emergency
medical treatment;
 a permanently stationed emergency evacuation vehicle/ambulance;

 contracted emergency airborne medical evacuation (“medevac”) services that
can be called upon to transport patients in the event of extreme, life-threatening
emergencies;
 contracted arrangements with offsite hospitals, clinics, or trauma centers to

receive and treat Project personnel or visitors who may become ill or injured; and
 training and qualification of a sufficient number of personnel to provide First Aid

[including cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR)] support to the workforce, as
described in Section 4.1.
The Health and Safety Officer will serve as the Project’s primary point of contact with the
First Aid course provider and any contracted emergency response, medical, and
medevac services. The Health and Safety Officer is responsible for ensuring that
training is provided to adequate numbers of personnel to provide the level of First Aid
Provider coverage required by this SOP, and that refresher training is provided at least
once every 5 years. The Health and Safety Officer will also monitor the frequency and
type of First Aid provided in order to detect potential trends or other health and safety
issues requiring corrective and preventive action, and will participate in all
accident/incident investigations that may be prompted by routine or emergency First Aid
actions.
3.3 Medics
The Medics assigned to Project sites are responsible to the Health and Safety Officer
and Environmental Manager for ensuring that:
 adequately stocked First Aid kits or lockers are provided in all Project vehicles
and at appropriate locations throughout their assigned work areas;
 First Aid stations are located in clean, well-lighted areas;
 all employees are trained in the requirements of this procedure, the roles and
responsibilities of the First Aid Providers and trained medic(s), and the location
and general contents of the First Aid supplies provided at the site; and
 all designated First Aid Providers have received advanced First Aid and CPR
training as described in this procedure, have successfully passed a qualification
examination as described herein, and have been issued qualification cards and
readily visible hard hat decals that identify them to the workforce.

3.4 Supervisors
Supervisors shall ensure that work schedules are arranged so that First Aid Provider
coverage meets the minimum requirements of this procedure, for all shifts and all
operational locations. Supervisors shall ensure that workers are aware of the identity of
the designated First Aid Providers in their work group or work unit, and that workers are
familiar with the procedures for obtaining First Aid.
3.5 First Aid Providers
Designated First Aid Providers are responsible for successfully completing documented
First Aid training as specified by this SOP, and for:
 administering First Aid for minor injuries,
 determining if an injury requires further immediate medical attention beyond

minor First Aid, and if so, for escorting injured employees to the onsite or (if the
injury occurs at the port site) offsite medical clinic;
 administering emergency First Aid in the event of serious injury or illness, and
tending to the patient until the medic is available; and
 notifying the Health and Safety Officer about all situations in which First Aid was
administered.
4.0 PROCEDURE
The exploration plan development, review, approval, and implementation process is

described in the following steps, and is summarized in the flowchart shown in Figure 1.
4.1 Acquisition, Placement, and Maintenance of First Aid Kits and First Aid Supply
Lockers
The Health and Safety Officer shall work with Area Managers and Supervisors to ensure
that appropriate quantities of First Aid supplies are made readily available at all major
Project sites and facilities. The following minimum requirements apply:
 Vehicles: All Project vehicles (e.g., crew trucks, mine site

ambulance/emergency response vehicle, haul trucks, water trucks, excavators,
bulldozers, ATVs) will contain at least one American National Standards Institute
(ANSI) Z308.11 Type III or equivalent 10-package First Aid kit. In addition, the
1
ANSI Z308.1-2003, American National Standard – Minimum Requirements for Workplace First Aid Kits;
International Safety Equipment Association, Arlington, Virginia, 2003.

designated emergency evacuation vehicle/ambulance shall carry at least two
sets of splints, a transfer board, and an emergency stretcher.
 Exploration operations: At least one 16-package Type III First Aid kit shall be
made available at each exploration site and/or temporary exploration camp.
 Man camp: One set of emergency splints, transfer board, an emergency

stretcher, and at least two 36-package Type I First Aid kits shall be kept at the
man camp.
 Administrative offices: Apart from the supplies maintained at the medical clinic
at the mine site, at least one 24-package Type I First Aid kit shall each be
maintained in the Project’s administrative offices.
 Security guardhouses: At least one 10-package Type I First Aid kit shall be
maintained at each of the security guardhouses.
4.2 Selection and Training of First Aid Providers
As a general rule, sufficient numbers of First Aid Providers should be designated to

permit access to an injured worker at any location on the Project concession within
minutes of an accident or incident.
All designated First Aid Providers shall complete an advanced First Aid course that
complies with current International Red Cross or equivalent national standards.
Trainees who pass the course examination shall be issued qualified First Aid Provider
cards that can be clipped to their identification badges, as well as Red Cross decals to
be displayed on their hard hats (see Figure 2). These items shall be issued by the
medics or Health and Safety Officer. Examination records shall be retained as noted in
Section 4.6.
Refresher training shall be provided to all First Aid Providers at least every 5 years at the
direction of the Health and Safety Officer.
4.3 First Aid Responses in Potentially Life-threatening Situations
If accidents or incidents are observed by any Project employee which are obviously life-
threatening, or for any reason result in the employee or visitor not being able to walk, the
observer shall immediately summon a First Aid Provider and medic. First Aid Providers
will be readily identifiable by a Red Cross decal on their hard hats and a qualified First
Aid Provider card clipped to their identification badges (see Figure 2). An ambulance
shall also be requested, because the patient’s condition may be time-critical. Contact
numbers for the medic and ambulance services shall be posted in the administrative
offices and other public locations in major operational areas. The patient’s immediate
Supervisor shall also be notified.

The First Aid Provider shall provide emergency First Aid as soon as possible in an effort
to stabilize the patient’s condition. When the medic arrives, the patient’s condition shall
be evaluated and a decision made whether or not ambulance evacuation to an offsite
hospital or medical trauma facility is required. In serious cases, the medic may request
evacuation via medevac aircraft in accordance with a prearranged contract. If the need
to evacuate is confirmed, the medic shall accompany the patient and render assistance
until such time as medical custody can be transferred to the offsite hospital or trauma
facility. The medic shall advise the affected Supervisor, Area Manager, Camp Manager,
and Health and Safety Officer with respect to the patient’s status after releasing custody,
which will be documented as part of the investigation discussed in Section 4.5.
4.4 First Aid Responses in Non-Life-threatening Situations
Personnel suffering (or workers observing) minor accidents or illness may contact any
First Aid Provider for assistance. The First Aid Provider shall evaluate the patient. If the
patient requires only minor First Aid (e.g., a small bandage, antiseptic ointment,
analgesic tablets, or eyewash), the patient may be permitted to return to work. If the
patient has injuries or illnesses requiring more substantial First Aid (e.g., broken bones,
third-degree burns, wounds requiring compresses, or symptoms that include blurred
vision, dizziness, diarrhea, or vomiting) or has suffered exposure to hazardous
chemicals, the First Aid Provider shall escort the patient to the onsite medical clinic for
examination by the medic. If the medic determines that evacuation is necessary,
appropriate ambulance support shall be requested as discussed in Section 4.3.
Otherwise, after diagnosis and treatment, the patient may be released to return to work
or directed to return to their living quarters to rest and recuperate. The medic shall
advise the patient’s Supervisor or Area Manager and the Health and Safety Officer
regarding the patient’s medical status after treatment.
4.5 Documentation of First Aid Actions and Accident/Incident Reporting
Medics are responsible for logging the general details of all accidents or incidents
requiring more than minor First Aid as described in Section 4.4, using area-specific log
forms as illustrated in Figure 3. Of these logged accidents or incidents, the following
categories will also require that the medic initiate formal documentation on a
Corrective/Preventive Action Request (CPAR) form, in accordance with GG-04,
“Identification of Non-conformances and Corrective/Preventive Action”:
 all instances of illnesses demonstrating symptoms of one or more of the

conditions monitored under GG-10, “Prevention and Monitoring of Communicable
Diseases”;
 all injuries related to improper use or lack of Personal Protective Equipment (see
GG11, “Personal Protective Equipment”);
 all injuries related to improper use of mechanical equipment;

 all injuries related to the handling, storage, or use of hazardous materials;
 all injuries related to all-terrain vehicle (ATV) or other vehicular accidents; and
 all other injuries or illness requiring ambulance evacuation, regardless of cause.
Medics shall ensure that all First Aid-related CPARs are immediately routed to the
Health and Safety Officer and copies of area-specific log sheets are distributed to the
Health and Safety Officer on at least a monthly basis. The Health and Safety Officer will
monitor the frequency and type of First Aid provided in order to detect potential trends or
other health and safety issues requiring corrective and preventive action, and will
participate in all accident/incident investigations that may be prompted by routine or
emergency First Aid actions. The Health and Safety Officer will also ensure that all such
CPARs are resolved and closed as required by GG-04.
4.6 Records
The Health and Safety Officer of his designee shall ensure that copies of completed First
Aid Provider training records, area-specific First Aid log sheets, and completed CPAR
forms are forwarded to the Environmental Manager or designated Records Clerk for
retention in accordance with GG-05, “Records Management.”
5.0 REFERENCES
 GGI ESMS Management Plan

 GG-10, “Prevention and Monitoring of Communicable Diseases”

Figure 1: First Aid and Emergency Medical Care Process
Medics H&S Officer
Establish and maintain

Train workforce and
First Aid kits/supply
designated First Aid
lockers in vehicles and key
Providers per GG-05
facility locations
Workers
Observe accident or
co-worker/site visitor with
injury or symptoms of illness
Workers
Workers Immediately summon

No
Can co-worker or First Aid Provider,
visitor walk? notify Medic, H&S Officer
and Supervisor
Yes
Workers First Aid Provider
Summon Administer emergency

First Aid Provider First Aid as appropriate
First Aid Provider Medic

Immediately evacuate
Evaluate patient, administer patient to offsite
First Aid as appropriate medical facility
via ambulance vehicle or
medevac aircraft
First Aid Provider
Take patient to If illness First Aid Prov.
onsite medical clinic Injury or illness?
for further evaluation
If injury
Yes Medic No First Aid Prov.

Evacuate patient? Only minor First Aid
needed?
No Yes
Medic First Aid Provider
Release worker Release worker
to return to work or to return to work, advise
send to living quarters Medic
Medic
Advise Area
Supervisor/H&S Officer
on patient status
Medic H&S Officer

Medic Record nature of Monitor First Aid
Advise Area incident, document records for reportable
Supervisor/H&S Officer treatment provided; injuries and other
on patient status replenish First Aid unsatisfactory
supplies as necessary trends or conditions
No H&S Officer
CPAR needed?
Yes
H&S Officer H&S Officer
Initiate CPAR and Submit regulatory

resolve per GG-04 reports as required
Records Clerk
File records
per GG-05

Figure 2: First Aid Provider Qualification Card and Identification Decal
(Not to scale)
First Aid Provider

qualification card
First Aid Provider

qualification card - reverse
Hard hat decal

Figure 3: First Aid Log Form
Aurora Project – First Aid Log, [insert operational area or facility name]
Date Patient’s Patient’s Job First Aid Area in which Description of condition Description of CPAR number
Name Provider injury or illness First Aid provided (N/A if not required)
occurred

GG-13: Transportation Safety – Light Vehicles

This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) describes minimum requirements for the safe
operation of light vehicles or trucks at the Guyana Goldfields, Inc. (GGI) Aurora Project.
Requirements for the operation of heavy equipment and truck/trailer rigs, industrial
forklifts, and all-terrain vehicles (ATVs) are separately addressed, respectively, in GG-
16, “Safe Operation of Heavy Equipment”; GG-15, “Forklift Safety”, and GG-26, “Safe
Use of All-Terrain Vehicles.”
Management System Plan (ESMS Plan), the Project Occupational Health and
Safety/Accident Prevention Plan, and other GGI Management Plans and SOPs when
specified therein.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Chocks
Chocks are wedges of wood or plastic composite placed on the downhill or traffic side of
at least one tire, in order to prevent inadvertent movement of a parked vehicle. GGI
requires all light vehicles to be chocked when parked, regardless of grade, unless
parking areas are fitted with wheel barriers or trenches that serve the same purpose.
2.2 Light Vehicle
Light vehicles include 4-wheel drive pickup or crew cab trucks, vans, maintenance
vehicles, ambulances, pilot vehicles, or specialty vehicles rated at 1 ton or less.
2.3 Operator
The operator is defined as a legally licensed driver with the skills and experience that
permit them to be authorized to operate light vehicles owned or leased by GGI.

2.4 Operator Training
Operator training is defined as completion of training and a practical hands-on skills

review by a qualified supervisor or manager, as described in this SOP.
2.5 Vehicle Accident
A vehicle accident is an unplanned vehicular event that results in injury, death, vehicle
or property damage, trip interruption, or other loss.
3.1 Procurement Manager
The Aurora Project Procurement Manager is responsible for purchasing or leasing light
vehicles that conform to international (and applicable national) automotive safety
standards, with appropriate options suitable for hard use in remote mining operations.
3.2 Construction Manager
The Construction Manager is responsible for ensuring that all designated light vehicle
operators are trained and qualified in accordance with this procedure.
3.3 Chief Mechanic
The Chief Mechanic is responsible for ensuring that light vehicles are regularly
maintained and serviced to ensure their safe operating condition.
3.4 Vehicle Operator
The vehicle operator is responsible for successfully completing operator training as

specified herein. Operators shall complete pre-shift safety inspections of their assigned
vehicles, and report any problems to the Mechanical Shop for resolution. Operators are
also responsible for operating vehicles in accordance with the guidance provided in
Section 4.4.
3.5 GGI Security
Designated GGI Security personnel are responsible for contacting the Barama
Dispatcher when vehicles or convoys begin any journey between Buckhall and the
Project site, and for coordinating towing assistance if any light vehicles should become
stuck or suffer a mechanical breakdown en route.

4.0 PROCEDURES
4.1 Procurement of Light Vehicles and Entry into Maintenance Tracking System
Light vehicles shall be purchased or leased that conform to international (and applicable
national) automotive standards. At a minimum, all light vehicles must be fitted with seat
belts, bumpers, a bumper- or body-mounted flexible safety wand and high-visibility flag,
first aid kits (see GG-12, “First Aid and Emergency Medical Response”), fire
extinguishers, rotating beacons, radios, sirens, backup alarms, and wheel chocks. In
addition ambulances shall be fitted with all required emergency medical care equipment.
Pilot vehicles shall be provided appropriate warning signs (e.g., “Long/Wide Load” or
“Convoy Following.”
After receipt and acceptance of each vehicle, the Procurement Manager or designee
shall ensure that the vehicle is properly licensed in accordance with applicable
Guyanese vehicle licensing regulations. Each vehicle shall also be assigned an Aurora
Project control number. Once licensed and numbered, all light vehicles shall be entered
into the Aurora Project’s maintenance tracking system.
4.2 Selection, Training, and Qualification of Operators
Area Managers shall nominate experienced drivers to serve as light vehicle operators
who have current Guyanese and/or international drivers’ licenses.
The Construction Manager shall ensure that nominated vehicle operators attend a
training session on the contents of this SOP, in accordance with GG-05, “ESMS Training
Program.” The training session shall emphasize the minimum requirements for safe
operation described in Section 4.4. Candidates shall also demonstrate their driving skills
to the trainer by way of a practical driving test under real conditions. Successful
candidates shall receive a vehicle operator’s qualification card from the Construction
Manager (see Figure 2) to be carried with their Aurora Project identification at all times.
GGI reserves the right to rescind an employee’s Aurora Project vehicle operator’s
qualification card in the event of an at-fault accident or if unsafe behaviour is observed;
see the GGI “Labour Grievance Policy.”
4.3 Pre-Mission Safety Checks
Each light vehicle operator shall complete a brief visual inspection of their assigned
vehicle before starting out on a mission or travel assignment. The inspection shall
include the following:

 Check tires for proper inflation, flaws, and excessive wear;
Good Bad
 Check for excessive windshield damage (damage must be confined to minor

cracks or chips, and may not interfere with the driver’s field of vision);
Good Bad
 Check that windshield wipers are functional, and clean the windshield, mirrors,
and headlights if necessary;
Good Bad

Good
 Check fuel, oil, coolant, and wiper fluid levels; if levels are not adequate to allow
the vehicle to travel to the intended destination, go to the vehicle fuelling station
before leaving the site and replenish as necessary (see GG-17 “Vehicle Fuelling
and Spill Prevention”);
 Check that radios are working, and set to the proper channel;
 Ensure that all running lights, brake lights, turn signals, and hazard lights or
rotating beacons are functional;
 Check brake and power steering function;
 If being used as a pilot vehicle (see GG-16, “Safe Operation of Heavy

Equipment”), ensure that rotating beacons are functional and that a legible
“Convoy” or Long/Wide Load” sign is securely attached to the front bumper;
 Check to ensure jack is in place and operable;
 Ensure that a small shovel or spade is packed in the vehicle, as well as an

appropriate supply of potable water (at least one 1 litre bottle per passenger);
 Make sure that a first aid kit is available and supplies are complete1;
 Check to see if the winch is operable (if fitted on vehicle; if no winch is provided,
a tow chain must be kept with the vehicle); and
1
See GG-12, “First Aid and Medical Response”; all Project vehicles will contain at least one American
1
National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z308.1 Type III or equivalent 10-package First Aid kit.

 Check that vehicle seats and mirrors are adjusted so that the driver has optimum
visibility, and ensure that seat belts are available for all passengers.
Good
Any noted discrepancies shall be referred to the Mechanical Shop for correction prior to
vehicle use.
4.4 General Rules for Safe Operation
At a minimum, the operator must observe the following rules when operating a light
vehicle. These rules must be addressed in operator training and shall be implemented
in actual practice. Failure to follow these rules may result in revocation of the operator’s
qualification card or other appropriate action; see the GGI “Labour Grievance Policy.”
General Rules for the Safe Operation of Light Vehicles
 Only qualified operators are permitted to drive vehicles – the are NO

EXCEPTIONS! Operators will be required to present their driver’s license and
qualification card in order to receive vehicle keys from the operations office.
 Careless or reckless driving or driving under the influence of alcohol or drugs will
not be tolerated and are grounds for immediate dismissal; see the GGI “Labour
Grievance Policy.”
 Pickup beds or trays are designed for carrying cargo only; riding in the bed or
tray of a pickup truck is specifically prohibited, as is riding on a vehicle’s hood,
fenders, bumpers, or cab roof .

 Vehicles shall be chocked when parked regardless of grade, unless parking
areas are fitted with positive wheel stops or trenches that serve the same
function.
 Use of seatbelts by the driver and all passengers is mandatory.
 Sound the horn once prior to putting a parked vehicle in gear, twice prior to
traveling in reverse, and three times when overtaking.
 When on developed roadways, observe all traffic regulations, including

stopping at stop signs and traffic lights and slowing down for caution signs.
 Obey all posted speed limits, and maintain a safe following distance (at least 3
vehicle lengths).
 When the vehicle is being used as a pilot vehicle, stay within 100 m of the
following vehicle or the lead vehicle in a convoy. When oncoming traffic or
overtaking traffic is encountered, alert the driver of the following or lead vehicle,
as appropriate. Speak to the driver of the oncoming vehicle (by radio if possible),
advise them about the size of the load on the attended vehicle or the number of
vehicles in the convoy, and determine the safest manner for the vehicles to pass.
As a general rule, unless the oncoming vehicle is safely parked on a siding or
pull-out, it is preferable to stop the convoy and allow the oncoming vehicle to
pass. Overtaking vehicles should be advised not to pass until they can clearly
see the oncoming lane and know it to be clear of traffic or obstructions. On the
Barama portion of the road, give way to logging trucks wherever possible.
 Pedestrians and heavy equipment (except in a convoy situation involving

oncoming traffic as described above) always have the right of way; yield to foot
traffic and use extreme caution when passing children or domestic animals.
 Vehicles shall generally not be stopped at any place between the Buckhall site
and the mine, unless 1) an emergency situation exists (e.g., mechanical failure or
flat tire); 2) if specifically requested to stop for weather or road-safety reasons at
any of the Barama-operated checkpoints on the Barama portion of the access
road to the Aurora Project site; 3) if specifically requested to stop by uniformed
police or military authorities; or 4) if conducting activities authorized or directly
related to the work or security of the Project.
 Journeys to and from Buckhall and the Project site shall be planned to ensure
arrival in daylight hours (typically an 0600-0800 departure); GGI Security shall
advise the Barama Dispatcher by radio whenever GGI vehicles leave for
Buckhall or the Project site. Drivers shall check in with GGI Security by radio at
least once every two hours and upon reaching their destination. Drivers and
passengers shall be provided potable water and emergency rations in case the
journey is interrupted at the Barama checkpoint or Tapir crossing due to weather
or other emergency conditions. Unless accommodations are provided at the
checkpoint or crossing, drivers must stay with their vehicles until daylight and
permission is received to continue to travel.
 Extreme caution shall be used when passing a stopped or slow-moving vehicle;

pass only on straight sections of road with full visibility of the oncoming lane.
Sound the vehicle’s horn three times prior to passing.
 Never offer rides to hitchhikers or non-employees. Stay on designated roadways

and haul routes at all times.
 Steep roads shall be ascended/descended slowly and carefully. Under all

conditions, operate the vehicle at a speed that will allow safe stopping. Reduce
speed for wet and slippery or muddy road conditions, and engage 4-wheel drive
prior to ascending of descending steep sections of road.
 Drive slowly and cautiously when exiting or entering site entry gates and loading
and fuelling areas.
 Never leave a running vehicle unattended. The driver must take the keys and
chock the tires whenever leaving the vehicle.
 If a vehicle becomes stuck, immediately advise GGI Security Personnel by radio

and request assistance from other light vehicles with winches or tow chains;
vehicles may be sent from Tapir Crossing, Buckhall, or the Project site,
depending on conditions and availability.
 Immediately report all accidents involving GGI or contractor vehicles (and other
accidents that may be observed by GGI vehicle operators) to the Health and
Safety Officer via radio or cellular telephone, no matter how minor. If there are
any injuries, follow the procedures outlined in GG-12, “First Aid and Emergency
Medical Response.” Other emergency actions (i.e., used of tow trucks and/or
ambulances) shall be as directed by the Health and Safety Officer in coordination
with GGI Security personnel.
4.5 Vehicle Maintenance Considerations
The Mechanical Shop shall ensure that all light vehicles are maintained in accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommendations, adjusted for the heavy use typically
associated with remote mining operations. Maintenance actions shall emphasize the
mechanical integrity of the engine, transmission, drive train, and braking and steering
systems; the adequacy of the tire tread; and the functionality of all safety equipment.

4.6 Records
accordance with GG-05, “Records Management” and include hard copies of all training
session attendance sheets and any distributed hand-out materials (see GG-06, “ESMS
Training Program”
5.0 REFERENCES

 GG-15, “Forklift Safety”
 GG-16, “Safe Operation of Heavy Equipment”
 GG-17 “Vehicle Fuelling and Spill Prevention”

Figure 1: Vehicle Procurement, Operation, and Maintenance Process

Figure 2: Vehicle Operator Qualification Card
(not to scale)

GG-14: Handling and Storage of Hazardous Materials

This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) defines the methods that the Guyana
Goldfields, Inc. (GGI) Aurora Project shall use to manage the handling and storage of
hazardous materials on site. This SOP supports the Project Hazardous Materials
Management Plan and focuses on the handling and storage of hazardous materials
(primarily consumables). Staging and offloading requirements for containers of cyanide
are separately addressed in the Project Cyanide Management Plan.1 Requirements for
safe and secure storage of ammonium nitrate/fuel oil (ANFO) explosives and
primer/detonator materials are separately addressed in the Project Blasting
Management Plan. Procedures for the identification, segregation, and safe disposal of
hazardous wastes are addressed separately in the Project Waste Management Plan.
specified therein.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Container
The term container is defined as any bag, barrel, bottle, box, can, cylinder, drum,
vessel, storage tank, or similar receptacle that is used to store a hazardous material.
2.2 Hazardous Material
Hazardous material is defined as any substance (biological, chemical, physical) that

has the potential to cause harm to humans, animals, or the environment. Such materials
1
Cyanide will be purchased exclusively as solid briquettes, delivered in fully welded, certified
intermodal stainless steel ISO transportation/ mixing containers. ISO containers are sized for
intermodal (truck, rail, ship) transport, and are highly protective of the dry cyanide briquettes
during transportation and delivery. This material form/delivery system eliminates the need for
separate warehousing.

may include substances or chemical that constitutes a health hazard or physical hazard,
and includes chemicals that are carcinogens, toxic agents, irritants, corrosives, or
sensitizers; agents that damage the lungs, skin, eyes, or mucous membranes; chemicals
that are combustible, explosive, flammable, or oxidizers; and chemicals that (n the
course of normal handling, use, or storage) may produce toxic dusts, gases, fumes, or
vapours. At the Aurora Project, hazardous wastes are considered a special subset of
hazardous materials, and they require special, separate consideration under the Waste
Management Plan.
Hazardous materials may include:
 fuel, lubricants, and automotive coolants;

 hydraulic oil, brake fluid, and transmission fluid;
 paints and solvents;
 cleaning compounds and sanitizing chemicals;
 insecticides, rodenticides, or herbicides; and
 laboratory chemicals.
3.1 Environmental and Health and Safety Officers
The Environmental and Health and Safety Officers are responsible to the Environmental
Manager for coordinating proper hazardous materials handling and storage practices
with the Stores Manager at each Aurora Project site. The Environmental and Health and
Safety Officers are jointly responsible for seeing that the general handling and storage
requirements of this SOP are followed on a day-to-day basis. The Health and Safety
Officer is also responsible for ensuring that affected employees receive training in
appropriate hazardous materials handling and storage methods, and that appropriate
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) information for hazardous materials stored on site is
collected, maintained, and made available to support training activities or reference
purposes.
3.2 Area Managers
Area Managers are responsible for ensuring that all employees in their assigned areas
of responsibility have undergone appropriate training in the handling and storage of
hazardous materials in their work areas, in accordance with GG-06, “ESMS Training
Program”, and that employees follow such training in day-to-day activities involving
hazardous materials. Area Managers shall immediately advise the Health and Safety
Officer or Environmental Officer if they observe or are advised of any potentially harmful
or hazardous actions or conditions involving hazardous materials.

3.3 Aurora Project Workforce
GGI workers shall receive training on the handling and storage of hazardous materials
onsite, as well as procedures and actions for identifying potentially unsafe conditions,
and are responsible for handling and storing hazardous materials as trained. Workers
shall inform their immediate supervisor, the Camp Manager, the Health and Safety
Officer, or the Environmental Officer if they observe or are advised of any potentially
harmful or risky actions or conditions involving hazardous materials.
The GGI Procurement Manager shall ensure that the Environmental Manager is advised
of all hazardous materials procurements, and that all such materials are purchased with
international MSDS information from the distributor or manufacturer. The Procurement
Manager shall route copies of all MSDSs to the Health and Safety Officer.
4.0 PROCEDURE
The general process to be followed for the handling and storage of hazardous materials
is presented in the following paragraphs and summarized as a flowchart in Figure 1.
4.1 MSDSs
The GGI Procurement Manager will ensure that all hazardous materials are purchased
with international MSDS information from the distributor or manufacturer, and that such
information is routed to the Health and Safety Officer.
4.2 Training
The Health and Safety Officer shall ensure that all mine employees involved in the use
and handling of hazardous materials undergo training addressing the general
requirements of hazardous material management, as described in this SOP, as well as
material-specific information as described in currently available international MSDSs.
Training sessions shall be organized and documented as noted in GG-06, “ESMS
Training Program.”
4.3 Preparation of Storage Areas
The Environmental Manager shall coordinate with the Camp Managers and Construction
Manager to ensure that secondary containment systems are functional and that spill
response equipment is pre-positioned in close proximity to fuel and lubricant offloading
and storage areas, in accordance with GG-17, “Vehicle Fuelling and Spill Prevention.”
Locking cabinets or storerooms will be provides for separate storage of stocks of engine
oil, paint, solvent, brake fluid, cleaners, and solvents. A separate locking cabinet under
the control of the camp medics will be provided for all insecticides, rodenticides, or

biocides. Appropriate spill containment and cleanup kits will also be provided near each
storage area. Personal protective equipment (PPE; see GG-11, “Personal Protective
Equipment”) shall be selected based on the current risk register (see GG-09,
“Identification of Project-related Safety Hazards and Assessment of Risks”) and made
available in clean, dedicated storage areas adjacent to all hazardous material storage
areas.
4.4 Receipt and Unloading of Hazardous Materials
Security personnel checking in deliveries of hazardous materials at the Buckhall site that
will be delivered by road to the Project site will provide drivers specific directions on the
final delivery location, and shall alert the Environmental Officer and/or Health and Safety
Officer, one of whom shall supervise the offloading. Hazardous materials or containers
may be moved or transferred within the site only by qualified, trained vehicle operators,
using appropriate industrial forklifts or other vehicles (see GG-13, “Transportation
Safety”; GG-15, “Forklift Safety”; and GG-16, “Safe Operation of Heavy Equipment”).
4.5 Storage Area Management
Hazardous material storage areas shall be organized as follows:
 Hazardous materials shall be stored and handled in accordance with applicable

MSDS requirements. Chemically incompatible materials shall not be stored in
adjacent areas, and secondary containment shall be provided for all bulk
materials (e.g., fuel, lubricants) consisting of an impermeable high-density
polyethylene (HDPE) or concrete floor and containment walls, dikes, or berms,
with a volume sufficient to contain any reasonably possible scenario of spills or
discharges that may harm personnel or the environment.
 Containments should be generally designed to accept 110% of the largest stored

volume, including the volume of any piping system component that could drain
back to the containment. Containment areas should also be covered to prevent
accumulation of precipitation. Where roofing cannot be reasonably provided,
monitoring shall be conducted to ensure that accumulated precipitation is
routinely drained or removed from the containment.
 Valves between containment areas or on containment drains shall be designed

to be lockable in the closed position.
 All containers and storage tanks must be clearly labeled with the correct
chemical name. Pipelines carrying hazardous chemicals or fuel shall be labeled
with the contents and direction of flow.
 Hazardous material containers must be labeled to describe contents and any

expiration date or shelf life limitations. Containers shall be organized to facilitate
use of oldest stock first. Empty containers shall be accumulated and returned to

the vendor for re-use or crushed and properly disposed of in accordance with the
Waste Management Plan.
 Hazardous materials shall be stored within security fencing or barriers, away

from high traffic areas, and posted with appropriate signage. Access to storage
shall be controlled, and limited to authorized personnel only.
 Hazardous material storage areas shall be inspected for integrity or evidence of

leakage on at least a weekly basis; any observed leaks or container damage
shall be responded to as noted in Section 4.6.
4.6 Spill Response
GGI staff shall immediately report evidence of leakage or container damage to their
immediate supervisor, the Camp Manager, or the Environmental or Health and Safety
Officers and initiate evacuation if necessary in compliance with the Project Emergency
Preparedness and Response Plan. Staff members shall secure the site and remain in a
safe location where they can provide additional information to the Environmental or
Health and Safety Officers or emergency responders when they arrive, but shall not
attempt to stop, contain, or clean up chemical or fuel spills unless they have had specific
training in applicable cleanup methods.
Control and containment of spilled materials, cleanup, and disposal of cleanup waste
shall comply with the requirements of the Waste Management Plan, as appropriate for
the type of spill involved. Material-specific cleanup information shall be as described in
currently available international MSDSs.
All spills involving hazardous materials are categorically considered to be non-

conformances, subject to documentation, cooperative investigation, and systematic
corrective and preventive action, in accordance with GG-04, “Identification of Non-
conformances and Corrective/Preventive Action.”
4.7 Records
accordance with GG-05, “Records Management” and will include hard copies of all
MSDS information; training session attendance sheets and any distributed handout
materials; and any completed Corrective/Preventive Action Request (C/PAR) forms
related to spill response investigations.
5.0 REFERENCES
 GGI ESMS Plan


 GGI Cyanide Management Plan
 GGI Blasting Management Plan
 GGI Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan
 GG-04, “Identification of Non-conformances and Corrective/Preventive Action.”
Risks”
 GG-13, “Transportation Safety”

Figure 1: Hazardous Materials Storage and Handling
Procurement Manager
Purchase materials with
full MSDS information;
route MSDSs to
H&S Officer
Env ./H&S Officers

Train affected
staff in MSDS contents and
storage/handling needs
of affected mitigation plans,
per GG-06
H&S Officer
Place MSDS information

and spill response kits
in receiving/storage areas
Security Personnel
Evaluate materials being
shipped,
direct to appropriate
receiving/unloading area
GGI Workforce
Unload/store hazardous
materials in designated
storage areas/containers
Env ./H&S Officers,

Area Workforce
Monitor receiving/
storage areas
Yes Env ./H&S Officers,

Area Workforce
GGI staff Control, contain, clean up,
Spill? and dispose of cleanup
waste per GG-01
as appropriate
No
Env ./H&S Officers

No GGI staff Initiate C/PAR, investigate
Empty containers? root cause of spill and
resolve per GG-04.
Yes
GGI Staff/Env. Officer Records Clerk
File records
Return to vendor or Per GG-05
crush/dispose
per GG-01

GG-15: Forklift Safety

operation of industrial forklifts at the Guyana Goldfield, Inc. (GGI) Aurora Project. This
SOP will apply through the end of the operational phase of the Project; it supports
Section 4.3.2 (“Management of Social and Environmental Impacts”) of the GGI
Environmental and Social Management System Plan (ESMS Plan), the Project
Occupational Health and Safety/Accident Prevention Plan, and other GGI Management
Plans and SOPs when specified therein.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Forklift Operator
The forklift operator is a worker who has the skills and training that permit them to be
authorized to operate a forklift.
Operator training is defined as completion of an approved training course, including

practical hands-on training in the proper operation use of a forklift by a qualified
supervisor or manager or other experienced staff.
The GGI Procurement Manager is responsible for purchasing forklifts that conform to
relevant national or international standards.
3.2 Chief Mechanic
The Chief Mechanic is responsible for ensuring that forklifts are maintained in a safe
operating condition in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.3 Area Managers
Area Managers responsible for Project operations that require the routine use of forklifts
are responsible for ensuring that operators are trained in accordance with procedure.
3.4 Chief Mechanic
The Chief Mechanic is responsible for ensuring that: 1) forklift ratings and identification
markings are legibly maintained on the forklift; 2) suitable warning signs are posted in
areas where forklifts are routinely used; 3) maintenance is conducted at intervals
established by the manufacturer; 4) forklift tires are maintained with acceptable tread
thickness; and 5) backup alarms and rotating beacons remain functional.
3.5 Forklift Operator
The forklift operator is responsible for successfully completing operator training as

specified herein (see Section 4.2). Operators shall complete pre-shift safety inspections
of their assigned forklift, and report any problems to their immediate supervisor or to the
Mechanical Shop. Operators are also responsible for operating forklifts in accordance
with the guidelines established in Section 4.4.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 Procurement of Forklifts and Entry into Maintenance Tracking System
Forklifts should be purchased that conform to the requirements of ANSI B56.6, “Safety
Standard for Rough Terrain Forklift Trucks” or equivalent national or international
standards. At a minimum, all forklifts must be equipped with an overhead guard, backup
alarm, rotating amber beacon, horn, and fire extinguisher. Other major accessories
(e.g., drum forks, barrel clamps, or approved work platforms) shall be designed
specifically for use with the make and model of forklift purchased.
After receipt and acceptance, the Chief Mechanic or his designee shall ensure that all
forklifts are entered into the Aurora Project’s maintenance tracking system. The
following information shall be legibly displayed on each unit:
 GGI vehicle number;

 tire inflation pressure;
 unloaded weight;
 load capacity;
 load center distance; and
 maximum lift height.

4.2 Selection, Training, and Qualification of Operators
Area Managers shall select personnel to serve as forklift operators and ensure that they
attend a training session on the contents of this SOP, in accordance with GG-06, “ESMS
Training Program.” The training session shall emphasize the minimum requirements for
safe operation described in Section 4.4. Candidates shall also complete on-the-job
training (OJT) under the direction of a skilled operator selected by the Area Manager,
and shall satisfactorily demonstrate their driving skills. Successful drivers shall receive a
qualification card (see Figure 2) to be carried with their Aurora Project identification at all
times.
GGI reserves the right to rescind a forklift operator’s qualification card in the event of an
at-fault accident or if unsafe behavior is observed; see the GGI “Labour Grievance
Procedure.”
4.3 Pre-Shift Safety Checks
The EHS Coordinator shall ensure that signs are posted to identify areas in which
forklifts are commonly used.
Each operator shall complete a documented inspection of his or her assigned forklift
before starting work, using the Operator’s Weekly Forklift Inspection Report (Figure 3).
Any noted discrepancies shall be referred to maintenance for correction prior to use.
Copies of the daily inspection report shall be forwarded to maintenance and to the
Project files as noted in Section 4.6.
At a minimum, the operator must observe the following rules when operating a forklift.
These rules must be addressed in operator training and shall be implemented in actual
practice. Failure to follow these rules may result in revocation of the operator’s
qualification card and driver’s license, or other appropriate action.
General Rules for the Safe Operation of Forklifts
 Only qualified operators are permitted to drive forklifts – NO EXCEPTIONS!

Operators will be required to present their qualification card in order to receive
vehicle keys from the operations office.
 Passengers shall not be carried on the forklift at any time.
 Backup alarms/rotating safety beacons may not be disconnected.
 Use caution when driving where pedestrians are present.

 Sound the horn in dangerous locations, but remember that this does not mean
that the forklift has the right of way.
 Stop before traveling through doorways – sound the horn, look for pedestrians,
and travel through slowly.
 Never run over cables or flexible pipes unless they are suitably protected.
 Do not pick up a load if someone is standing close to it, and do not permit people
to stand or walk underneath a load when the forklift is stationary.
 Under no circumstances shall employees ever stand beside or walk along

with the forklift to steady or support the load.
 Do not travel with the load raised high; the forks should be raised only high
enough to clear all floor- or ground-level obstacles.
 Be extremely careful when braking, especially when loaded, as uneven or violent

braking may cause the load to fall off the forks or the forklift to tip over.
 Under no circumstances shall a forklift be used to elevate workers unless it

is equipped with an approved work platform. When using a forklift to elevate
personnel, be sure it is on firm, level ground. The forklift transmission must be in
neutral, with the parking brake engaged and the wheels chocked.
 Always lower the work platform to the travel position before moving the forklift
and never travel with personnel on the platform.
 When a high load restricts forward vision, drive in reverse, except if traveling up
an incline.
 Always space forks as widely as possible while first fitting or adjusting the load.
If a load appears to be top-heavy or unstable, or if the supporting pallet appears
to be unsound, it should be rearranged appropriately.
 When forklift is loaded, always travel down slopes with the forks facing uphill, and
up slopes with the load in front, taking extra care if vision is obstructed. Never
turn sideways when on a slope.
 When forklift is unloaded, travel down slopes with forks facing downhill.
 Travel slowly when descending slopes.
 When working to unload a truck or trailer, verify that the floor of the truck will
support the combined weight of the forklift and load.

 In normal conditions, forklifts shall not be left unattended on a grade. If in an
emergency a forklift must be parked on a grade, the forks must be lowered to the
ground, the engine turned off, and the transmission engaged; the emergency
brake must also be applied and the wheels chocked.
 When leaving the forklift for a short interval, make sure that the transmission is in
neutral, the parking brake applied, and the forks lowered to the ground.
 Chock the wheels and turn off the engine if the forklift is going to be left for any
length of time.
4.5 Maintenance Considerations
The Chief Mechanic or designee shall ensure that all forklifts are maintained in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations for scope and frequency. Forklift
maintenance shall be performed only by properly trained and authorized maintenance
staff or contractor personnel. The Chief Mechanic must obtain written approval from the
manufacturer before allowing any modification to the forklift that will:
 change the relative position of the various parts of the forklift from the original
configuration;
 add extra parts not provided by the manufacturer;
 eliminate any parts; or
 in any way affect load capacity or safe operation.
4.6 Records
session attendance sheets and any distributed handout materials (see SOP-05, “Social,
Environmental, and Health and Safety Training Program”). Copies of pre-shift safety
inspection reports and repair records shall also be retained.

5.0 REFERENCES
 GGI ESMS Plan

 ANSI B56.6, “Safety Standard for Rough Terrain Forklift Trucks”

Figure 1: Forklift Procurement, Operation, and Maintenance Process
Procurement Manager
Purchase forklifts
with required safety ratings
and accessories
Chief Mechanic
Enter forklifts into
maintenance tracking
system
Area Managers
Designate operator
candidates
Area Managers
Train/qualify operators
per SOP-23 and SOP-05
Operators
Conduct pre-shift
inspections,
operate forklifts
safely, as trained
Operators
Operators Yes Advise maintenance,
Operational forward copy of insp.
problem?
report as appropriate
No
Mechanical Shop Mechanical Shop
Conduct routine Conduct unscheduled

maintenance maintenance or repair
Mechanical Shop
Update maintenance
tracking system
Records Clerk
File records
per SOP-11

Figure 2: Forklift Operator Qualification Card
(not to scale)


Figure 3: Operator’s Weekly Forklift Inspection Report
OPERATOR’S WEEKLY FORKLIFT INSPECTION REPORT
Forklift Make/Model/Identification Number:
Note: Any deficiencies noted must be repaired before the forklift can be used.
Inspection items Comments Inspection items Comments
1. Forks, locking 10. Oil pressure

pins, carriage,
mast
2. Foot brake 11. Fire
extinguisher
3. Hand brake 12. Exhaust system
4. Steering 13. Hydraulic

system
5. Fuel, oil, and 14. Hoses
coolant levels
6. Horn 15. Backup alarm
7. Operational/ 16. Hour meter

warning lights reading
8. Gauges 17. Seat Belt
9. Tire inflation/ 18. Chains (as

condition req’d)
Other Comments:
Operator Date Time
cc: Maintenance
Records Clerk

GG-16: Safe Operation of Heavy Equipment

operation of heavy equipment at the Guyana Goldfields, Inc. (GGI) Aurora Project,
including truck/trailer rigs delivering materials and equipment over the Buckhall-to-
Aurora access road. Key aspects of this SOP will also apply to the operation of
contractor-owned vehicles. Requirements for the operation of light vehicles, industrial
forklifts, and all-terrain vehicles (ATVs) are separately addressed, respectively, in GG-
13, “Transportation Safety”, GG-15, “Forklift Safety”, and GG-26, “Safe Use of All-
Terrain Vehicles.”
Management System Plan (ESMS Plan), the Project Transportation Management Plan
and Occupational Health and Safety/Accident Prevention Plan, and other GGI
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Heavy Equipment
For the purposes of this SOP, the term heavy equipment includes major items of
motorized equipment owned or leased by GGI or its contractors, and intended primarily
for construction and mine operations use (e.g., hydraulic excavators, graders, loaders,
bulldozers, backhoes, crawler-mounted cranes or drill rigs, water trucks, haul trucks) as
well as truck/trailer rigs used to transport materials and equipment to the mine site from
the Buckhall landing and logistics support centre.
2.2 Heavy Equipment Operator
The heavy equipment operator is defined as a GGI worker who has the specific skills
and training that permit them to be authorized to operate heavy equipment.

Operator training is defined as completion of an approved training course or practical

hands-on training in the use of heavy equipment under the supervision of qualified
operators or manufacturers’ representatives.
The Aurora Project Procurement Manager is responsible for purchasing or leasing heavy
equipment that conform to applicable international and national safety standards and
that are specifically designed for heavy construction and/or mining use. The
Procurement Manager is also responsible for the procurement of transportation services
from licensed trucking contractors; selected elements of this SOP may be invoked as
contract requirements.
3.2 Mechanical Shop Manager
The Mechanical Shop Manager is responsible for monitoring manufacturers’ onsite

maintenance contracts to ensure that GGI-owned heavy equipment items are
maintained in a safe operating condition.
The Construction Manager is responsible for ensuring that heavy equipment operators
receive appropriate classroom and hands-on training from authorized equipment
manufacturer representatives and/or experienced operators as described by this SOP.
Construction Manager is also responsible for issuing vehicle operator qualification cards
(see Figure 2) to operators who successfully complete training, and for routing training
records to file as noted in Section 4.6.
3.4 Heavy Equipment Operator
The GGI heavy equipment operator is responsible for successfully completing all
required operator training sessions and examinations as specified herein. GGI
operators shall complete pre-shift safety inspections of their assigned vehicles, and shall
report any problems to the Mechanical Shop for resolution. GGI operators are also
responsible for safely operating their equipment in accordance with manufacturers’
instructions and the general guidance provided in Section 4.4.

3.5 Delivery Contractors/Truckers
Delivery contractors and truckers using heavy truck/trailer rigs or lowboys for oversize
equipment transport are responsible for safely maintaining and operating their vehicles,
and for complying with applicable portions of the general guidance provided in Section
4.4.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 Procurement of Heavy Equipment and Entry into Maintenance Tracking

System
Heavy equipment shall be purchased or leased for GGI operation/ Aurora Project use
that is specifically designed for construction, mining, or transport, and that conforms to
applicable international national safety standards. Contracts shall include appropriate
provisions for long-term, onsite maintenance and onsite operator training support.
Safety equipment included with or installed on such equipment shall be consistent with
the needs and practices of the international mining industry and, as appropriate, shall
include or consider:
 vehicle operating/running lights;

 redundant braking capabilities;
 wide-angle rear view mirrors;
 duty meters, pressure/temperature sensors, and alarms for hydraulics and other
major systems and subsystems;
 amplified warning horns;
 backup alarms;
 tire chocks and tire pressure indicators (for rubber-tired vehicles);
 permanently installed fire suppression systems;
 portable fire extinguishers and spill kits;
 slip-resistant surfaces and guard rails on access ladders;
 secondary emergency egress ladders for large haul trucks and excavators;
 separation of steering hydraulics from main hydraulic systems;
 engine kill switches that permit immediate shutdown;
 electrical system lockout switches accessible from outside the battery
compartment;
 dump bed-raised indicators and reverse gear neutralizers, for haul and dump
trucks;
 low-noise and well-ventilated cab interior designs; and
 load tie down straps and chain arrangements, for trailers and lowboys
After receipt and acceptance of heavy equipment, the Chief Mechanic or designee shall
ensure that each unit is assigned an Aurora Project control number, which shall be

prominently marked on the side of the vehicle. Once identified, all heavy equipment and
items shall be entered into the Project maintenance tracking system.
4.2 Selection, Training, and Qualification of Heavy Equipment Operators
The Construction Manager or responsible Area Managers shall nominate personnel to

serve as heavy equipment operators who have appropriate experience and training.
The Construction Manager shall ensure that all operator candidates attend a training
presented by the Construction Manager or responsible Area Managers. The training
shall emphasize the minimum requirements for safe equipment operation as described
in applicable operator’s manuals that may be provided by the manufacturer, as well as
the general requirements presented in Section 4.4. Operator candidates shall also
complete on-the-job training (OJT) under the direction of an experienced operator,
selected by the responsible Construction Manager or Area Manager. OJT sessions shall
be conducted until the operator satisfactorily demonstrates the adequacy of their
driving/operating skills to the trainer. Successful candidates shall receive a qualification
card from the Construction Manager (see Figure 2) marked with the specific equipment
items that they are authorized to operate, to be carried with their Aurora Project
identification badge at all times.
GGI reserves the right to rescind an employee’s qualification card at any time in the
event of an at-fault accident or if unsafe behaviour is observed; see the GGI “Labour
Grievance Procedure.”
Each GGI operator shall complete a documented inspection of their assigned equipment
before starting work, using the Operator’s Daily Inspection Report (Figure 3). Any noted
discrepancies shall be referred to mechanical shop personnel for correction prior to use.
Copies of the daily inspection report shall be forwarded to Mechanical Shop Manager
and to the Project files as noted in Section 4.6.
At a minimum, GGI and contractor operators must observe the following rules when
operating heavy equipment on the Buckhall to Aurora road, at Tapir Crossing, and at the
Aurora mine site. These rules must be specifically addressed in the training of GGI
operators and shall be implemented in actual practice. Failure to follow these rules may
result in cancellation of contracts (if contractor operators are involved) or (if GGI
operators are involved) revocation of the operator’s qualification card or other
appropriate disciplinary action; see the GGI “Labour Grievance Procedure.”

General Rules for the Safe Operation of Heavy Equipment
 Only qualified operators (or trainees and qualified trainers) are permitted to
drive or ride in or on heavy equipment – NO EXCEPTIONS! GGI operators
will be required to present their driver’s license and qualification card in
order to receive vehicle keys from the operations office.
 Careless or reckless driving or driving under the influence of alcohol or drugs will
not be tolerated and are grounds for immediate dismissal per the GGI “Labour
Grievance Procedure”, or contract termination, if contractor operators are
involved.
 Trailer or lowboy loads shall be centred and securely tied down with locking
straps or chains; tie-down security shall be re-checked prior to starting the
vehicle.
 Heavy equipment shall always be put in gear (and chocked, if wheeled) when
powered down and parked.
 Sound the horn once prior to putting a parked vehicle in gear.
 Obey all posted speed limits and slowdown in response to caution signs.
 If traveling in the transportation corridor to the mine site (i.e., the Buckhall to
Aurora access road), obey traffic laws and be extremely cautious in traveling
through any inhabited areas; do not use engine brakes, give way to pedestrians,
and be careful when passing domestic animals on the roadway. If traveling in a
convoy, or if carrying an oversize load, the Barama dispatcher must be notified a
day in advance. A pilot car must also be provided (see GG-13, “Transportation
Safety”). As a general rule, when traveling in convoy or transporting an oversize
load, unless oncoming vehicles are safely parked on a siding or pull-out, it is
preferable to stop the convoy or lowboy and allow the oncoming vehicle to pass.
On the Barama portion of the road, give way to logging trucks wherever possible.
 Vehicles shall generally not be stopped at any place between the Buckhall site
and the mine, unless 1) an emergency situation exists (e.g., mechanical failure or
flat tire); 2) if specifically requested to stop for weather or road-safety reasons at
any of the Barama-operated checkpoints on the Barama portion of the access
road; or 3) if specifically requested to stop by uniformed police or military
authorities.
 No driving is permitted at night on the Buckhall to Aurora road; trips to and from
the Project site shall be planned to ensure arrival at the destination in daylight

hours (typically requiring a 0600-0800 departure). Drivers should be provided
potable water and emergency rations in case the journey is interrupted at the
Barama checkpoint or Tapir crossing due to impending nightfall, weather, or
emergency conditions.
 Unless accommodations are provided at the Barama checkpoints or Tapir

Crossing, drivers should be prepared to stay with their vehicles until daylight and
permission is received to continue to travel.
 Always maintain a safe following distance (at least 3 vehicle lengths).
 Steep roads shall be ascended and descended slowly and carefully.
 Under all conditions, operate the vehicle at a speed that will allow for safe
stopping; reduce speed for wet and slippery road conditions.
 Be aware of overhead hazards, especially power lines that could be struck by an

extended mast or boom, or raised dump bed.
 Be extremely cautious in backing/dumping operations; ensure backup alarms are

operational and use spotters (with 2-way radios, if hand signals cannot be seen
clearly) in areas of poor visibility.
 Maintain awareness of other major equipment operations and the location of pilot
vehicles or other light vehicle traffic.
 Do not leave a running vehicle unattended. The driver shall take the keys and
chock the tires, as appropriate, whenever leaving the vehicle.
 Immediately report all accidents involving GGI or contractor vehicles (and other
vehicular accidents that may be observed by vehicle operators) to the Health and
Medical Response.”
4.5 Maintenance Monitoring Considerations
Maintenance for GGI heavy equipment items is typically provided as a contracted

service by the equipment provider or an authorized licensee. However, the Aurora
Project Mechanical Shop Manager or designee shall nevertheless ensure that each
heavy equipment item is assigned an Aurora Project control number and entered into the
Aurora Project’s maintenance tracking system. The Mechanical Shop Manager or
designee shall monitor the status of subcontracted maintenance items and may request

the Health and safety Officer to periodically evaluate the adequacy of subcontracted
maintenance functions via the processes described in GG-03, “Field Inspection.”
4.6 Records
session attendance sheets and any distributed handout materials (see GG-06, “ESMS
Training Program”). Copies of pre-shift safety inspection reports and repair records shall
also be retained, along with surveillance inspection reports and associated Corrective/
Preventive Action Requests (CPARs); see GG-03, “Field Inspection” and GG-04,
5.0 REFERENCES
 GGI ESMS Plan

 GG-26, “Safe Use of All-Terrain Vehicles”

Figure 1: Heavy Equipment Procurement, Operation, and Maintenance Process
Operators
Procurement Manager
Conduct pre-shift
Purchase/lease heavy inspections,
equipment with operate vehicles
required ratings, safely, as trained
accessories, spare parts,
service contracts, and
training support
Operators
Operators Yes Advise mechanical
Operational shop staff
Mechanical Shop Mgr. problem?
Obtain maintenance
schedules from mfgr. No
representatives, enter Mechanical Shop Mechanical Shop
vehicles into maintenance Conduct routine
Conduct unscheduled
tracking system maintenance, update
maintenance or repair
tracking system
Construction/Area Mgrs. H&S Officer

Designate heavy Inspect contracted
equipment operator maintenance functions
candidates per GG-03
Manufacturer Rep/
Qualified Trainer No H&S Officer
CPAR?
Conduct OJT per
GG-06
Yes
H&S Officer
No Trainer Resolve with contractor
Qualify operator? per GG-04
Yes
H&S Officer Records Clerk
File records
Issue qualification card
per GG-05

Figure 2: GGI Heavy Equipment Operator Qualification Card
(not to scale)
Figure 3: GGI Heavy Equipment Operator’s Daily Inspection Report
OPERATOR’S DAILY INSPECTION REPORT
Equipment Make/Model/Identification Number:
Note: Any deficiencies noted must be repaired

before the equipment can be used.
Inspection items Comments
1. Headlights/running lights – operability

2. Ride cylinders – missing bolts or obvious leaks
3. Brakes – operability
4. Tires – hub cracks, missing lug nuts
5. Tires – inflation pressure
6. Crawler tracks/tires – lodged rocks
7. Hydraulic hoses – obvious cracks or leaks
8. Tie rod/bell crank connections – integrity
9. Fuel tank – cracks, leaks, adequate fuel level
10. Bed cylinders/hydraulic actuators – leaks
11. Rock ejectors (haul trucks only) – functional
12. Pivot joints – cracks or missing pins
13. Rear lights – functional
14. Hydraulic oil reservoir – cracks/leaks
15. Horn/backup alarms - functional
16. Backup mirrors/windscreens – minimal damage,
no interference with operator vision
17. Wiper systems – reservoirs full, functional
Other Comments:
Operator Date Time
cc: Mechanical Shop Records

GG-17: Vehicle Fuelling and Spill Prevention


receiving fuel and managing station-based or remote fuelling of vehicles and motorized
equipment at Guyana Goldfields, Inc. (GGI) Aurora Project sites. Onsite fuel tanks,
vehicle fuelling stations, remote fuelling equipment, and their associated mechanical
maintenance programs will be designed to minimize the possibility that employees and
the environment will be exposed to pollutants associated with maintenance and fuelling
activities [e.g., petroleum hydrocarbons, heavy metals, and volatile organic compounds
(VOCs)]. Such exposures may be caused by human errors, such as topping off fuel
tanks, using fuelling nozzles without functional automatic cutoffs, not being attentive
during loading and unloading procedures, not using drip trays in field fuelling operations,
improper cleanup if a spill occurs, and improperly storing or disposing of materials
associated with fuel spill cleanup or maintenance activities. Implementation of this SOP
is intended to eliminate or minimize the potential for both occupational health and safety
(OHS) exposures and the potential for environmental contamination.
Safety/Accident Prevention Plan and Spill Prevention, Control, and Contingency Plan,
and other GGI Management Plans and SOPs when specified therein.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Tank Overfill Protection
Tank overfill protection refers to any combination of procedures, tank level indicators,
automatic shutoff devices, or other methods designed prevent the overfilling of a tank
system from the delivery of fuel from trucks or tanks, or transfers from other tanks via
pumps and piping systems.

The Mechanical Shop Manager at each Project site is responsible for a maintenance
program that ensures the physical integrity, cleanliness, and proper functioning of fuel
tanks and secondary containments, vehicle fuelling station equipment, remote fuelling
equipment, and associated spill prevention programs. The Mechanical Shop Manager
will ensure that proper fuel transfer, vehicle fuelling, and tank overfill and spill prevention
requirements are followed by mechanical shop staff.
3.2 Vehicle Drivers/Equipment Operators
Vehicle drivers and equipment operators shall observe all rules and procedures
regarding vehicle fuelling and spill prevention. They shall bring any observed hazards,
spills, or other concerns to the immediate attention of the Health and Safety or
Environmental Officers, or the Mechanical Shop Manager. Driver and operators shall
participate in all required vehicle fuelling and spill prevention meetings and training
sessions, and fuel their vehicles in accordance with the training received.
3.3 Health and Safety or Environmental Officers
The Health and Safety or Environmental Officers are responsible for checking the
available capacity of stationary or truck-mounted fuel tanks prior to fuel transfer from a
bulk carrier, as well as for checking the integrity of the receiving tanks and any
associated secondary containment. The Health and Safety or Environmental Officers
are also responsible for witnessing the entire offloading operation.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 Training
Vehicle drivers/equipment operators and mechanical shop staff assigned to fuel storage
or fuelling operations shall be trained in the requirements of this SOP at the direction of
the Mechanical Shop Manager and Health and Safety or Environmental Officers.
Training methods and documentation shall comply with the alternatives permitted by
GG-06, “ESMS Training Program.”
4.2 Maintenance Considerations
The diesel storage tank, fuel pipelines, pumps, and delivery systems shall be subject to
a routine maintenance program administered by the site Mechanical Shop that includes:

 functional checks of visual or electronic tank level indicators;
 periodic visual inspections of the tank, berm, piping, pumps, sumps, concrete or
high-density polyethylene (HDPE)-lined aprons, hoses, and delivery systems for
corrosion and any physical damage;
 checks for the visibility and good condition of DANGER – FLAMMABLE and NO
SMOKING signs;
 availability of an appropriately sized spill kit;
 functional checks of nozzles with automatic shutoff features; and
 periodic ultrasonic shell testing of large steel tanks, at the multiple-year intervals
specified by applicable American Petroleum Institute (API) standards.
Fuel trucks used for remote fuelling operations will be periodically inspected for the
integrity of the tank and delivery hoses, the availability of portable metal drip trays and
portable spill kits, the visibility and good condition of DANGER – FLAMMABLE and NO
SMOKING markings, and the functionality of level indicators and nozzles with automatic
shutoff features.
4.3 Receipt of Fuel for Onsite Storage or Transfer
Diesel fuel will be delivered primarily in bulk by barge to the Buckhall river terminal (or by
tanker truck to the temporarily place tanks at Auroroa Base) and stored in a covered
aboveground steel bulk storage tank farm. The storage tank and associated pumps,
piping, and delivery systems will be constructed to conform to applicable API standards,
and will incorporate concrete or HDPE-lined earth bermed secondary containments
capable of storing at least 110 percent of the total volume of the tank as well as any
portion of the supply pipeline that could drain back to the impoundment. The berm will
be fitted with valved drains that permit discharge of accumulated stormwater or routing
of contaminat4ed water through an oily water separator; valves shall be normally locked
in the closed position. Transfer pipelines will be pressure tested and subject to regular
inspection for potential leakage or corrosion. The tanks will be fitted with visual or
electronic tank level indicators.
If fuel or lubricants is delivered in barrels, covered and bermed secondary containments

(concrete or HDPE as previously noted) shall be provided at each major Project site,
along with appropriate DANGER – FLAMMABLE and NO SMOKING signage
Health and Safety or Environmental Officers shall periodically inspect the storage tank
area to ensure that stormwater is drained out of the tank containment, that containment
valves are locked in the closed position, and, by examination of the tank level indicators,
that the tank is capable of receiving the full volume of fuel carried by the bulk carrier. If a

fuel transfer is being made to an onsite fuelling vehicle, available capacity shall be
verified before the transfer, and the vehicles shall be parked on an impermeable, bunded
fuelling apron as previously noted. If the Health and Safety or Environmental Officers
detect maintenance issue that must be completed before accepting a load of fuel, the
Mechanical Shop Manager shall be immediately advised. The Health and Safety or
Environmental Officer shall observe the entire fuel offloading operation.
4.4 Fuelling Vehicles at GGI Fuelling Stations
Drivers/operators or mechanical shop staff shall fuel their assigned vehicles in

accordance with the following guidelines:
 Comply with the prohibition of smoking or open flames in the vehicle or within
200 meters of the vehicle fuelling area.
 Slowly drive the vehicle onto the sloped concrete apron adjacent to the pumping
stations; if no apron is available, use a portable metal drip tray. Place the vehicle
in neutral or park, set the hand brake, and shut off the motor. Place a chock
under one of the rear wheels.
 Open the vehicle fuel cap, securely insert the nozzle with the automatic shutoff,
and begin fuelling. Do not leave the vehicle.
 When automatic shut-off occurs, stop fuelling. DO NOT TOP OFF THE TANK.
Withdraw the nozzle, secure it in its standby bracket, and replace the fuel tank
cap.
 Record the volume of fuel pumped in the vehicle’s usage log and the station
logbook.
 If the fuel supply system requires maintenance or repair, notify the Mechanical
Shop Manager immediately.
 Remove and stow the wheel chock, start the vehicle, remove and stow the drip
tray (if used) release the handbrake, and slowly drive away.
The Supervisor of the fuelling station shall:
 Ensure that highly visible NO SMOKING and DANGER – FLAMMABLE signs

are posted;
 Ensure all valves and hoses are properly labeled to reduce human error while
fuelling;

 Immediately clean up any fuel spills after discovery with the pre-positioned spill
kit, in accordance with the Project Waste Management Plan and properly dispose
of any contaminated cleanup materials as noted therein.
 Clean the fuelling apron or drip trays with dry cleaning methods only (e.g.,
absorbent pads, diatomaceous earth); and
 Keep the fuelling station clean of debris and trash; dispose of all waste items
properly, and keep all vehicle lanes clear.
 If a significant spill occurs, contain and notify the Environmental Officer and the
reporting chain required by the Buckhall Spill Contingency Plan or the Spill
Prevention, Control, and Contingency Plan for the Aurora and Tapir sites. The
spill will be documented and corrective/preventive action initiated per GG-04,
Identification of Non-conformances and Corrective/Preventive Action.”
4.5 Fuelling Vehicles Remotely
Fuel truck drivers/mechanical shop staff responsible for remote fuelling operations shall
dispense fuel in accordance with the following guidelines:
 Comply with the prohibition of smoking or open flames in the vehicle or within
200 meters of the vehicle or diesel-powered equipment item being fuelled.
 Slowly drive the fuel truck close enough to the receiving vehicle or equipment for
the dispensing hose to fit into the receiving fuel tank without stretching.
 Place the vehicle in neutral or park, set the hand brake, shut off the motor, and
put the vehicle in gear. Place chocks under the rear wheels.
 Place the metal drip tray under the fill area, open the vehicle fuel cap, and
securely insert the nozzle with the automatic shutoff.
 Open the main valve on the bulk fuel tank and begin fuelling; pay close attention
and do not leave the vehicle;
 When automatic shut-off occurs, stop fuelling immediately. DO NOT TOP OFF
THE TANK. Withdraw the nozzle, secure it in its standby bracket, and replace
the fuel tank cap on the receiving vehicle.
 Close the main valve on the delivery truck.
 Record the volume of fuel pumped in the usage log.

 Advise the operator of the receiving vehicle or equipment item that fuelling is
complete.
 If the fuel delivery truck requires maintenance or repair, notify the truck shop
Supervisor or Mechanical Shop Manager.
 Remove and stow the wheel chock, start the delivery vehicle, release the hand
brake, and slowly drive away.
 Clean up any fuel spills (including any drips in the drip tray) in accordance with
the Project Waste Management Plan, and properly dispose of any contaminated
cleanup materials as noted therein.
 If a significant spill occurs, contain and notify the Environmental Officer and the
reporting chain required by the Buckhall Spill Contingency Plan or the Spill
Prevention, Control, and Contingency Plan for the Aurora and Tapir sites.
 The spill will be documented and corrective/preventive action initiated per GG-04,
4.6 Records
Copies of completed training records and any spill-related CPAR documents shall be
forwarded to the designated Records Clerk for retention in accordance with GG-05,
“Records Management.”
5.0 REFERENCES
 GGI ESMS Plan
 GGI Occupational Health and Safety/Accident Prevention Plan,
 GGI Buckhall Spill Contingency Plan
 GGI Spill Prevention, Control, and Contingency Plan

Figure 1: Fuel Offloading and Fuelling Process
H&S/Env. Officers
Train mechanical shop

staff per SOP-05
Mechanical Shop Staff

Conduct routine
maintenance of fuel
tanks, containments,
piping systems, and
onsite fuel trucks
Mechanical Shop Staff H&S/Env. Officers

Complete maintenance Conduct pre-offloading
request and/or adjust review of fuel tanks,
received volume containments, and trucks
H&S/Env. Officers
No H&S/Env.
Request maintenance
action or adjustment Accept?
of delivered volume
Yes
H&S/Env. Officers
Monitor fuel deliveries
to stationary tanks
or onsite fuel trucks

Conduct routine
fueling operations at
truck shop station
or at remote sites
No Mech. Staff
Spill?
Yes
Contain spill with
local spill kit, notify
Env. Officer
Env. Officer
Verify containment,
initiate emergency
response action per
WMP as required
Env. Officer
If required, initiate
CPAR and
resolve per GG-04
Records Clerk
File records
per GG-05

GG-18: Machine Guards and Safety Barriers

This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) establishes the minimum requirements for
machine guards and safety barriers at the Guyana Goldfields, Inc. (GGI) Aurora
Project. Moving or rotating machinery is intrinsically hazardous, and installation and
proper use of effective safeguards has proven to be an effective method for
mitigating these hazards and preventing associated workplace injuries and fatalities.
This SOP will apply over the life of the Project; it supports Section 4.3.2
Social Management System Plan (ESMS Plan), the Project Occupational Health and
specified therein.
This SOP applies to all permanently installed or portable machinery. It does not
apply to the operation of vehicles or hand tools, except for establishing a basic rule
that factory-installed safety guards on specific types of powered hand tools (e.g.,
chainsaws, rotary grinders) may not be removed or tampered with.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
For the purpose of this procedure, affected employee refers to any GGI employee
or contractor, whose assigned duties include operating machinery or equipment, or
whose job involves working on or in the immediate vicinity of machinery or equipment
involving one or more hazard areas.
2.2 Barricade
A barricade refers to a barrier such as a guardrail, fence, or other fabricated

structure designed to physically prevent employee access and hence prevent
exposure to a hazard.
2.3 Barrier

A barrier is a machine guard that offers protection by establishing a physical shield
on or around a machinery item; the shield is designed specifically to mitigate hazards
to users or bystanders.
2.4 Belt Conveyor
Belt conveyor refers to a powered, continuous belt of rubber, fabric, composite, or

other flexible material, operating over pulleys or rollers to transport ore, waste rock,
or other materials.
2.5 Hazard
A hazard is condition that could result in physical harm to a human being.
2.6 Hazard Area
For the purposes of this SOP, hazard area refers to an area or space on or around
operating machinery or equipment that poses an immediate or impending machine-
related physical hazard. Such hazards may be associated with the point of
operation, mechanical power transmission apparatus, or any other moving parts,
including feed mechanisms and auxiliary machinery items.
2.7 Idler
An idler is a pulley or roller on a shaft that guides or takes up slack on a drive belt.
2.8 Machine Guard
A machine guard is a type of barrier that prevents the hands or other body parts
from reaching through, over, under, or around the guard into the hazard area, and/or
physically prevents objects or debris from falling onto or being ejected towards an
employee or bystander.
2.9 Machine Safeguarding
Machine safeguarding refers to the practice of using guards, barriers, barricades, or

other devices to protect persons from contacting, becoming caught by, or falling into
moving machine parts, or to prevent objects or debris from falling onto or being
ejected towards an employee or bystander.
2.10 Mechanical Power Transmission Apparatus
Mechanical power transmission apparatus refers to the mechanical device that

provides power to a machinery item, and may include shafting, belts, pulleys,
flywheels, couplings, chain/sprocket drives, cranks, or gears.

2.11 “Nip” or “Pinch” Point
A “nip” or “pinch” point refers to any point where rotating parts may catch or draw
clothing or a body part into the works of a machine. Such points typically exist:
1) between parallel rollers rotating in opposite directions; 2) between intermeshing
gears; 3) near rotating and tangentially moving parts such as a belt and pulley, chain
and sprocket, or rack and pinion; or 4) between rotating machinery and a fixed
surface (e.g., between a stationary abrasive grinder and a work rest).
2.12 Point of Operation
The point of operation is defined as the location at which the machinery performs
the desired work on the material being processed (e.g., the location of actual cutting,
boring, shearing, or crushing operations).
2.13 Prime Mover
A prime mover is defined as an engine or motor, the main function of which is to

drive or power other mechanical equipment.
The Health and Safety Officer is responsible for either performing or directing
machine safeguarding risk assessments at appropriate points in the construction
process (or if facility expansions or modifications take place in the operational phase
of the project) in order to ensure that potential hazard areas are identified and
equipped with effective safeguards.
The Health and Safety Officer shall also ensure that employees in their assigned
facility areas receive appropriate machine safeguard training as described in this
procedure, and are responsible for reviewing and acting upon machine safeguarding
issues brought to their attention through the hazard recognition and reporting process
(see GG-24, “Recognition and Reporting of Safety Hazards”).
The Health and Safety Officer is also responsible for performing periodic inspections
and reviews of machine safeguards and associated employee work practices, in
accordance with GG-03, “Field Inspections.” The Health and Safety Officer shall
ensure that any identified deficiencies are resolved in accordance with GG-04,
Area supervisors have overall responsibility for safety within their work groups and/or
work areas, and shall:

 ensure that all installed machine guarding devices remain in place and in
good repair;
 ensure that employees do not remove or defeat machine guarding, either in

the course of routine operations or maintenance activities; and
 ensure that all machinery is operated only by authorized, properly trained

employees.
3.3 Affected Employees
All affected employees are responsible for complying with the requirements of this
SOP, as applicable to their individual work assignments, and for performing their
operational functions as trained. Affected employees are also responsible for
reporting any new or previously unrecognized machine hazards in accordance with
GG-24, “Recognition and Reporting of Safety Hazards,” as well as for bringing
suggestions for improving existing safeguards to management’s attention.
4.0 PROCEDURE
General considerations for the design, installation, and use of machine guarding are
described in the following paragraphs, along with the process for ensuring that
appropriate machine guards are designed, installed, and properly maintained. This
process is also summarized as a flowchart in Figure 1.
4.1 General Considerations
Moving machine parts must be guarded to protect personnel from contacting gears,
sprockets, chains, propeller shafts, connecting shafts, pulleys, flywheels, couplings,
fan blades, and other moving parts. Appropriate railings, barricades, fall-restraint
systems, and/or emergency stopping devices must also be installed to prevent falls
or injuries.
A range of control methods is available to serve these purposes; however, the

preferred hierarchy of methods is as follows, with the lower number corresponding to
a greater level of preferability:
1) Eliminate the hazard by including appropriate engineering controls in the

facility or machinery design;
2) Control the hazard by the use of guarding, barriers, or other safety devices;
3) Control hazards by the use of warning signs or visual/audible alarms;
4) Control hazards by the use of personal protective equipment (PPE; see GG-
11, “Personal Protective Equipment”); and

5) Control hazards through the training of operations personnel.
Eliminating hazards at the design stage by instituting effective engineering controls is

by far the most desirable strategy for safeguarding machinery. Controls that rely
solely on training, warnings, and subsequent workers’ behavior to prevent accidents
and injuries have much uncertainty with respect to effectiveness, and are the least
desirable. Practical machine safeguarding methods typically involve an appropriate
combination of the five methods listed above.
4.1.1 Purchasing/Installing Safe Equipment
New facilities, equipment, or machinery must be reviewed in the design engineering

/purchasing process. Facilities, equipment, or machinery must meet applicable
regulatory requirements and industry consensus standards, whichever provides the
greater level of protection. The design of machine safeguarding is sometimes
complicated, however, by the number and complexity of machinery items in a facility,
and other customer-specific considerations. As a consequence, it may not be
possible to address all machine hazards at the design stage. Moreover, not all
machinery builders provide point of operation safeguards on their products. In many
cases, the only available solution is an appropriate point of operation guard or barrier
that can only be made and installed by the end user after a thorough analysis of the
work process and the hazards involved. In any event, a concerted effort should be
made to control machine-related hazards during the design engineering/purchasing
phase of the Project.
4.1.2 General Considerations for Machine Guard Design
Every machinery item has its own unique hazards, or potentially hazardous
situations. However, machine hazards can generally be grouped into a number of
common hazard areas:
 The point of operation typically represents the greatest hazard because it

represents the greatest opportunity for injuries to occur. The point of
operation is by definition the point where the intended work is performed on
the material being processed and often requires the worker to perform some
task either within or very close to the hazard area. Safeguarding at the point
of operation is typically complicated because it must prevent all or any part of
a worker’s body from entering the hazard area, but must also allow access for
introducing material to be processed.
 Mechanical power transmission apparatus such as rotating shafts, pulleys,

belts, gears, flywheels, connecting rods, and couplings constitute another
major area of concern. A major difference between power transmission
guards and point of operation guards is that power transmission guards do
not have to accommodate openings or mechanisms for feeding material to be
processed. The only openings that are typically necessary for power
transmission apparatus guards are those that are made to accommodate

lubrication, adjustment, inspection, and repair. These openings should be
provided with covers that cannot be easily removed.
 Any hazardous mechanical actions or moving parts that may cause injury
must be considered and safeguarded. Where the operation of a machine or
accidental contact with any part can injure the operator or bystanders, the
hazard must be controlled or eliminated. Reciprocating, rotating, or
transverse mechanical actions or motion must be considered, as well as feed
mechanisms and auxiliary machinery parts. Examples include:
- rotating wheels or rollers;

- reciprocating arms;
- moving belts, drive chains, or conveyor systems;
- meshing gears;
- cutting teeth; or
- mechanical hammers or other devices designed to impact, crush, or
shear.
Rollers, meshing gears, and moving belts or drive chains as well as

reciprocating and transverse motion can create “nip” or “pinch” points;
virtually any moving parts having protruding bolts, fasteners, set screws,
teeth, or jaws can create pinch points for clothing, hair, feet, or fingers.
 All power sources for machinery contain potential hazards. Electrical

systems must be considered and properly guarded to prevent workers from
contacting live electrical components as noted in GG-20, “Electrical Safety.”
The primary power switch for all electrically energized equipment shall be
designed to be locked or tagged out for maintenance or repair purposes.
 High pressure steam or compressed gas systems may warrant guarding to

offer protection from inadvertent damage, leakage, or potential rupture.
Compressed gas cylinders used in welding or cutting operations shall be
stored and handled to prevent cylinders from falling and potentially damaging
inlet/outlet valves, as noted in GG-19, “Welding and Cutting Safety.”
 In some circumstances, guarding may also be appropriate to protect workers

from exposure to excessive noise or hazardous chemical substances.
4.1.3 Machine-Specific Safeguarding Requirements
 Rock Crushers: All wheels, gears, belts, pulleys, and exposed shafts should
be guarded in accordance with American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
Standard B15.1-2000, “Safety Standards for Mechanical Power Transmission
Apparatus” (ANSI B15.1) or appropriate national equivalent. All walkways
and stairs must be equipped with handrails and kick plates. At a minimum,
the operator of the crusher shall be protected by guardrails and toe boards
when operating or working on the equipment. Rapid shutdown switches shall

be provided at the operator’s station and other appropriate locations. Primer
movers shall be fitted with devices that facilitate positive lockout during
machinery maintenance. Employees shall not be permitted to stand in the
crusher hopper while attempting to free jammed material. Employees
working at a crusher location shall be protected from accidental falls into the
crusher by one of the following means:
- by adequately guarding the mouth or entrance to the crusher; if this is not

practical, a safety belt and fall restraint system shall be worn by affected
employees with the restraint system sized to physically prevent the wearer
entering the entrance to the crusher;
- by the use of a work platform with a standard railing located in such a

manner that jammed material can be safely dislodged;
- by other equally safe means that have been reviewed and approved by
the Health and Safety Officer as a result of a hazard analysis conducted
under GG-09, “Identification of Project-related Safety Hazards, and
Assessment of Risks.”
Crushers designed to receive loads of ore or rock in haul trucks shall be fitted
with permanent chocks or stops that prevent the haul truck from backing into
the hopper.
 Conveyors: Conveyors should be constructed and maintained in

accordance with ANSI B20.1-2000, “Safety Standards for Conveyors and
Related Equipment” (ANSI B20.1) or appropriate national equivalent.
Most injuries related to conveyor systems are the result of a worker falling on
or against the conveyor, or attempting to clean or clear a pulley or roller, or
re-align the belt while the conveyor is operating. This may result in the
worker getting caught between the conveyor belt and an idler or pulley;
getting caught in the drive chain or gear drive; or getting trapped between
major components of the system. Other common causes of injury related to
conveyor operations include materials or other objects falling from the
conveyor; other slips, trips and falls; fire; and electrocution.
Conveyors should be fitted with portable or other appropriate emergency stop

controllers that can be operated by workers at key stations or locations on the
conveyor route. Unguarded conveyors with adjacent travelways shall be
equipped with emergency stop devices which are located such that a person
falling on or against the conveyor can readily deactivate the conveyor drive
motor. Alternatively, conveyors shall be provided with railings that are:
1) positioned to prevent persons from falling on or against the conveyor;
2) sufficient to withstand the vibration, shock, and general wear and tear to
which they will be subjected during operation; and 3) constructed and
maintained in a manner that does not create a new hazard. All conveyor
crossover steps and walkways must be equipped with hand rails.

 Other Machine-specific Guarding Methods: Other acceptable machine
guarding techniques for a wide variety of common machinery may be found in
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Publication 3067,
“Concepts and Techniques of Machine Guarding” or equivalent national
standards.
4.1.4 Warning Signs or Alarms
Where machine guards, barriers, or barricades are used to control an identified

hazard, warning signs shall be posted in close proximity to the hazard area to identify
the hazard and present clear directions or prohibitions, as in the following example.
DANGER
DO
DO NOT
NOT OPERATE
OPERATE MACHINE
MACHINE
WITH
WITH COVER
COVER REMOVED
REMOVED
OR
OR WHILE
WHILE CLEARING
CLEARING
OBSTRUCTIONS
OBSTRUCTIONS
In addition, major equipment (e.g., rotary or gyratory crushers, screens, overhead

cranes, or conveyor systems) should be fitted with audible and/or visual alarms,
horns, or sirens that alert workers that the equipment is about to be energized.
4.1.5 Personal Protective Equipment
All employees working on or around heavy machinery shall wear hard hats, steel-
toed safety shoes, and safety glasses at all times. When appropriate, leather or
other work gloves may be worn to protect the hands from cuts, abrasions, or impacts
from rough-edged materials. See GG-11, “Personal Protective Equipment.” It is
important that protective clothing and equipment do not create any additional
hazards, as protective gloves or loose fitting coveralls may be susceptible to being
caught in “nip” or “pinch” points. Wristwatches, bracelets, rings, and necklaces can
also be caught by machinery, and shall not be worn by affected employees; long hair
must be securely tied back or placed in a cap that does not interfere with the fit or
function of the hard hat.
4.2 Machine Guarding Risk Assessment
The Health and Safety Officer or a qualified designee shall perform a pre-
commissioning risk assessment of installed machinery and equipment in accordance
with GG-09, “Identification of Project-related Safety Hazards, and Assessment of

Risks” in order to ensure that safeguarding is adequate for machinery items installed
in the constructed facility. A safeguard is considered adequate if it:
 prevents workers from falling against or into major machinery (e.g., rotary or
gyratory crushers, conveyor systems, thickener tanks);
 prevents all other potentially hazardous contact;
 is complete, undamaged, secure, and not easily removed;
 protects workers from falling or ejected objects or materials;
 creates no new hazards;
 does not interfere with machine operation/job functions; and
 allows for safe lubrication actions and other routine minor adjustments and
maintenance.
The risk assessment inspection must consider all phases or modes of machine
operation including:
 startup of process or operation;
 routine operation;
 operation during shift changes;
 routine and emergency shutdown scenarios;
 routine minor maintenance activities;
 anticipated major maintenance activities; and
 reasonably foreseeable non-routine, unusual, or emergency situations.
Serious injuries and fatal accidents are often associated with maintenance actions
and non-routine, unusual, and emergency situations, and the risk assessment should
emphasize these conditions in particular, especially if the situation could
inadvertently or deliberately defeat the protection offered by the normal safeguards.
4.3 Training
The Health and Safety Officer shall arrange for all affected employees to receive
machine guarding awareness training in accordance with GG-06, “ESMS Training
Program” prior to starting work, and at least annually thereafter. At a minimum, such
training shall include:

 general information on the types of equipment and the associated hazards
that account for the most serious injuries and fatalities at mines, including
mobile equipment (e.g., drill rigs, haul trucks and other service trucks, front-
end loaders, bulldozers) and stationary equipment (e.g., conveyor systems,
cranes, crushers, excavators), and safe work practices including the use of
associated safeguards;
 identification and description of hazards associated with the particular

machinery items the employees work with or are close to;
 information on types and use of machine guards, including the hazards that
they are intended to mitigate;
 the importance of safeguards and how to use or work with them;
 procedures for safely removing and reinstalling safeguards; and
 lockout/tag-out requirements.
Training must emphasize that defeating machine safeguards for the sake of
expediency is highly dangerous and unacceptable behavior that may
potentially result in termination (see the GGI “Labour Grievance Procedure”). It is
imperative that employees understand what to do if safeguards do not offer an
adequate level of protection or are perceived as an impediment to doing their jobs. If
a machine cannot be operated effectively due to the type of safeguards in use,
employees shall immediately bring the problem to the attention of their supervisors or
the Health and Safety Officer so that the problem can be evaluated and corrected.
Training shall specify the methods to be used for reporting problems (see GG-24,
“Recognizing and Reporting Safety Hazards”). Problems meeting the criteria of
nonconformances shall be documented and resolved as described in GG-04,
“Identification of Non-conformances and Corrective/Preventive Action.” Other
appropriate action shall be taken for minor problems at the Health and Safety
Officer’s discretion; in all cases, however, the employee originating the observation
shall be contacted and advised of the outcome.
4.4 Periodic Surveillance Inspections
The Health and Safety Officer shall periodically perform an inspection and review of
machine safeguards in all Project facilities, in accordance with GG-03, “Field
Inspections.” Inspection criteria shall be based on the general considerations
described above. Any identified nonconformances shall be resolved in accordance
with GG-04, “Identification of Non-conformances and Corrective/Preventive Action.”
4.5 Records
Record copies of all machine hazard risk assessments, training activities,

surveillance inspections, and corrective and preventive actions shall be filed and
maintained in accordance with GG-05, “Records Management.”

5.0 REFERENCES
 GGI ESMS Plan

 GG-03, “Field inspection”
 GG-04, “Identification of Non-conformances and Corrective/Preventive
Action”
Risks”
 GG-20 “Electrical Safety”
 GG-24, “Recognition and Reporting of Safety Hazards”
 ANSI B15.1-2000, “Safety Standards for Mechanical Power Transmission
Apparatus”
 ANSI B20.1-2000, “Safety Standards for Conveyors and Related Equipment”
 OSHA Publication 3067, “Concepts and Techniques of Machine Guarding”

Figure 1: Machine Guarding Hazard Assessment and Monitoring Process
Procurement Manager
Ensure facility design/

construction contracts
provided for appropriate
machine safeguards
Design/Construction
Contractors H&S Officer
Perform pre-commissioning
Install or correct
machine hazard risk
machine safeguards
assessment per SOP-16
as requested
No H&S Officer
Acceptable?
Yes
H&S Officer
Train affected staff
per SOP-05
Operations Staff
Operate machinery,
maintain installed
safeguards
Operations Staff
Ops. Staff No
Safeguards Report hazard
effective? per GG-24
Yes
H&S Officer
Conduct periodic
surveillance
inspections per GG-03
H&S Officer
Investigate observed
or reported machinery
hazards
H&S Officer
H&S Officer Yes
Initiate /PAR, resolve
CPAR Required?
per GG-04
No
H&S Officer
Discuss with
originator, take other
action as required
H&S Officer
Conduct annual refresher
training per GG-06
Ops Mgr.
No
New or modified
machinery?
Yes
Operations Manager Records Clerk
Notify Procurement
File records
Manager and
per GG-051
H&S Officer

GG-19: Welding and Cutting Safety

preventing injury and illness to Guyana Gold, Inc. (GGI) Aurora Project workers or
contractors, or property loss due to hazards arising from welding and cutting processes.
specified therein.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Confined Space
Confined space refers to any relatively small or constricted space such as a tank,
boiler, pressure vessel, or small compartment. Working in confined spaces must be
carefully controlled in order to protect the health and safety of workers, as noted in GG-
21, “Confined Space Work Safety.”
2.2 Designated Welding/Cutting Area
A designated welding/cutting area is an area such as a corner of a mechanical shop

where hot work is routinely performed. Areas so established will use effective measures
to control common hazards inherent in welding and cutting operations (e.g., welding
booths, flash screens or partitions, good cross-ventilation).
2.3 Hot Work
Hot work refers to any activity that has the potential to produce electric arcs, open
flames, hot particles or sparks, or other potential ignition sources. Hot work includes
welding, arc or torch cutting, brazing, heating, or metal grinding.
2.4 Personal Protective Equipment
Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) refers to items used to protect the eyes, face,
head, body, arms, hands, legs, and/or feet, such as welding helmets or goggles, hard
hats, gloves, coveralls, safety boots, and respirators; see GG-11, “Personal Protective
Equipment.”
2.5 Welder
Welder is defined as a qualified operator of electric or gas (torch) welding or cutting

equipment.
The Health and Safety Officer shall ensure that the Chief Mechanic and all welders are
properly trained in the safe use of welding and cutting equipment, and all applicable GGI
safety and emergency procedures. The Health and Safety Officer shall collaborate with
the Chief Mechanic to ensure that appropriate facilities, equipment, and training are
provided, and all welding equipment and welding gas cylinders are properly handled and
stored.
The Health and Safety Officer is also responsible for assessing potential respiratory
hazards associated with welding and cutting operations and ensuring that they are
effectively controlled by employing general ventilation, local exhaust ventilation, and/or
appropriate respiratory protection methods; see GG-11, “Personal Protective
Equipment.”
3.2 Chief Mechanic
The Chief Mechanic shall ensure that all welding and cutting equipment is inspected,
operated, and maintained in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations and
instructions, and if found to be incapable of safe and reliable operation, is either repaired
by a qualified person or withdrawn from service.
The Chief Mechanic shall also ensure that all welders are qualified and trained in the
safe practices for users of specific welding and cutting equipment, as described in ANSI
Z.49.1:2005 Section 10, “Oxy-fuel Gas Welding and Cutting Safety” and Section 11, “Arc
Welding and Cutting Equipment Safety,” or equivalent national or international
standards.
The Chief Mechanic shall also ensure that all required fire protection and fire
extinguishing equipment is available and functional, and that fire watchers are available
and posted as required when welding in areas in which fire hazards are a particular
concern (e.g., welding near machinery or in a wooden building under construction).
3.3 Welders
Welders are responsible for understanding the hazards of welding and cutting
operations, and the procedures used to control such hazards. The welder is also
responsible for:
 safe handling and operation of all welding and cutting equipment;
 securing the Chief Mechanic’s permission for conducting welding or cutting

operations in the field or outside of a designated welding area; and
 using appropriate PPE, including respiratory protection where required.
3.4 Fire Watchers
If a fire watch is required either during or following welding or cutting operations, the
designated fire watcher is responsible for detecting and preventing the ignition and
spread of fires. Fire watchers shall be trained in the use of fire extinguishing equipment
and must know how to sound an alarm in the event of a fire. They are responsible for
watching for fires in exposed areas near welding or cutting operation, and either
extinguishing them if obviously within the capacity of available equipment, or otherwise
sounding an emergency alarm.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 General Hazards
The following hazards must be considered and effectively controlled prior to any welding
or cutting operation at any Aurora Project facilities:
 fire and explosion due to hot work sources of ignition;

 burns from welding arc, torch flame, welding spatter, or hot items;
 ultraviolet (UV) radiation burns of the eyes or skin;
 electrical hazards from arc welding power sources, or other energized electrical
systems (see GG-20, “Electrical Safety”);
 unanticipated or accidental activation or startup of machinery or equipment or
other energy releases while work is in progress;
 mechanical hazards;
 falling objects;
 trips, slips, and falls due to slippery surfaces, hoses, leads, and other tripping
hazards, or from working on ladders or heights;
 hazardous atmospheres, either pre-existing or from the result of welding fumes
and gases; or
 confined space entry concerns (see GG-21, “Confined Space Work Safety>”
4.2 General Requirements
The following requirements apply to all welding and cutting operations performed
anywhere on GGI properties, including designated welding areas:

 Welding equipment must be suitable for the environment in which it is to be used.
 Welding and cutting equipment, machines, cables, and other apparatus must be
located such that it does not present a hazard to welders or other personnel.
 Gas cylinders must be secured to and transported on a wheeled metal handcart

that is stable in an upright position, or must be securely chained or strapped in an
upright position.
 All machinery, equipment, vehicles, and combustible materials must be moved

away from the welding/cutting area, or otherwise protected from sources of
ignition with non-combustible barriers (e.g., portable metal shields).
 If welding or cutting must performed on machinery, equipment, or a vehicle, then

open gearcases, engine compartments, fuel tanks, and any other components
with exposed grease, oil, or hydraulic fluids must be adequately protected from
sparks and other sources of ignition, by non-combustible covers or barriers.
 Drums or tanks containing flammable or combustible liquids must be thoroughly

cleaned and purged prior to welding or cutting.
 The general area around or adjacent to a welding or cutting operation must be

kept free of combustible debris and tripping hazards. Good housekeeping
practices must be observed at all times.
 Fire extinguishers or sources of fire fighting water or sand must be readily

available to the welding or cutting operation.
 Signs must be posted warning passers-by regarding potential hazards and

indicating that eye protection and other applicable PPE must be worn.
 Welders must wear appropriate PPE selected to minimize the potential for
ignition, burning, trapping hot sparks, electric shock, and/or eye damage.
Clothing shall provide sufficient coverage and be made of suitable materials such
as treated cotton (no synthetic or combustible fabrics) to minimize the potential
for burns. Other protective clothing items such as gloves, aprons, and welder’s
capes or sleeves shall be made of leather or other flame-resistant materials.
Cape or sleeves that cover the shoulders and arms shall always be worn during
overhead welding or cutting operations. See GG-11, “Personal Protective
Equipment.”
 Appropriate eye and face protection must be worn for all welding and cutting
operations. Eye and face protection including filter lenses shall comply with
ANSI Z87.1 or an equivalent national or international standard The shade value
of filter lenses for welding goggles or helmets shall be selected in accordance
with the guidance of Table 1.

Table 1: Guide for Lens Shade Numbers
(from American Welding Society F2.2, Lens Shade Selector)
Filter Lenses for Protection Against Radiant Energy
Minimum
Electrode Size Arc Current
Welding operation Protective Shade
(millimeters) (amps)
Number*
Shielded metal arc welding Less than 0.8 Less than 60 10
2.5-4.0 60-160 10
4.0- 6.4 160-250 12
More than 6.4 250-500 14
Gas shielded arc welding
1.6, 2.4 ,3.2, 4.0 --
(nonferrous) 11
Gas shielded arc welding
1.6, 2.4 ,3.2, 4.0 --
(ferrous) 12
Gas metal arc welding Less than 60

7
60-160 10
160-250 10
250-500 10
Flux cored arc welding Less than 60 7
60-160 10
160-250 10
250-500 10
Gas tungsten arc welding Less than 50 8
50-150 8
150-500 10
Air carbon – light Less than 500 10
Arc cutting – heavy 500-1000 11
Carbon arc welding 14
Plasma arc welding Less than 20 6
20-100 8
100-400 10
400-800 11
Less than 300
8
(light)
300-400
9
(medium)
400-800 (heavy) 10
Torch soldering 2
Torch brazing 3 or 4

Table 1 (continued):
Guide for Shade Numbers
Gas Welding
Plate Thickness Plate Thickness Suggested Shade
and
(inches) (millimeters) Number*
Cutting
Oxy-fuel Gas
Under 1/8 Under 3 4 or 5
Welding – Light
Oxy-fuel Gas
1/8 to 1/2 3 to 13 5 or 6
Welding – Medium
Oxy-fuel Gas
Over 1/2 Over 13 6 or 8
Welding – Heavy
Oxygen Cutting –
Under 1 Under 25 3 or 4
Light
Oxygen Cutting –
1 to 6 25 to 150 4 or 5
Medium
Oxygen Cutting –
Over 6 Over 150 5 or 6
Heavy
* Shade numbers are given as a guide only and may be varied to suit individual needs.
As a rule of thumb, start with a shade that is too dark to see the weld zone. Then go to a
lighter shade which gives sufficient view of the weld zone without going below the
minimum.
4.3 Ventilation for General Welding and Cutting
Natural ventilation is considered sufficient for welding or cutting operations outdoors or in

open areas. To the extent possible, the welder shall position the work in such a manner
as to keep his head out of the plume of welding fumes.
Appropriately designed mechanical exhaust fans or suitable respiratory protection must

be provided when welding or cutting operations are performed in:
 a space of less than 280 cubic meters (m3) [10,000 cubic feet (feet3)] per welder;
 a room having a ceiling height of less than 16 feet (4.87 meters); or
 confined spaces or where the welding space contains partitions, balconies, or

other structural barriers that significantly obstruct cross ventilation.

4.4 Ventilation in Confined Spaces
All welding and cutting operations carried out in confined spaces shall be adequately
ventilated to prevent the accumulation of toxic materials or possible oxygen deficiency.
This applies not only to the welder but also to helpers and other personnel in the
immediate vicinity. Supplied air shall be clean and respirable; oxygen must never be
used for ventilation purposes.
In circumstances in which it is impossible to provide such ventilation, approved air-line

respirators must be used, a full-facepiece, pressure-demand, self-contained breathing
apparatus (SCBA) or a combination full-facepiece, pressure-demand supplied-air
respirator with an auxiliary, self-contained air supply must be used. If welding operations
are conducted in confined spaces where welders and helpers are provided with any of
these types of respirators, a worker shall be stationed on the outside of such spaces to
monitor the safety of those working within, as discussed in GG-21, “Confined Space
Work Safety.”
4.5 Welding and Cutting Operations Outside of Designated Welding/Cutting

Areas Designated Safe Areas
Prior to engaging in welding or cutting operations anywhere other than in a designated

welding/cutting area, the Chief Mechanic or designated welding supervisor shall
complete the process depicted in Figure 1 and described in the following paragraphs.
4.5.1 Welding or Cutting in Confined Spaces
The first step in the process is to determine whether the intended welding or cutting
operation is to be performed in a confined space (see GG-21, “Confined Space Work
Safety”). If this is the case, the Chief Mechanic or designated welding supervisor must
follow the procedures established in GG-21 and submit a confined-space entry permit to
the Health and Safety Officer for review and approval. The confined-space entry permit
must consider the potential for oxygen deficient or flammable atmospheres in addition to
all of the hazards addressed above and designate specific procedures to control
identified hazards.
Ventilation and/or respiratory protection must be provided as described above. All gas
cylinders, tanks, and welding power sources must be located outside of the confined
space.
All remaining hot-work criteria and, where applicable, lockout/tag-out requirements must
be addressed. The intended work must be completed in strict compliance with the
procedures established in the confined-space entry permit, following the pre-entry
meeting stipulated in GG-21, “Confined Space Work Safety.”

4.5.2 Other Hazardous Atmospheres
When welding or cutting operations are to be performed in a small or restricted space

that does not otherwise meet the definition of a “confined space,” or where any of the
special ventilation concerns addressed above apply, it is still necessary to consider the
potential for a hazardous atmosphere as a result of the accumulation of welding fumes
and to implement appropriate control procedures such as general ventilation, local
exhaust ventilation, and/or appropriate respiratory protection.
4.5.3 Lockout/Tag-out
If the welding or cutting operations are to be performed on machinery or motorized

equipment, appropriate lockout/tag-out devices must be installed to prevent inadvertent
operation or energizing while welding/cutting is in progress.
4.5.4 Equipment Check and Initiation of Work
Immediately prior to beginning work, the welder shall don all required PPE and inspect
all equipment including gas cylinders, valves, regulators, hoses, connections, torches,
power sources, electrical connections and grounding, cables and leads, and electrode
holders, as applicable. Any equipment that is found to be defective must be either
repaired or replaced prior to beginning work.
4.5.5 Fire Watch
Fire watchers shall be designated by the Chief Mechanic or responsible Area Supervisor
whenever welding or cutting operations are performed in locations where anything other
than very a minor fire might develop. When required, fire watches shall be maintained
for at least one-half hour following the completion of welding and cutting operations, in
order to detect and extinguish possible smouldering fires. Fire extinguishing materials
such as appropriate fire extinguishers, or supplies of water or sand must be readily
available.
4.5.6 Clean-up
Whenever there is a possibility that other persons may unknowingly come in contact with
hot materials or items following a welding or cutting task, the welder shall mark the item
“DANGER – HOT!” with a soapstone marker or crayon. Upon completion of the welding
or cutting tasks, the welder or welder’s helper shall clean up all debris and restore the
area to its original condition, and notify the affected Area Supervisor that the welding or
cutting operation has been completed.

4.6 Records
session attendance sheets and any distributed handout materials (see GG-06, “ESMS,
Training Program”).
5.0 REFERENCES
 GGI ESMS Plan

 American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Standard Z49.1:2005, “Safety in
Welding, Cutting, and Allied Processes”

Figure 1: Welding and Cutting Process Flowchart (Non-designated Welding Areas)
H&S Officer
Verify welder/operator
PPE & training status,
train per GG-19, GG-21,
and GG-11 as required
Welder
Yes Welder
Request confined space
Confined space
entry permit and prepare permit?
for work per GG-21
No
H&S Officer
Yes Welder
.
IDLH atmosphere?
Verify PPE requirements,
issue and train per GG-19
as required
No
No Welder
Hot work on
machinery?
Yes
Welder
Install lockout/tag-out
device
Supervisor
No
Fire watch?
Yes
Supervisor
Assign fire watch
Welder
Conduct welding/cutting
or other hot work
as required
Welder/Helper
Inspect work,
clean up debris, restore
area to original condition
Records Clerk
File records
per SOP-11

Figure 2: Precautionary Information Figure 3: Precautionary Information
for Arc Welding Processes for Oxy-fuel Gas Processes
and Equipment and Equipment
Precautionary Information Precautionary Information

for Arc Welding Processes for Oxy-fuel Gas Processes
and Equipment and Equipment
WARNING!!! WARNING!!!
PROTECT yourself and others. Read PROTECT yourself and others. Read
and understand this information. and understand this information.
FUMES AND GASES CAN BE FUMES AND GASES CAN BE

HAZARDOUS TO YOUR HEALTH. HAZARDOUS TO YOUR HEALTH.
ARC RAYS CAN INJURE EYES HEAT RAYS (INFRARED RADIATION)

AND BURN SKIN. FROM FLAME OR HOT METAL
CAN INJURE EYES.
ELECTRIC SHOCK CAN KILL!
Before use, read and understand the Before use, read and understand the
manufacturer’s instructions, Material manufacturer’s instructions, Material
Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs), and Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs), and
company safety practices. company safety practices.
Keep your head out of fumes; use Keep your head out of fumes; use
enough general ventilation or local enough general ventilation or local
exhaust ventilation at the arc or both to exhaust ventilation at the arc or both
keep fumes and gases from your to keep fumes and gases from your
breathing zone. breathing zone.
Wear correct eye, ear, and body Wear correct eye, ear, and body
protection. protection.
Do not touch live electrical parts.
DO NOT REMOVE THIS INFORMATION DO NOT REMOVE THIS INFORMATION

GG-20: Electrical Safety

This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) addresses general electrical safety

considerations to be implemented at the Guyana Goldfields, Inc. (GGI) Aurora
Project. This SOP establishes minimum requirements to be verified in the design,
construction, and installation of safe electrical systems, and for establishing and
maintaining safe electrical work practices in day-to-day operations and constructed
facilities. This SOP will apply over the life of the Project; it supports Section 4.3.2
specified therein.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Affected employee
An affected employee is defined as any employee whose duties directly or indirectly

involve working on or with electrical systems or electrical equipment.
2.2 Conductor
Conductor is a general term referring to any object, device, solution, or other item
capable of carrying an electrical current, whether intentionally designed for such
purposes or not.
2.3 Electrical Equipment
Electrical equipment refers to all electrical devices, regardless of power source or

rating.
2.4 Electrical Hazard
Electrical hazard is defined as a condition or situation having the potential to cause

injury or other loss due to a defect or flaw an electrical system or electrical
equipment, or an unsafe work practice involving such systems or equipment.
Electrical hazards have the potential to cause electric shocks, electrocution, burns,
electrical fires or arcing, or explosions.

2.5 Electrical System
Electrical system is defined as the functional circuit as well as the components

connected to or affected by electrical energy, and all exposed conductive parts.
2.5 Competent Person
The term competent person refers to a licensed electrician or other individual who
has adequate technical knowledge or experience to identify existing or predictable
electric hazards in the workplace or working environment, and who also has the
authority to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them. For the purposes of
this procedure, a competent person’s technical experience should include: a
functional understanding of electrical theory and practice; experience in electrical
work; a general understanding of the overall electrical systems used at the Aurora
Project; practical experience in one or more classes of electrical systems; and the
experience to understand and recognize associated electrical hazards.
2.6 Ground
Ground refers to an intentional or accidental conducting connection between an

electric circuit or equipment and the earth or to another conducting body.
2.7 Grounded
Grounded means connected to earth or to some other conducting body.
2.8 Grounded System
Grounded System refers to a system of conductors in which at least one conductor

or point (usually the middle wire, or neutral point of transformer or generator
windings) is intentionally grounded, either solidly or through a current-limiting (not a
current-interrupting) device.
2.9 Isolation
Isolation refers to the secure disconnection and separation of electrical equipment

from all sources of electrical energy.
2.10 Lockout
Lockout refers to the placement of a lock on an energy-isolating device in order to

ensure the machine or equipment cannot be operated until the lock is removed.
2.11 Lockout/Tag-out
Lockout/tag-out refers to the implementation of a procedure to make sure that a

machine cannot and will not be energized or operated until the lockout/tag-out device
is disabled or removed by an authorized worker.
2.12 Tag-out
Tag-out refers to the act of placement of a warning tag to indicate that the energy-
isolating device and the machine or equipment being controlled may not be operated
until the tag is removed. Tag-out can also mean placing a warning tag on a piece of
equipment clearly indicating that it has been taken out of service pending repair.

The Construction Manager is responsible for coordinating with all construction

contractor(s) with respect to the correction of any requested action items resulting
from the hazard analysis/commissioning inspection discussed in Section 4.1.
3.2 Employees
GGI employees are responsible for using electrical equipment and observing
electrical safety provisions in accordance with the training received, and for
immediately reporting defective or malfunctioning equipment to their supervisor.
 taking appropriate measures to reduce the risks associated with electrical

systems, as described in this SOP;
 ensuring that only competent persons (i.e., licensed electricians) perform

technical work on electrical systems;
 ensuring that all affected employees including licensed electricians receive

training on GGI electrical safety procedures and expectations;
 conducting or arranging for a hazard analysis/risk assessment in accordance

with GG-09, “Identification of Project-related Safety Hazards and Assessment
of Risks” prior to the commissioning of any major facilities or prior to any
major modifications to electrical systems; and
 Performing or directing periodic surveillance inspections of the Project ground

protection program and electrical work practices, as described in this SOP.
It is the responsibility of Area Supervisors to be alert for potential electrical hazards in

their assigned work areas and to either safely correct them or bring them to the
immediate attention of the Health and Safety Officer (see GG-24, “Recognition and
Reporting of Safety Hazards”). Supervisors are also responsible for ensuring that
electrical equipment used by employees is in good working order and safe, and for
taking defective or malfunctioning electrical equipment immediately out of service.
4.0 PROCEDURE
The overall process for establishing and monitoring safe electrical work practices at
the Aurora Project is presented in the following paragraphs, and summarized as a
flowchart in Figure 1.

4.1 Hazard Analysis and Commissioning Inspection
The Health and Safety Officer shall complete an initial electrical hazards analysis and
risk assessment as described in GG-09, “Identification of Project-related Safety
Hazards, and Assessment of Risks” as the initial step in a pre-operational
commissioning inspection of a constructed facility. The Health and Safety Officer
shall seek the assistance of a licensed electrician in the identification of potential
electrical hazards and the evaluation of the adequacy of associated safety measures.
The inspection shall be planned and documented using the methodology described
in GG-03, “FIeld Inspections” and the inspection criteria defined in this Section.
The inspection shall consider facility-related issues such as the design, installation,
condition, and configuration of electrical systems, as well as operational issues such
as the nature of the electrical equipment used by employees, the purposes for which
it will be used, and how and under what conditions it will be routinely operated. More
specifically, constructed facilities shall be evaluated to:
 ensure that designs for new or modified electrical systems meet the
requirements of governing permits and regulatory requirements;
 ensure that manufacturers’ ratings on all electrical components are

appropriate for their intended service;
 ensure that electrical system components are effectively isolated or guarded

to protect workers from potential contact with energized parts, including
location of electrical equipment in special rooms or secured areas in which
access will be limited to authorized personnel only;
 ensure that an appropriate maintenance program has been planned and

documented for all installed portions of the electrical system; and
 ensure that employees or contractors working with or on electrical system

components use appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE; see GG-
11, “Personal Protective Equipment”).
Identified hazards shall be assessed and appropriate control measures

recommended and prioritized on a risk register in accordance with GG-09
requirements. The complete inspection report will be reviewed as required by GG-03
and forwarded for contractor action as required; completion of all action items will be
verified prior to closure of the inspection report. The Construction Manager will
coordinate with the affected construction contractor and the Health and Safety Officer
as necessary to resolve all open action items.
4.2 Employee Training
The Health and Safety Officer shall ensure that all affected employees are trained in
the basics of electrical safety in the workplace, as well as the results of the facility-
specific hazard analyses conducted as noted in Section 4.1. Training shall be
documented and delivered in accordance with one or more of the methods specified
in GG-06, “ESMS Training Program.” Records of employee training shall be kept as
noted in Section 4.4.
At a minimum, electrical safety training shall address:

 basic electrical fundamentals, e.g., the concepts of voltage, current,
resistance, and grounding;
 the potential sources and characteristics of electrical hazards and related

injuries, such as electrical fires, electrocution, burns, and arc flash;
 GGI electrical safety rules and safe work practices, as defined by this SOP;
 facility-specific hazard analysis results; and
 lockout/tag-out procedures that must be implemented prior to performing any

maintenance or repair on any electrically powered machinery.
4.3 Periodic Inspections of Grounding Program/Safe Electrical Work Practices
The Health and Safety Officer shall periodically conduct facility-specific surveillance
inspections to verify the adequacy of the Project’s equipment grounding program and
general electrical work practices. Such inspections shall be planned and
documented in accordance with GG-03, “Field Inspections,” using the inspection
criteria defined herein. Any observed nonconformances shall be documented and
resolved in accordance with GG-04, “Identification of Non-conformances and
Corrective/Preventive Action.”
4.3.1 Inspection of Grounding Program
The Health and Safety Officer shall verify that a licensed electrician or other
competent person is currently assigned in each facility who is capable of identifying
hazards related to electrical grounding and who has the authority to take appropriate
corrective actions. This individual shall ensure that all cord sets, all receptacles
which are not part of the permanent wiring of the building or structure, and equipment
connected by cord and plug (with the exception of “double insulated” rated tools or
equipment) that is available for use or used by workers is properly grounded and that
the grounding circuit is tested for continuity on a regular basis. Each receptacle and
attachment cap or plug shall be tested for correct attachment of the equipment
grounding conductor, and the equipment grounding conductor shall be connected to
its proper terminal.
These ground fault tests shall be performed before the equipment’s first use, before
equipment is returned to service following repairs, before equipment is used after any
potentially damaging incident, and at quarterly intervals. Cord sets and receptacles
that are fixed and not exposed to damage shall be tested at intervals not exceeding
six months. A dated tag shall be affixed to each piece of equipment to identify when
it was last successfully tested. Test results shall be recorded and shall identify each
receptacle, cord set, and cord- and plug-connected equipment that passes the test
and shall indicate the last date it was tested. Records of equipment grounding tests
shall be kept in compliance with Section 4.4.
4.3.2 Inspection of Electrical Work Practices
The Health and Safety Officer or designated inspector shall also:
 ensure that electrical equipment in use is suitable for its working environment;

 verify that equipment is safely installed and operated, and maintained in a
safe condition;
 ensure that maintenance checklists are prepared for all areas of the electrical
system, and that records of maintenance activities are kept in compliance
with Section 4.4;
 ensure that an accessible and clearly identified method is provided to

disconnect power and isolate electrical systems for fixed machinery and
systems in an emergency;
 ensure that employees are aware of the location of such disconnects and how
to operate them;
 ensure that ends of flexible cables or extension cords have the outer sheath
of the cable firmly clamped to prevent the wires from pulling out of the
terminals (particularly at the ground connection);
 ensure that only appropriate, heavy duty, or extra heavy duty flexible
extension cords are used where needed, and that flexible extension cords are
never used in place of permanent wiring;
 ensure that damaged sections of electrical cables are completely removed

and replaced using proper connectors or cable couplers to join lengths of
cable;
 provide protective cages or fixtures for light bulbs and other electrical devices
or equipment that could easily be broken or damaged in use;
 ensure that electrical equipment used in flammable/explosive atmospheres

are specifically designed to prevent a source of ignition;
 ensure that grounding, insulation, or other protective devices are provided as

necessary to ensure that cables and conductors that are not an intended part
of a circuit do not become accidentally energized;
 ensure that all cord sets, receptacles which are not part of the permanent
wiring of the building or structure, and equipment connected by cord and plug
which are available for use or used by workers are visually inspected for
damage or defects before each day’s use;
 instruct employees and supervisors to immediately take damaged or defective

electrical tools or equipment out of service and ensure that such tools or
equipment are promptly repaired or replaced;
 ensure that faulty electrical equipment or tools are be tagged to clearly

identify that it is out of service, in need of repair, and not to be used;
 ensure that appropriate lockout/tag-out procedures are followed when

maintenance is performed on electric-powered machinery;
.
 ensure that contractors or employees working on the electrical system are
licensed electricians; and

 for the Buckhall site, ensure that the local power supply authority has been
notified when work must be performed near overhead power lines, and
ensure that such lines are de-energized and grounded, or protected by other
appropriate means prior to commencing work.
4.4 Records
Records generated from the routine implementation of this procedure shall be

retained in accordance with GG-05, “Records Management” and include:
 risk registers with completed electrical hazard profiles;
 training records for designated inspectors, and affected workers; and
 completed inspection plan and report forms from commissioning inspections

and periodic field inspections.
5.0 REFERENCES
 GGI ESMS Plan

 GG-04, “Identification of Non-conformances and Corrective/Preventive
Action”
Risks”

Figure 1: Electrical Safety Monitoring Process
H&S Officer/
Licensed Electrician
Conduct commissioning
Inspection per GG-03,
refer action
items to contractor for
correction/completion
H&S Officer
Verify completion of all
contractor action items
H&S Officer
Conduct/update
hazard analysis/RA
per GG-09
H&S Officer
Train affected staff in
GG-20 requirements
and hazard profiles,
per GG-06
H&S Officer or
Designated Inspector
Conduct periodic
inspecftions of
equipment grounding
program/safe work
practices per GG-03
Yes Insp.
Accept?
No
H&S Officer or
Initiate & resolve
CPAR per GG-04
H&S Officer or
Prepare and submit
inspection report
per GG-03
Records Clerk
File records
per GG-06

GG-21: Confined Space Work Safety

Goldfields, Inc. (GGI) Aurora Project shall use to manage entry to confined work spaces
at various facility locations. This SOP applies in addition to the general assessment of
safety hazards addressed by GG-09, “Identification of Project-related Safety Hazards,
and Assessment of Risks.”
specified therein.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Confined Space
A confined space is defined any workspace that is large enough to permit a worker to
fully enter, but has limited or restricted openings for entry and exit and is not designed or
intended for periodic, routine, or continuous worker occupancy. Confined spaces
represent a significant, potentially life-threatening, and often unanticipated workplace
hazard for workers as well as rescuers, and typically exhibit one or more of the following
characteristics:
 contain granular or powdered materials (e.g., crushed ore, lime) that have the
potential to engulf or trap a worker entering the space;
 have inwardly converging walls or a sloping or tapering floor that could trap a
worker;
 have potential mechanical hazards (e.g., conveyors or mixing devices) with the
potential for sudden, unexpected releases of energy if not properly locked out;

 have the potential for sudden, unexpected flooding with gases, water, or other
fluids;
 have limited ventilation, and hence have the potential for oxygen-deficient,
flammable, or toxic atmospheres; or
 have the potential for oxygen-deficient, flammable, or toxic atmospheres as a

result of the work to be performed (e.g., painting, welding, or cutting).
Examples of confined spaces include closed and open-top tanks, pressure vessels,
mixing vessels, vaults or sumps, oil/water separators, septic tanks, vats, silos, ducts,
tunnels, or pipelines.
 assisting the Camp Managers and Area Supervisors in identifying and marking
(see Figure 2) facility areas that meet the confined space criteria defined in
Section 2.1;
 preparing a written confined space entry assessment (see Figure 3) for each
space so identified;
 ensuring that all employees who may be confronted with a potential confined
space entry situation receive appropriate training in recognizing confined space
hazards;
 ensuring that only those employees who have received confined space entry
training engage in confined space work;
 with the Area Supervisor or Construction Manager, jointly assessing the potential
for alternative work schemes that do not require entry into a confined space;
 where confined space entry needs are confirmed, preparing written permits (see
Figure 3) that address the potential confined space hazards noted in the
assessment, and ensuring that appropriate safe work practices and rescue
procedures have been established;

 monitor confined space entry activities to verify that employees follow established
safe work practices; and
 providing and operating appropriate workspace air-monitoring instruments when

such monitoring is required as a condition of entry, and for ensuring that such
instruments are properly calibrated and in good working order.
Area Supervisors are responsible for:
 confirming that no practical non-confined space alternative exists for proposed

confined space work;
 verifying that the confined space permit has been reviewed and approved prior to
proceeding with the intended operation;
 ensuring that all tests or air monitoring specified in the confined space entry
permit have been performed prior to entry; and
 terminating confined space operations if hazardous conditions are observed, or

when specifically requested by the Health and Safety Officer.
3.3 Confined Space Entry Attendant
The confined space entry attendant may be the Area Supervisor or the Health and
Safety Officer, and is responsible for:
 monitoring activities and conditions inside and outside of the confined space;
 remaining in communication with workers inside the space;
 ordering withdrawals from the confined space if hazardous are detected or if

workers exhibit any unusual behaviour or signs of stress; and
 Initiating and coordinating rescue procedures as defined in the entry permit in

event of an emergency.
3.4 Confined Space Workers

Confined space workers are responsible for:
 notifying the Health and Safety Officer with respect to any unidentified risks or
concerns they may have prior to entering the confined space;

 performing all tasks in accordance with the training received and the procedures
specified in the confined space entry permit; and
 if problems are noted, immediately advising the attendant and safely exiting the
work space.
4.0 PROCEDURE
The general process to be followed for managing confined space entry needs is
presented in the following paragraphs, and summarized as a flowchart in Figure 1.
4.1 Identification of Confined Spaces
The Health and Safety Officer shall evaluate all Aurora Project facility areas and identify
specific areas or spaces that meet the confined space criteria defined in Section 2.1.
Each discrete area or space shall be assigned a unique designator. A designator list
shall be developed for each facility, and the location of each space marked on a current
facility layout drawing. The Health and Safety Officer shall permanently post a confined
space warning sign (see Figure 2) in a highly visible area adjacent to the confined
space, and permanently mark the sign with the assigned designator. Other measures
shall be established with the concurrence and participation of the Camp Manager and
responsible Security Manager to prevent or physically inhibit unauthorized entrance to
the space. Such measures may include the placement of yellow-painted barriers or
chains, bolted manhole covers, cover bolting or fasteners requiring special removal
equipment, and/or padlocks, in combination with warning signs.
4.2 Confined Space Assessment
The Health and Safety Officer will prepare a brief, concise, written assessment of each
confined space identified as noted in Section 4.2, using the assessment section of the
combined Confined Space Assessment/Entry Permit form (see Figure 3). The
assessment shall be updated during permit preparation (see Section 4.5) if the process,
equipment, or other operating or environmental conditions have undergone any
significant change or modification.
As noted in Figure 3, the written assessment must uniquely identify the space or
category using the same designator marked on the associated warning sign. The written
assessment shall describe the source and nature of any inherent hazards and establish
the specific procedures to control hazards so identified, prior to entering the space.
Hazards to be considered include:
 oxygen deprivation (e.g., from welding, oxidation, breathing);

 potential for toxic atmospheres (e.g., welding, cutting, brazing, H2S, CO, CO2,
petroleum chemicals);
 flammable or explosive atmospheres (e.g., fuel, solvents, H2S, hydrogen);
 hostile environments (e.g., electrical and mechanical hazards, excessive heat,

potential infestation with bats or venomous snakes);
 entrapment due to the configuration of the space, and potential complications
from the need for tools and safety equipment in the space interior;
 entrapment from granular materials (e.g., powdered lime, crushed gravel);
 entrapment from sudden releases of gases or fluids; and
 inadequate lighting.
The written assessment should identify appropriate pre-entry monitoring and ventilation
procedures and requirements for personal protective equipment (PPE) and respiratory
protection, if any (see GG-11, “Personal Protective Equipment”). Specific requirements
for lockout or tag-out of electrical or mechanical equipment shall be identified. The
written assessment should also define appropriate entry procedures, specify whether or
not an attendant is required, and describe the nature and extent of any predetermined
rescue provisions (e.g., use of life safety lines and harnesses).
4.3 Training
The Health and Safety Officer will arrange training sessions in the contents of this SOP
on at least an annual basis for those specific employees or contractors who may
potentially be confronted with unanticipated confined space entry situations (e.g., need
to enter a confined space briefly in the course of completing an otherwise unrelated task,
or recovering a dropped tool), or who will be expected to routinely perform maintenance
or operational tasks in confined spaces. Such training shall be documented in
accordance with GG-06, “ESMS Training Program.” Training session focus and content
shall be designed to ensure that all affected employees:
 are able to recognize a potential confined space by applying the general criteria
presented in Section 2.1;
 understand the potential life hazards associated with entering a confined space,
and typical monitoring and mitigation processes (e.g., lockout/tag-out
procedures, atmosphere monitoring equipment, portable lighting and ventilation
systems, respiratory protection, use of attendants, assisted rescue processes);
 are properly fitted and trained in the use of all potentially required PPE [e.g.,
supplied-air respirators or self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA)];

 understand the confined space assessment/entry permit system described in this
SOP; and
 will under no circumstances enter any confined space unless (and until) they
have determined that it is safe to do so.
Although a concerted effort will have been made to identify and post all confined spaces
early in the life of the facility, employees shall be encouraged to always request
guidance from the Health and Safety Officer before entering any unposted space that
appears to meet Section 2.1 criteria. Observations of apparently confined spaces within
which work will need to be performed but that have not been posted with warning signs
shall be reported as noted in GG-24, “Recognition and Reporting of Safety Hazards.”
Training sessions shall include demonstrations, practical examples, and hands-on

experience with monitoring instruments, portable ventilation equipment, applicable PPE,
safety harnesses, and rescue devices such as tripods and winches. In addition, all
personnel who may have attendant responsibilities shall be trained in basic first-aid and
cardio-pulmonary resuscitation (CPR) in accordance with GG-12, “First Aid and
Emergency Medical Response.”
Refresher training shall be provided on at least an annual basis.
4.4 Assessment of Alternatives/Preparation of Confined Space Entry Permit
The Area Supervisor shall advise the Health and Safety Officer prior to scheduling any
work activity in a confined space. Alternatives shall be evaluated to be certain that no
other practical options exist for conducting the required work.
If evaluation of alternatives confirms that a confined space must be entered, the Health
and Safety Officer and Area Supervisor shall complete the entry permit portion of the
combined Confined Space Assessment/Entry Permit form (see Figure 3) previously
prepared for that space (see Section 4.3). The Area Supervisor and maintenance staff
shall be consulted to determine if any facility modifications have been made since the
assessment was first conducted. The effect of any modifications on the adequacy of the
original assessment shall be evaluated, and the assessment updated accordingly, with a
description of the changes made inserted in the “comments” block of the Confined
Space Assessment/Entry Permit form.
As noted in Figure 3, the permit shall identify the date, and planned duration of the
planned entry, and the nature of work to be performed. The permit shall describe the
specific mitigation measures that will be implemented to address the hazards noted in
the assessment, and shall assign responsibilities to specific individuals, at the direction
of the Area Manager. Mitigation measures and precautions to be described may
include:

 definition of ingress/egress points;
 direct supervision of work or the assignment of an attendant to monitor safety

considerations;
 prohibition of smoking in or near a confined space;

 methods of communications with attendants or fire watchers;
 testing/monitoring of confined space atmosphere, including definition of the test

equipment required;
 gas purging routines;
 security of compressed gas cylinders and flexible lines into the work space;
 removal of toxic/flammable wastes or residues;
 ventilation or supplied air/SCBA needs;
 other PPE requirements;
 temporary lighting needs;
 electrical grounding protocols/elimination of static electricity;
 limitation of working time in the confined space; and
 emergency preparedness and rescue procedures.
The Health and Safety Officer and Area Supervisor will sign the draft Confined Space
Assessment/Entry Permit. The approved permit shall be valid only for the designated
entry performed by the personnel identified in the permit on the date and time specified.
4.5 Pre-entry Safety Meeting
Once entry into a confined space has been approved, the Health and Safety Officer shall
hold a safety meeting with the personnel assigned to perform the confined space work.
The requirements of the permit shall be reviewed in detail, and a copy of the permit
posted next to the applicable confined space warning sign. The primary objective of this
meeting is to ensure that permit requirements have been met, and to review specific
roles and responsibilities, communication lines, and emergency response procedures.
The preliminary meeting is also an appropriate forum to review the operation of any

required air monitoring instruments.1 All such instruments shall be calibrated prior to use
and tested to ensure that they are in proper working order before relying on them in a
confined space entry situation.
After the conclusion of the safety meeting, work may proceed in accordance with permit
requirements.
4.6 Records
Records generated from the routine implementation of this procedure shall be routed to
the Records Clerk and retained in accordance with GG-05, “Records Management.”
Records include:
 confined space lists and marked-up facility layout drawings;

 training session/permit review meeting attendance sheets and any distributed
handout materials; and
 copies of all completed Confined Space Assessment/Entry Permit forms.
5.0 REFERENCES
 GGI ESMS Plan

 GG-06, “ESMS Safety Training Program”
Risks”
 GG-22, “Fire Prevention Program”
1
NOTE: It is imperative to recognize that oxygen detectors, hydrogen sulfide detectors, and
carbon monoxide detectors - all of which are used to evaluate atmospheres that are potentially
immediately dangerous to life and health - have a finite shelf-life of approximately one year

Figure 1: Confined Space Entry Process Flowchart
H&S Officer H&S Officer/

Area Supervisor
Identify Review proposed work
confined spaces assess non-confined
alternatives
H&S Officer Area Supervisor

Assign space H&S Mgr/Area Sup. Yes
designators, install Alternative? Pursue alternative
warning signs
No
H&S Officer EHS Coordinators
Prepare confined space Review assessment
assessment for each and proposed work,
identified space prepare permit
H&S Officer H&S Officer/

Train workforce in Area Supervisor
GG-21 contents
Review permit conditions
per GG-06
assemble PPE and
other equipment & staff
necessary for permit
compliance
Area Supervisor
Advise of need
to enter confined H&S Officer
workspace
Review permit
conditions with workers,
Trained Worker
Records Clerk
Enter space,
complete required File records
work per permit per SOP-11
requirements

Figure 2: Confined Space Warning Sign
DANGER!
CONFINED SPACE
# [insert designator]
PERMIT REQUIRED FOR ENTRY

Figure 3: Confined Space Assessment/Entry Permit Form
GGI – Aurora Project

Confined Space Assessment/Entry Permit
Assessment
Confined Space Designator: Location:
Descriptions of inherent hazards:
Pre-entry Atmosphere Monitoring/Ventilation/Purging Requirements:
Attendant Requirements:
PPE Requirements:
Lockout/Tag-out Requirements:
Other Hazard Mitigation/Control Procedures:
Prepared by: Approved By: Date:
Comments:

P2 of 2
GGI – Aurora Project
Confined Space Assessment/Entry Permit
Entry Permit
Date of Entry: Proposed Duration of Work:
Requirements (describe) Responsible Employee
Ingress/egress point:
Confined space entry attendant:
Hot work permit:
Communication methods:
Atmosphere testing/monitoring (include equipment

description):
Secure gas cylinders and lines:
Removal of toxic/flammable wastes or residues:
Ventilation or supplied air/SCBA:
PPE:
Lighting:
Electrical grounding:
Lockout/tag-out:
Emergency preparedness and rescue procedures:
Prepared by: Approved by:

GG-22: Fire Prevention Program

preventing injury and loss due to fire at Guyana Goldfields, Inc. (GGI) Aurora Project
facilities. This SOP will apply over the life of the Project; it supports Section 4.3.2
specified therein.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Fire Brigade
A fire brigade is an organized group of employees who may have other responsibilities
but have been trained in fire-fighting operations, commensurate with the needs of the
Aurora Project and assessment of site-specific fire hazards.
2.2 Hot Work
Hot work refers to any activity that has the potential to produce electric arcs, open
flames, hot particles or sparks, or other potential ignition sources. Hot work includes
welding, arc or torch cutting, brazing, heating, or metal grinding.
2.3 Incipient Fire
An incipient fire is a fire in its initial or early stage that can be readily controlled or
extinguished without placing the responder at risk of injury by using portable fire
extinguishers or small-diameter water hoses, without the need for protective clothing,
breathing apparatus, or high-pressure fire hoses.

The Procurement Manager is responsible for ensuring that NFPA 122 or equivalent
standards are incorporated in the procurement contracts for design and construction
services for Aurora Project facilities.

 performing a fire risk assessment for each Aurora Project facility in keeping with
GG-09 “Identification of Project-related Safety Hazards, and Assessment of
Risks” and NFPA 122, Annex B, “Fire Risk Assessment”;
 working with the Environmental Manager and Aurora Project Manager to ensure
that fire extinguishers and appropriate fire suppression or sprinkler systems are
installed in major facilities, and supplied with a reliable source of fire-fighting
water in all seasonal conditions;
 preparing area-specific Fire Plans for Buckhall, Aurora Base, Tapir Crossing,
other semi-permanent camps, and other major constructed facilities, and for
ensuring that such plans are regularly tested in fire drills, updated as necessary
in response to facility changes, and implemented in the event of an actual fire;
 appointing and providing appropriate training for fire wardens and appropriately
staffed fire brigades at Buckhall, Aurora Base, other semi-permanent camp ;
 ensuring that fire brigades are properly equipped, and that fire-fighting equipment
is operational and properly maintained;
 ensuring that all employees are trained in fire prevention and incipient stage fire
suppression, and are familiar with appropriate fire reporting/alarm procedures;
 ensuring that portable fire extinguishers appropriate for the types of fires most
likely to be encountered are available and properly maintained in every Aurora
Project vehicle, and at permanent, well- marked locations in each major location;
 ensuring that flammable, combustible, and/or explosive materials are properly

handled and stored as noted in GG-14, “Handling and Storage of Hazardous
Materials”;
 ensuring that fire hazard assessments are performed as part of periodic safety
inspections; and
 ensuring that smoking is prohibited in all fire hazard areas.
3.3 Camp Managers, Area Supervisors, and Construction Manager
GGI Camp Managers, Area Supervisors, and the Construction Manager have ultimate
responsibility for ensuring that the facilities and work areas under their supervision are

kept free of recognized fire hazards and for ensuring that employees are trained to
address the fire prevention needs described by this SOP.
3.4 Mechanical Shop Staff
Nearly one out of four industrial fires are of electrical origin, and one out of ten are due to
mechanical failure such as overheated bearings or friction from jammed or broken
machinery. Mechanical shop and other maintenance staff therefore have the opportunity
to identify and take action to eliminate or mitigate potential fire hazards associated with
mechanical equipment and processes. Mechanical shop staff are responsible for
remaining alert for unsafe conditions, for maintaining equipment in good working order,
and for reporting all potential fire hazards to the Health and Safety Officer for
investigation and appropriate preventive and corrective action (see GG-04, “Identification
of Non-conformances and Corrective/Preventive Action”).
3.5 All GGI Employees
It is the responsibility of all Aurora Project employees to:
 observe “NO SMOKING” signs;
 ensure that no open fire, open flames, or other sources of ignition are used or
allowed where they may pose a risk of fire;
 understand fire alarm procedures and take action to sound the alarm and report
any fire that cannot be controlled in the incipient stage;
 take immediate action to suppress any incipient fire, if it is safe to do so;
 take immediate action to move (and move others) to safety in the event of a fire;
 immediately correct or report spills of fuels (see GG-17, Vehicle Fuelling and Spill
Prevention” or other recognized fire hazards (see GG-24, “Recognition and
Reporting of Safety Hazards”);
 observe good housekeeping practices and keep work areas free of combustible
debris, spill clean-up residue, or other fire hazards;
 remain aware of potential fire hazards and immediately correct or report

recognized hazards to fire wardens, fire brigade members, or the Health and
Safety Officer in accordance with GG-24.

3.6 Fire Warden
Fire wardens will be designated for each major facility by the Health and Safety Officer
(in consultation with the Environmental Manager and Camp Managers) and assigned
responsibility for ensuring that the currently approved Fire Plan is properly implemented
when the fire alarm is sounded or when a fire is observed.
4.0 PROCEDURE
The overall process for establishing and maintaining the fire protection program at the
Aurora Project is presented in the following paragraphs and summarized as a flowchart
in Figure 1.
4.1 Fire Risk Assessments
The Health and Safety Officer is responsible for performing a fire risk assessment in
accordance with GG-09, “Identification of Project-related Safety Hazards, and
Assessment of Risks” and NFPA 122, Annex B, “Fire Risk Assessment” for all Aurora
Project facilities. The risk assessment shall include consideration of facility-specific
design, installation, condition, and configuration of mechanical, electrical, and fire
suppression systems, as well as potential operational issues such as storage and
handling of flammable liquids, backup generator systems, and general housekeeping.
The Health and Safety Officer may seek the assistance of a fire safety engineer or other
individuals with special skills in fire protection in order to identify potential fire hazards
and determine the adequacy of fire detection and fire suppression systems. The latter
may include portable fire extinguishers, hand-held fire hose systems, exterior fire
hydrants, fixed sprinklers or deluge systems, and other appropriate devices. Where
facility-specific fire suppression needs are indicated, the risk assessment shall include
an evaluation of the water capacity and availability requirements for fire-fighting
purposes, including hose and sprinkler systems, for a minimum duration of 2 hours.
The risk assessment shall identify potential fire and explosion hazards, assess the
consequences of loss (risk), prioritize the need for corrective actions, and serve as the
basis for confirming the adequacy of existing controls or selecting appropriate
improvements. Measures to reduce risk shall emphasize control of ignition sources,
reducing exposure of combustible materials to ignition sources, and rapid and effective
control or suppression of fire. Risk assessment results shall be forwarded to designated
fire wardens for use in planning periodic inspections (see Section 4.6).
4.2 Fire Plans
The Health and Safety Officer, with the assistance of the designated fire wardens, will
develop a Fire Plan for the each major Aurora Project facility that considers the relevant

findings of the risk assessment and provides specific directions for responding to a
facility fire. Each facility Fire Plan shall, as appropriate:
 list major workplace fire hazards (see GG-09, “Identification of Project-related

Safety Hazards, and Assessment of Risks”);
 describe how to recognize and activate fire alarm actuators and/or audible
emergency evacuation signals;
 emphasize that the responsible fire warden and fire brigade must be called
immediately if any fire occurs, irrespective of the size of the fire;
 identify specific control points and general instructions for emergency electrical
system and process equipment shutdown;
 identify facility evacuation plans, evacuee assembly points, and evacuee roll-call
and reporting requirements;
 identify the location of all portable fire extinguishers, hose reels, fire hydrants,
and all permanently plumbed fire suppression/sprinkler systems, and provide
general instructions for their use;
 summarize specific fire response/fire-fighting procedures and suppression

options that are applicable to specific facility areas;
 address contingency actions to be taken if fires cannot be readily controlled

without putting fire-fighting personnel in unacceptably dangerous situations;
 identify the Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) requirements for firefighters for
specific facility areas (see GG-11, “Personal Protective Equipment”;
 address potential environmental issues associated with firefighting, including the

control of fire-fighting run-off water.
Fire Plans shall also provide names and contact numbers for proposed fire wardens and
fire brigade members for each affected facility, as well as the Aurora Project Manager,
the Environmental Manager, and all required regulatory agency or stakeholder contacts.
Fire warden and fire brigade responsibilities shall be assigned to staff who are willing
and physically able to assume these additional duties.
Draft Fire Plans shall be distributed to the Environmental Manager for review and
approval. Comments shall be resolved prior to release to the Records Clerk for
controlled distribution in accordance with GG-07, “Distribution and Control of ESMS
Documents.”

The Health and Safety Officer and Environmental Manager shall contact the
Procurement Manager and initiate any required procurements to fulfill the PPE and fire-
fighting equipment requirements established by approved Fire Plans. The Health and
Safety Officer shall also issue hard hat decals (see Figure 3) to the fire wardens and fire
brigade members listed in approved Fire Plans after they complete the training
described in Section 4.4, in order that they may be readily identified by the workforce in
the event of a fire emergency.
4.3 Training
All Aurora Project staff shall receive training in fire prevention program requirements,
commensurate with their responsibilities. Training methodology and documentation
requirements shall be in accordance with GG-06, “ESMS Training Program.”
At a minimum, employee training shall explain or emphasize:
 the requirements of area-specific Fire Plans;
 general smoking policies, especially restrictions on smoking within 20 meters of

combustible or flammable materials;
 Controls on welding and cutting activities, as noted in GG-19, “Welding and

Cutting Safety”;
 potential fire hazards, their recognition, and reporting procedures;
 safe work practices appropriate to assigned duties;
 different types of fires and appropriate use of fire extinguishers and fire
suppression systems; and
 fire alarm recognition, emergency evacuation procedures, and other fire-safety

considerations.
Additional training requirements for fire wardens and fire brigade members are
summarized in Table 1.

Table 1: Minimum Fire Protection Program Training Requirements for Fire
Wardens and Fire Brigade Members
Personnel Training Scope Methods Frequency
Fire wardens and  GG-22 contents Classroom training conducted Within 30 days of
all fire brigade  Contents of applicable by Health and Safety Officer or appointment,
members approved Fire Plans designee; includes hands-on annually thereafter
identified in  GG-28, “Emergency training in assigned PPE per
approved Fire Response Process- GG-11, “Personal Protective
Plans Exploration/Early Works Equipment”
Construction Phase Activities
 GG-14, “Handling and
Storage of Hazardous
Materials”
 GG-19, “Welding and Cutting
Safety
Fire brigade  All of the above plus specific Classroom training conducted As above for fire
members training in interior structural by Health and Safety Officer or wardens, plus
assigned to firefighting, including designee; includes hands-on active participation
perform interior inspection, maintenance, and training in assigned PPE per as responders in
structural fire use of SCBA equipment GG-11, “Personal Protective biannual fire drills
fighting Equipment”
4.4 Routine Inspections
The fire wardens and/or designated fire brigade members shall inspect their assigned
work areas on at least a quarterly basis for the following:
 no open fires and no smoking except in designated areas;
 all fire exit doors can be easily and immediately opened from the inside without
use of a key;
 no obstructions, apparent defects, or damage exist to fire detection or alarm

activation equipment;
 fire-fighting equipment is available, in good working order, and unobstructed and

in place;

 the minimum practices of the following SOPs are being followed: GG-17, “Vehicle
Fuelling and Spill Prevention”; GG-19, “Welding and Cutting Safety; and GG-20,
“Electrical Safety”;
 good housekeeping practices are being followed, with emphasis on ensuring that
combustible materials are not left near potential ignition sources;
 flammable or combustible materials are properly stored in accordance with GG-

14, “Handling and Storage of Hazardous Materials”;
 adequate facilities are provided for the disposal of smoking materials; and
 rubbish and waste is properly contained or removed.
In addition, fire extinguishers shall be inspected at least quarterly to verify that they are
in their proper position and have not been discharged, lost pressure, or suffered obvious
damage. Any observed non-conformances shall be documented on Corrective/
Preventive Action Request (CPAR) forms and investigated and resolved as described in
GG-04, “Identification of Non-conformances and Corrective/Preventive Action.”
4.5 Fire Drills
It is essential that all Aurora Project employees be familiar with evacuation routes and
procedures to follow in the event of a fire emergency. The fire wardens/fire brigades will
therefore conduct fire drill exercises (i.e., evacuation of premises) in each major facility
at least annually. Results shall be documented and presented to the Health and Safety
Officer for evaluation; affected Fire Plans shall be updated at the Health and Safety
Officer’s direction, and additional training scheduled as appropriate.
4.6 Records
accordance with GG-05, “Records Management” and include:
 copies of all area-specific Fire Plans;
 copies of all training session attendance sheets and any distributed handout
materials;
 closed CPARs generated from site inspections; and
 reports documenting the results of annual fire drills.

5.0 REFERENCES
 GGI ESMS Plan

 GG-06, “ESMS Training Program
Risks”
 GG-14, “Handling and Storage of Hazardous Materials”
 GG-17, “Vehicle Fuelling and Spill Prevention”
 National Fire Protection Association Standard NFPA 122, “Standard for Fire
Prevention and Control in Metal/Nonmetal Mining and Metal Mineral Processing
Facilities”; United States National Fire Protection Association, Quincy,
Massachusetts, 2010

Figure 1: Fire Prevention Program Development and Implementation Process
H&S Officer/Fire Wardens H&S Officer/Fire Wardens Fire Wardens No

Prepare Fire Plans CPARs required?
Resolve comments
for Project
facilities
Yes
H&S Officer
No Env. Mgr. Resolve CPARs per

Accept? GG-04
Yes
Fire Wardens/Brigades
Records Clerk
Conduct periodic fire
Distribute Fire Plans drills, evaluate results,
per GG-07 present to H&S Officer
Procurement Mgrs. H&S Officer

No
Purchase and deploy Update Fire Plan?
fire equipment/vehicles
per approved Fire Plans
Yes
H&S Officer
H&S Officer
Update affected Fire Plans
Appoint Fire Wardens/
Fire Brigade members
Env. Mgr.
H&S Officer Yes
Accept?
Train all staff per
GG-06
No
H&S Officer
Fire Wardens/Brigades Resolve comments
Conduct routine
weekly inspections
Records Clerk
Redistribute Fire Plans

per GG-07
H&S Officer
Re-train affected
staff per GG-06
Records Clerk
File records
per GG-05

Figure 3: Fire Warden/Fire Brigade Member
Hard Hat Identification Decals
FIRE BRIGADE
FIRE WARDEN

GG-23: Operational Safety Meetings

This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) establishes minimum requirements for establishing
and maintaining an active, effective Safety Committee and for conducting different types of
safety meetings at the Guyana Goldfields, Inc. (GGI) Aurora Project. It will apply over the life of
the Project; it supports Section 5.2 of the GGI Environmental and Social Management System
Plan (ESMS Plan), the Project Occupational Health and Safety/Accident Prevention Plan, and
other GGI Management Plans and SOPs when specified therein.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Safety Meeting
A safety meeting is defined as a scheduled meeting of available employees at a specific work

location, convened by the Health and Safety Officer or other management representatives, in
order to share important safety information, discuss safety issues, or provide safety training.
2.2 “Toolbox” Safety Meeting
A “toolbox” safety meeting is a less formal gathering of an individual work group, shift crew,
or team. “Toolbox” safety meetings are usually conducted at the work site and are convened
under the direction of a supervisor to encourage safety awareness, review specific safety-
related procedures, answer safety questions, resolve safety problems, or provide safety training
relevant to the work to be performed.
The Health and Safety Officer is responsible for collaborating with the Camp Manager and
Construction Manager in establishing an effective employee Safety Committee for the Aurora
Project. The Health and Safety Officer is also responsible for ensuring that line supervisors and

GGI staff participate in regular “toolbox” safety meetings and other special meetings that may be
convened to discuss specific issues.
3.2 Safety Committee
The Aurora Project Safety Committee is responsible for:
 providing a safe, dependable forum for regular, two-way communications between GGI
management and the workforce in order to address specific OHS issues and
requirements;
 evaluating any identified OHS issues or reported non-conformances, and effectively

resolving those issues and correcting the unsafe or unhealthy conditions or practices
that may have been identified;
 reviewing all work-related accidents, injuries, and/or illnesses, including identification of

the cause(s) and the actions necessary to correct the situation and/or prevent
recurrence; and
 Identifying any weaknesses in the Aurora Project OHS program, and for providing
recommendations for improvement.
3.3 Area Managers
Area Managers are responsible for promoting and supporting Safety Committee activities and
for conducting “toolbox” safety meetings with their assigned crew at least once a week. Where
specific work activities do not readily offer a topic for a toolbox safety meeting, the supervisor
shall discuss other safety issues of more general interest (see Attachment 1 for potential
topics) or consult with the Health and Safety Officer.
3.4 GGI Staff Members
GGI staff members shall:
 participate as Safety Committee members, when so requested;
 bring any observed workplace hazards or other OHS questions or concerns to the
immediate attention of their supervisor or the Health and Safety Officer;
 participate in all required safety meetings and training sessions; and
 perform all work in a safe manner, in accordance with the training received.

4.0 PROCEDURE
The overall process for establishing a Safety Committee and for conducting safety meetings is
described in the following sections and summarized as a flowchart in Figure 1.
4.1 Safety Committee
The Health and Safety Officer shall work with the Camp Managers and the Construction
Manager to establish an Aurora Project Safety Committee, with participants selected on a
rotating basis. The Safety Committee should attempt to fairly represent all of the individual work
units or crews working at each major Project work area. Committee members shall be
appointed for a term of one year. There are no limits to the number of terms a member may
serve. One committee member will be elected chairperson.
4.2 Safety Committee Meetings
The Safety Committee may determine the frequency of its meetings, but should meet a
minimum of once every three months. The chairperson may call a meeting of the Safety
Committee any time, as circumstances demand. With the exception of the elected
chairperson’s role in being in charge of the meeting, all members have equal status and are
expected to be mutually respectful of one another’s’ opinions and concerns
The Safety Committee shall elect a secretary for a term of one year. Minutes should be written
accurately, concisely, and objectively, as soon as possible after the meeting has adjourned.
Specific issues should be discussed as well as the action taken. Both the secretary and the
chairperson should review the final safety meeting minutes for accuracy, and final versions
should be posted on the Camp bulletin boards.
4.3 “Toolbox” Safety Meetings
The purpose of a “toolbox” safety meeting is to convey specific information relevant to an

immediate task at hand, or to provide general information that can be applied to everyday
activities. Regardless of the specific topics discussed, the intent should always be to reinforce
both the worker’s understanding of management’s commitment to safety and the worker’s own
safety awareness.
The Health and Safety Officer and Area Managers will hold toolbox safety meetings at least
monthly and at the start of any significant new task or operation. In the latter case, the affected
Area Manager and the Health and Safety Officer should assemble the work crew involved, and
discuss the nature of the operation, proper work procedures, known or potential hazards (see
GG-09, “Identification of Project-related Safety Hazards and Assessment of Risks”), appropriate
methods to control the identified hazards, and proper use of any required personal protective
equipment (PPE; see GG-11 “Personal Protective Equipment”). A toolbox safety meeting
should be held any time that changing conditions warrant a change in safe work practices or
PPE requirements.
In the event that work activities do not offer a ready topic for a Safety Committee meeting, the
supervisor shall discuss other general safety issues in order to help maintain safety awareness
on the part of the workforce. There are many possible topics that are appropriate for toolbox
discussions; several examples are provided for information in Attachment 1.
4.4 Records
Records include minutes of all safety meetings, which shall be forwarded to the designated
Records Clerk for filing in accordance with GG-05, “Records Management.”
5.0 REFERENCES
 GGI ESMS Plan

 GG-09, “Identification of Project-related Safety Hazards and Assessment of Risks”

Figure 1: Operational Safety Meeting Process
H&S Mgr./Camp Mgr./

Area Managers
Assign safety committee
members on rotating basis
Safety Committee Chair

Conduct quarterly safety
meetings; forward minutes
to H&S Mgr. and post
H&S Mgr/Area Supervisors

Conduct periodfic “toolbox”
meetings; forward minutes
to H&S Mgr. and post
Records Clerk
File records
per GG-05

Attachment 1:
Suggested Topics for Periodic “Toolbox” Safety Meetings
1. Safety – Whose Responsibility Is It?

 Top Management?
 The Health and Safety Officer?
 The Safety Committee?
 Crew supervisors/foremen?
 Every employee!
2. Common Unsafe Acts and Unsafe Conditions
Unsafe Acts Unsafe Conditions
 Removing machinery guards  Lack of proper machinery guards
 Failure to adequately secure or tie-  Unexpected vehicle movement due to poorly

down materials secured loads, un-chocked wheels, or
improper rigging
 Failure to use signals or warnings as  Poor housekeeping

required
 Using defective tools or equipment  Lack of proper warning systems
 Unauthorized use or operation of  Protruding nails, wires, or rebar

equipment
 Using tools or equipment improperly  Improper placement or storage of materials
 Servicing energized/operating  Hazardous tools, equipment, or materials

equipment
 Riding on vehicles or equipment not  Cluttered aisles or passageways, inadequate
designed for passengers clearance
 Failure to wear or use appropriate  Inadequate lighting, excessive noise

personal protective equipment (PPE)
 Standing in an unsafe place  Improper attire/loose clothing
 Not paying attention to work  Hazardous atmospheres, or confined spaces

environment with low oxygen content

3. Why Accidents Occur
Reasons Employees Commit Reasons Unsafe Conditions Exist

Unsafe Acts
 Insufficient motivation to work safely  Failure to identify/recognize unsafe

conditions (don’t know, don’t care)
 Too much motivation to cut corners (in  Failure to report unsafe conditions
a hurry, behind schedule, over budget) (afraid or don’t care)
 Lack of knowledge (how to do it right)  Failure to correct unsafe conditions

or proper skills (ability to do it right) (don’t care, too much trouble, too
expensive)
 Poor workplace attitude (don’t care)
 Reduced mental or physical abilities

due to fatigue or illness
4. EVERYONE CAN PREVENT ACCIDENTS!
 Be sure that you know the correct (safe) way to do your job, and then do it!
 Recognize that you are more likely to be involved in a serious accident:

- When you are working with sources of high energy – such as moving or rotating
machinery, high voltage, hot materials, high-pressure compressed air, or flammable or
explosive materials;
- When you are working with hazardous or toxic materials;
- When you are in a hurry or under stress; or
- When you are performing an unusual, unplanned procedure such as emergency
maintenance or repair.
 Think about what you are doing, and think about doing it safely.
 Maintain safe working conditions for yourself and your co-workers.

5. Common Worksite Hazards – “The Big Four”
 Slips, trips, and falls

 Being struck by a falling or suspended object
 Being caught “in, in between, or under” moving machinery
 Electricity
6. Recognizing and Reporting Unsafe Conditions
 Recognizing and reporting unsafe conditions is EVERYONE’S responsibility!
 Report unsafe conditions immediately to your supervisor, or the Health and Safety
Officer, or any Safety Committee member, or to any Manager. If possible to do so
without endangering yourself or others, correct the unsafe condition yourself
immediately. If the situation constitutes an emergency, follow the guidance of the
Project Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan.
 Follow up! Report the condition again if it is not corrected.
7. Housekeeping
Poor housekeeping can result in:

 Minor injuries such as cuts, puncture wounds, slivers;
 Serious injuries/accidents such as slips, trips, falls, striking or being struck by an object,
and fires; and/or
 Decrease in job productivity by slowing the actions of workers, access to equipment, and
movement of materials.
Employees should observe the following housekeeping rules:

 Keep scrap lumber with protruding nails separate from other debris;
 Bend protruding nails over or remove from scrap lumber;
 Keep all waste and debris in neat piles and away from the immediate work area;
 Remove debris from the site on a regular basis;
 Keep aisles, stairways, and walkways clear;
 Store materials properly in their designated area;
 Keep tools and equipment stored neatly; and
 Keep extension cords and hoses from spanning walkways.

8. Near-Misses/Close calls
 A “near-miss” is a potentially deadly accident without any negative outcome. The

workforce must understand that sooner or later, if the situation that resulted in the near-
miss once is allowed to continue, it will eventually have a deadly outcome.
 Near-misses are a warning that something is wrong; they must be documented as a

nonconformance and resolved in accordance with GG-04, “Identification of Non-
conformances and Corrective/Preventive Action”
 Don’t be thankful that nothing bad happened and then move on. Be thankful for the
warning! Always report a near-miss and take immediate action to prevent any
recurrence.
 If you did not cause the near-miss or were not even involved in a near-miss but saw it,
discuss it with those involved and your supervisor. Do not “let it go” until you are certain
that the problem has been recognized. You may be saving someone’s life – maybe your
own.
 Obey safety rules and always “think before you act.”
9. Worksite Safety Inspection
Supervisors may direct employees to perform brief self-inspection of a work area, drawing upon
the information provided in previous “toolbox” safety meetings; results are then discussed with
affected employees. Issues may include housekeeping, identified hazards, good points, bad
points, recent near-misses, or other incidents or problems. Supervisors may use the
opportunity to review relevant safety issues such as PPE requirements and emergency
procedures, and to remind employees that safety performance is a key part of their overall job
performance.
10. Other potential topics for toolbox safety meetings:
 First aid (see GG-12, “First Aid and Emergency Medical Response);
 vehicle operations;
 signalling techniques;
 use of spotters;
 traffic control;
 barricades and warning devices;
 heat stress;
 PPE/use of respirators;
 material handling;

 material storage;
 tool use and care;
 slips, trips, and falls;
 machinery hazards;
 electrical hazards;
 fire protection;
 fire extinguishers;
 refuelling vehicles; and
 handling gasoline and diesel fuel.

GG-24: Recognition and Reporting of Safety Hazards


recognizing and reporting potential safety hazards associated with any aspect or facility
location associated with the Guyana Gold Inc. (GGI) Aurora Project. This SOP does not
address the reporting of accidents or near-misses, which are considered serious non-
conformances and are reported and resolved in accordance with GG-04, “Identification
of Non-conformances and Corrective/Preventive Action.”
specified therein.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Accidents and Near-misses
An accident is an unintended mishap that results in harm to a human being or damage

to equipment or property. A near-miss is an unintended situation that did not result, but
could have easily resulted, in an accident. Both situations are unacceptable, are
contrary to GGI policy, and require evaluation and appropriate corrective and preventive
action to reduce the likelihood of recurrence.
2.2 Hazard
A hazard is a condition or circumstance that makes an accident more likely and/or more
severe.
3.1 Upper Management
GGI’s upper management has ultimate responsibility for safety at the Aurora Project,
and shall ensure that employees receive training that enables them to recognize unsafe

conditions. Perhaps more importantly, upper management is responsible for
establishing a working environment in which employees are confident that reporting
recognized safety hazards to management is both appropriate and expected behaviour.
The Health and Safety Officer is responsible to the Environmental Manager and the
affected Camp Managers for:
 ensuring that all employees receive sufficient health and safety training to enable
them to recognize and properly report potential safety hazards;
 ensuring that all employees understand the nature of their safety hazard
recognition and reporting responsibilities, and are confident that they have the
authority to take appropriate immediate action when called for;
 ensuring that all employees are aware of the health and safety communication
procedures established for the Project;
 participating in employee health and safety committee meetings; and
 participating in corrective and preventive action processes, as described by this

procedure.
It is the responsibility of Area Supervisors (e.g., geotechnical, mechanical, or stores

supervisors) to be alert for potential hazards and to either correct them on the spot, if
correction can be accomplished without endangerment, or initiate corrective and
preventive action processes, as described by this procedure and GG-04, “Identification
of Non-conformances and Corrective/Preventive Action.” Area Supervisors shall also
collaborate with the Health and safety Officer and conduct periodic “toolbox” safety
meetings (see GG-23, “Operational Safety Meetings”) to provide an opportunity for the
discussion of perceived hazards, along with potential solutions and the status of any
pending corrective/preventive actions.
3.4 All Employees
The unsafe action(s) of one employee may result in injuries not only to themselves, but
also to other workers or visitors. It is therefore the responsibility of every Aurora Project
employee to be mindful of surrounding activities, and to never overlook unsafe acts by a
co-worker. Aurora Project employees are expected to be alert to hazards that may
injure or harm themselves or others, and to the extent that they are authorized to do so,
to correct the hazard immediately. Any unsafe condition that the employee is not

authorized to correct shall be immediately reported to the responsible Area Supervisor,
Camp Manager, or the Health and Safety Officer.
.
4.0 PROCEDURE
The overall process for recognizing and reporting safety hazards is described in the
following sections and summarized as a flowchart in Figure 1.
4.1 Training
Training is essential to provide employees with sufficient knowledge to recognize unsafe

conditions and work practices, and to be confident in their ability to do so. Training plays
an even more important role in forming workers’ attitudes toward safety. Training that
conveys not only knowledge, but also management’s determined commitment to safety.
It is an important method for influencing employees’ attitudes and behaviour, and is a
key element in any effort to manage hazards in the workplace.
The Health and Safety Officer shall provide hazard recognition training to Area
Managers, Area Supervisors, and all affected staff. The goal of such training is to
ensure that all employees:
 recognize and accept a personal role in preventing accidents involving

themselves or their co-workers;
 understand the general properties and specific health and safety hazards of any
materials stored, handled, or used in the affected work area, and the proper and
safe way to handle such materials;
 understand the physical and general workplace hazards associated with their
assigned work areas;
 understand the nature of any unsafe conditions in their work area that require
special procedures, functional machine guards (see GG-18, “Machine Guards
and Safety Barriers”), or personal protective equipment (PPE; see GG-11
“Personal Protective Equipment”);
 recognize significant deviations from established safe conditions or proscribed

work practices; this could include improper use of PPE, missing PPE, reckless
driving, failure to lock or tag out machinery under repair, working in confined
spaces without proper controls, failure to chock vehicle wheels, or possession of
firearms or alcohol); and
 recognize a duty to immediately correct any such deviations personally, where

authorized to do so and such corrections can be made without risking
endangerment, or to report the situation to the affected Area Supervisor, Camp
Manager, and/or Health and Safety Officer.
The responsible Area Supervisors and the Health and Safety Officer are ultimately
responsible for maintaining safe working conditions and safe work practices and are key
contact points in the process of hazard recognition and reporting. They should
continuously examine the work area for existing or worsening unsafe conditions, and
routinely observe the actions of employees with particular emphasis on inexperienced
employees, employees involved in previous accidents, and chronically unsafe workers.
The training provided should empower employees to personally correct minor hazards
on a routine basis, but also to recognize unsafe conditions that most employees are not
authorized to correct or that cannot be completely resolved in a safe manner. The latter
conditions must be immediately reported to the Area Supervisor and Health and Safety
Officer as discussed in Section 4.2.
4.2 Hazard Reporting and Corrective /Preventative Action
Whenever an employee identifies a hazard that poses an immediate risk of serious injury
or loss, the employee shall discontinue any activity that could contribute to the severity
of the hazard, take immediate action to prevent access to the hazardous situation or
area, and notify the affected Area Supervisor and the Health and Safety Officer. The
Area Supervisor and the Health and Safety Officer shall assess the situation and either
immediately correct the unsafe condition, or initiate a Corrective /Preventive Action
Request (CPAR) in accordance with GG-04, “Identification of Non-conformances and
Corrective/Preventive Action.”
Where a potentially significant risk is noticed, the affected Area Supervisor and Health
and Safety Officer shall take immediate action to reduce the risk to an acceptable level,
or immediately stop the risky activity operation. In either case, CPARs shall be initiated
for a systematic evaluation of how to determine the cause of the situation and how to
prevent similar situations in the future.
Otherwise, recognized hazards shall be reported as follows:
 Any hazard beyond a minor housekeeping issue, even if it can be corrected on

the spot without incurring personal endangerment, or is beyond the ability of the
employee to correct, shall be reported to the Health and Safety Officer and
Safety Committee using the form provided in Figure 2.
 The Health and Safety Officer shall evaluate the hazard and determine whether
or not CPAR action will be required. If a CPAR is required, the situation shall be
thoroughly investigated and resolved as noted in GG-04. If not, the Health and
Safety Officer shall correct or stabilize the situation as required. In both cases,
the originator shall be advised of the final resolution of the hazard report, and the

issue shall be discussed in the next available “toolbox” safety meeting as noted
in GG-23, “Operational Safety Meetings.”
4.3 Records
Health and Safety Officers shall ensure that copies of “toolbox” meeting minutes,
completed Safety Hazard Report forms, and associate CPAR documentation are
forwarded to the Environmental Manager or designated Records Clerk for retention in
accordance with GG-05, “Records Management.”
5.0 REFERENCES
 GGI ESMS Plan

Risks”
 GG-18, “Machine Guards and Safety Barriers”
 GG-23, “Operational Safety Meetings”

Figure 1: Hazard Recognition, Reporting, and Corrective/
Preventive Action Process
H&S Officer
Train staff in hazard
recognition
Employee
Perceive
safety hazard
Employee No Employee No
Immediate Correct without
threat? danger?
Yes Yes
Employee Employee
Secure immediate Correct hazard, report
area, move to to Safety Committee,
safe location H&S Officer
Employee H&S Officer Employee

Report to Area
Report to
Supervisor or Evaluate hazard
H&S Officer
H&S Officer
AS/H&S Officer
H&S Officer No H&S Officer No
Correct without Correct/stabilize
CPAR required?
danger? condition as required
Yes Yes
Area Sup./H&S Officer Area Sup./H&S Officer
Correct/stabilize Initiate CPAR per

condition as required GG-04
H&S Officer
Advise originator,
discuss resolution
in “toolbox”
safety meetings
Records Clerk
File records per
GG-05

Figure 2: Safety Hazard Report Form
Aurora Project
Safety Hazard Report
Reported by: _____________________________________________ Date:____________
Job Title: _________________________________________________________________
Department:_______________________________________________________________
Location:_________________________________________________________________
Hazard Description: ________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________
Where is the hazard located? ________________________________________________
Has this been reported to your Area Supervisor? What action has been taken?
__________________________________________________________________________
The Safety Committee and area Health and Safety Officer will review your report, take
appropriate action, and advise you of the results.
Comments: __________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
GG-25: Chance Archaeological Finds

This Standard Operating Procedure’s (SOP) provides guidance on the actions that shall
be taken by Guyana Goldfields, Inc. (GGI) staff who may encounter relics or artefacts
with potential archaeological or cultural significance when conducting environmental
footprint surveys (see SOP GG-08, “Environmental Footprint Surveys”) or land clearance
activities at any Aurora Project sites. Environmental and Social Impact Assessment
(ESIA) studies1 indicate that although rare, some potential exists for certain types of
archaeological finds to be encountered in the Project area, particularly near Tapir
Crossing. The National Trust of Guyana (National Trust) has expressed an interest in
preserving Guyana’s historical heritage, and has requested to be notified if
archaeological deposits or potentially historic objects are discovered.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
An archaeological find is defined as the discovery of relics or human artefacts with

potential archaeological or historical significance that may be encountered in survey or
land clearance actions. Such finds could include human remains, especially in
association with artefacts or articles that indicate ritual burial; pottery or pottery shards;
stone tools or implements; or metal, glass, or ceramic objects that could date to the pre-
colonial or colonial era. Examples of potentially significant artifacts that could be found
in the Project area are depicted in Figure 2. Garbage or abandoned objects from past
decades of uncontrolled artisanal mining activities are generally not considered to have
historical significance unless there are clear indications (e.g., dated materials pre-1900,
glass or pottery shards, flintlock weapons) that could link the find to colonial or pre-
colonial times.
1
See “Technical Report Identifying the Potential Range of Cultural Resources with the Aurora
Gold Mining Project Area, Guyana” (Plew, 2012)

3.1 Project Staff
Project staff engaged in field work (e.g., surveying, road construction, drilling) shall
remain alert to the possibility of an archaeological find, shall not permit any further
disturbance to the area if a find is encountered, and shall report any potentially
significant observations to their supervisor and the Environmental Officer.
The Environmental Officer shall investigate all reported finds and mark the area of the
find with warning tape, record the GPS coordinates, take several descriptive
photographs, and forward the information to the Environmental Manager.
The Environmental Manager shall review the information provided by the Environmental
Officer on each find and determine [by physical examination at the field location, if
necessary and or by consultation of (Plew, 2012) or others recent archaeological
studies] if the find is sufficiently credible to notify the National Trust, and shall prepare a
memo summarizing the nature of the find. If, based on this evaluation the find is
determined not to meet the definition provided in Section 2.1, then the Environmental
Manager shall notify the affected areas supervisor or construction manager that the
protected area can be released.
3.4 Vice President (VP), Aurora Project
The VP, Aurora Project shall coordinate any necessary contacts and meetings with the
National Trust that relate to the discovery of a potentially significant archaeological find.
3.5 Area Supervisors/Construction Managers
Affected area supervisors or construction managers will enforce a 10 m setback for any
clearance or construction activities near any confirmed potential find while it is under
investigation.
4.0 PROCEDURE
The process to be used to manage the investigation and disposition of chance

archaeological finds is summarized in the following sections, and is depicted as a
flowchart in Figure 1.

4.1 Training of Project Staff
All Project staff with responsibilities that require working in undeveloped forest or land
areas shall be trained in the requirements of this procedure, in accordance with GG-05,
“ESMS Training Program.” At the completion of training, laminated copies of Figure 2
shall be provided to field team leaders as a ready reference for the identification of
several kinds of more significant artefacts.
4.2 Discovery and Protection of Potential Find
If Project staff engaged in field work (e.g., surveying, road construction, drilling) discover
a potential archaeological find, they shall cease land disturbance in the area of the find,
temporarily mark the location with flagging, and report their observations to their
supervisor and the Environmental Officer. The Environmental Officer shall examine the
find and delineate the area of the find with yellow plastic caution tape. The find shall be
photographed and the geological position system (GPS) coordinates recorded. The
Environmental Officer will also contact the affected area supervisor or construction
manager so that setbacks from the area under investigation can be properly established.
4.3 Confirmation of Potential Find
The Environmental Officer shall forward copies of the site photographs to the
Environmental Manager and discuss the observations made to date. The Environmental
Manager may, at his discretion, elect to visit the site and make a personal examination.
If the Environmental Manager determines that the find does not really meet the definition
of an archaeological find as noted in Section 2.1, the site may be released from any
further investigation, and the affected area supervisor or construction manager advised
accordingly. However, if the potential significance of the site is confirmed, the
Environmental Manager shall generate an Archaeological Find Report.
4.4 Archaeological Find Report
The Archaeological Find Report shall contain the following minimum information:
 Location (general description plus GPS coordinates;

 Staff member reporting the find, and date reported;
 Area supervisor/construction manager notified, and notification date;
 Physical description of artefacts or articles observed;
 Site photographs; and
 Environmental Manager’s signature and date
 Comment area (to document final action with National Trust)
4.5 Presentation of Find to National Trust
The Environmental Manager will present the Archaeological Find Report to the VP,
Aurora Project, who shall contact the appropriate National Trust representative and

arrange for one or meetings as necessary to review and discuss the find. These
meeting(s) should be attended by the VP, Aurora Project and Environmental Manager,
at a minimum. Options for further investigation and disposition of the find shall be
discussed, and the specific roles of GGI and the National Trust defined with respect to
the final disposition of the find. Meeting notes shall be retained and attached to the
Archaeological Find Report along with a summary of all required disposition actions
agreed upon with the National Trust.
4.6 Final Disposition
GGI will support the National Trust in the final disposition of the find as agreed upon in
the meetings described in Section 4.5. The Environmental Manager will send a final
memo to file documenting the completion of all required actions.
4.7 Records
Records required from the implementation of this procedure include all memos to file,
the final Archaeological Find Report and all meeting notes or correspondence from the
National Trust regarding disposition of the find. All records will be filed in accordance
with GG-05, “Records Management.”
5.0 REFERENCES

 GG-08, “Environmental Footprint Surveys”
 “Technical Report Identifying the Potential Range of Cultural Resources with the
Aurora Gold Mining Project Area, Guyana” (Plew, 2012)

Figure 1: Chance Archaeological Find Investigation and Disposition Process
Provide training in
GG-25 contents,
per GG-05
Project staff
Identify potential
chance archaeological find
Project Staff
Mark site of find, cease

land disturbance, notify
Supervisor and Env. Officer
Install protection tape,

record GPS,
take photos, contact
Evaluate find, visit

field site as required
H&S Officer/Risk Teams

Env. Manager
No
Advise area supervisor
Confirm or construction manager,
Find?
release hold on site,
memo to file
Yes
Prepare
Archaeological Find
Report, advise
Aurora Project Manager
VP, Aurora Project
Contact National Trust,

arrange for
meetings to discuss find
VP, Aurora Project,

Environmental Mgr.,
National Trust rep.
Discuss find,
develop disposition
plan; record decision on
Archaeological
Find Report
GGI Management Records Clerk
Assist Nat’l Trust

in disposition of find File records
as agreed upon; forward per GG-05
final memo to file

Figure 2: Examples of Potentially Significant Archaeological Artefacts
[source: (Plew, 2012)]
Projectile points Flake tools
Picks Stone axes

Plain pottery shards Decorated pottery shards
Grinding surfaces

GG-26: Safe Use of All-Terrain Vehicles

(Aurora Project Manager) (Environmental Manager)
operation of all-terrain vehicles at the Guyana Goldfields, Inc. (GGI) Aurora Project. This
SOP will apply over the life of the Project; it supports Section 4.3.2 (“Management of
Social and Environmental Impacts”) of the GGI Environmental and Social Management
System Plan (ESMS Plan), the Project Occupational Health and Safety/Accident
Prevention Plan, and other GGI Management Plans and SOPs when specified therein.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 All-Terrain Vehicle
All-terrain vehicles (ATVs) are small, lightweight, motorcycle-engine powered, petrol-

fueled, 4-wheel drive off-road vehicles, typically steered via handlebars and designed for
use by a single individual rider.
2.2 ATV Rider
The ATV rider is defined as worker with the experience and training that permit them to
be authorized to operate ATVs owned by GGI.
2.3 ATV Rider Training
ATV rider training is defined as completion of an approved ATV rider training course,
written examination, and a practical hands-on skills review by a qualified supervisor or
manager, as described in this SOP.
2.4 Vehicle Accident
A vehicle accident is an unplanned vehicular event that results in injury, death, vehicle
or property damage, trip interruption, or other loss.

The Aurora Project Procurement Manager is responsible for purchasing ATVs that
conform to international (and applicable national) automotive safety standards, with
appropriate options suitable for hard use in remote mining operations.
The Construction Manager is responsible for ensuring that all ATV riders are trained and
qualified in accordance with this procedure.
3.3 Chief Mechanic and Mechanical Shop personnel
The Chief Mechanic and assigned mechanics are responsible for ensuring that all ATVs
are maintained and serviced daily to ensure their continued safe operating condition.
3.4 ATV Rider
The ATV rider is responsible for successfully completing rider training as specified
herein. Operators shall complete pre-shift safety walk-around inspections of their
assigned ATVs, and report any problems to the Mechanical Shop for resolution. Riders
are also responsible for safely operating ATVs in strict accordance with the guidance
provided in Section 4.4.
4.0 PROCEDURES
4.1 Procurement of ATVs and Entry into Maintenance Tracking System
ATVs shall be purchased or leased that conform to international (and applicable

national) automotive standards. After receipt of each new vehicle, the Procurement
Manager or designee shall ensure that each ATV is provided a small first aid kit (sized to
permit storage under the rider’s seat) as well as an Aurora Project control number, which
shall be plainly marked on the vehicle. All ATVs shall be entered into the Aurora
Project’s maintenance tracking system.
4.2 Selection, Training, and Qualification of Riders
Area Managers shall nominate experienced personnel to serve as ATV riders. The
Construction Manager shall ensure that nominated ATV riders attend a training course
and pass a written examination based on the contents of this SOP and the ATV Rider
Course: Student Handbook (ATV Safety Institute, August 2010). The training course
shall also include the minimum requirements for safe operation described in Section 4.4.
Candidates shall also demonstrate their driving skills to a qualified supervisor or
manager designated by the Construction Manager. Successful rider candidates shall
receive a vehicle operator’s qualification card from the Construction Manager (see
Figure 2) to be carried with their Aurora Project identification at all times. Appropriate
Personal Protective Equipment (PPE; see GG-11, “Personal Protective Equipment”)
shall be issued to qualified riders, and will include an approved ATV helmet with face
shield and goggles, and leather boots.
GGI reserves the right to rescind an ATV rider’s vehicle operator’s qualification card in
the event of an at-fault accident or if unsafe behaviour is observed; see the GGI “Labour
Grievance Policy.”
4.3 Pre-Shift Maintenance and Safety Checks
The Mechanical Shop shall complete a daily safety and maintenance inspection of all
ATVs returned from the field, prior to releasing for any subsequent use; at a minimum,
the inspection must include the following:
 Check tires for proper inflation and cuts or gouges or excessive wear; damaged
or unacceptably worn tire should be replaced;
 Check for security of cotter pins on axle and wheel nuts;
 Check for broken fenders, headlights, or loose fasteners or parts, and make
repairs as necessary to ensure functionality, and ensure that brake levers and
clutch mechanisms function smoothly;
 Make sure that throttle mechanism works smoothly, and snaps closed with the
handlebar in any position;
 Check the functionality of the ignition and engine stop switch;
 Check that the vehicle seat is in good condition and that a first aid kit is stored
under the rider’s seat;
 Remove and examine air filter, and clean or replace as indicated;
 Check for fuel, transaxle, and engine oil leaks, and make repairs to seals or
bearings as indicated; and
 Check fuel and fluid levels, and top off before releasing for use (see GG-17
“Vehicle Fuelling and Spill Prevention”);

At a minimum, the operator must observe the following rules when operating a light
vehicle. These rules must be addressed in operator training and shall be implemented
in actual practice. Failure to follow these rules may result in revocation of the operator’s
qualification card or other appropriate action; see the GGI “Labour Grievance Policy.”
General Rules for the Safe Operation of Light Vehicles
 Only qualified operators are permitted to drive vehicles – NO EXCEPTIONS!
 Riders must wear their assigned PPE (approved ATV helmet with face shield
and goggles and leather boots; note that standard hard hats or unapproved
lightweight helmets are forbidden while riding an ATV). Riders will be required to
present their ATV helmet and qualification card in order to receive vehicle keys
from the Maintenance Shop.
 At the start of each shift, riders shall conduct a walk-around inspection prior to
leaving for the field, noting any leaks, loose or broken parts, or tire inflation
problems; any issues shall be referred to the Mechanics Shop for resolution.
 ATVs are typically designed for use by a single rider only; a maximum of two
passengers may be carried in an emergency situation, but the practice is
discouraged. Do not offer rides to hitchhikers or non-employees. If passengers
must be carried, the rider shall drive at a slower speed; passengers shall sit
immediately behind the driver and position their hands and legs so as not to
interfere with the safe operation and steering of the ATV; passenger hardhats
must be fitted with a chin strap so that they stay secured while riding.
 Speeding, other careless or reckless driving, or driving under the influence

of alcohol or drugs will not be tolerated and are grounds for immediate
dismissal; see the GGI “Labour Grievance Policy.”
 Obey all posted speed limits, and maintain a safe following distance (at least 3
vehicle lengths).
 Pedestrians and heavy equipment always have the right of way; ensure that eye-
contact is made with heavy equipment operators before passing.
 Under all conditions, operate the vehicle at a speed that will allow safe stopping;
reduce speed for wet and slippery road conditions; do not leave a running ATV
unattended.

 Immediately report all accidents involving GGI ATVs (and other accidents that
may be observed by GGI vehicle operators) to the Health and Safety Officer via
radio or cellular telephone, no matter how minor. If there are any injuries, follow
the procedures outlined in GG-12, “First Aid and Emergency Medical Response.
4.5 Records
session attendance sheets and any distributed hand-out materials (see GG-06, “ESMS
Training Program”
5.0 REFERENCES
 GGI ESMS Plan

 GGI Health and Safety/Accident Prevention Plan
 ATV Rider Course: Student Handbook (ATV Safety Institute, August 2010).

Figure 1: ATV Procurement, Operation, and Maintenance Process
Procurement Manager
Purchase ATVs
with required safety ratings
and accessories
Chief Mechanic
Enter vehicles into
maintenance tracking
system
Area Managers
Designate operator
candidates
Construction Manager
Train/qualify operators
per GG-06, ensure PPE
is issued per GG-11
Riders
Conduct pre-shift
walkaround, don PPE,
operate AV as trained
Riders
Riders Yes
Operational Advise Mechanical Shop
problem?
No
Mechanical Shop Mechanical Shop
Conduct post –field travel Conduct unscheduled
inspections and maintenance or repair
maintenance
Mechanical Shop
Update maintenance
tracking system
Records Clerk
File records
per GG-05

Figure 2: Vehicle Operator Qualification Card
(not to scale)

GG-27: Chainsaw Safety

This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) defines minimum requirements for chainsaw
safety that must be complied with by all chainsaw operators working for the Guyana
Goldfields, Inc. (GGI) Aurora Project. This SOP will apply over the life of the Project; it
Environmental and Social Management System Plan (ESMS Plan), the Project
Occupational Health and Safety/Accident Prevention Plan, and other GGI Management
Plans and SOPs when specified therein.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Chainsaw Kickback
Chainsaw kickback can cause severe injury or death, and occurs when a chainsaw
blade suddenly jams or catches, so that the momentum of the chain causes the blade to
spring back toward the operator. All chainsaws used on the Aurora Project must have a
chain brake that immediately stops the chain if kickback occurs.
3.1 Qualified Chainsaw Instructor
One or more experienced logging supervisors or experienced and chainsaw operators

will be selected by the Construction Manager, Environmental Manager, and Health and
Safety Officer to serve as instructors for periodic classroom training and supervised on-
the-job training (OJT) of all chainsaw operators.
3.2 Chainsaw Operators
Chainsaw operators are responsible for operating and maintaining chainsaws in strict
conformance with this SOP and the manufacturer’s recommendations for the make and
model of saw assigned for their use.
GG-27 1 Revision 1-
The Health and Safety Officer shall monitor compliance with this SOP by conducting
periodic inspections in accordance with SOP GG-03, “Field Inspections.”
.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 Chainsaw Hazards
Chainsaws have many intrinsically dangerous characteristics and are potentially the
source of very serious injuries and fatalities. Hazards include:
 Cuts, lacerations, or amputations caused by kickback or contact with a running

chainsaw blade;
 Impact injuries from felling trees, or from cutting tree limbs or snags;
 Slips, trips and falls caused by poor footing on rough, slippery, steep, or uneven
ground
 Burns caused by contact with hot motors,
 Forest or bush fires caused by careless fuelling of a saw with a hot motor, sparks
generated while cutting, or fuel spills; and
 Fuel spills caused by improper fuelling procedures or inadequate training.
It is therefore imperative that the key considerations for chainsaw safety outlined in this
SOP1 and applicable manufacturers’ instructions be strictly complied with. Failure to
comply with this SOP could have serious life safety consequences for individual
operators or their co-workers, and may result in disciplinary action, up to and including
termination; see the GGI “Labour Grievance Procedure.”
4.2 Procurement of Approved Chainsaws
The GGI Procurement Manager will be permitted to purchase only those makes and
models of chainsaws that meet widely recognized safety standards, such as CSA
Standard Z62.3-96 or ANSI Standard B175.1-1991. All chainsaws must be equipped
with the manufacturer’s approved user manual, and with a kickback-reducing device
such as a chain brake, a low kickback chain, or a reduced kickback bar that is designed
for the specific model of chainsaw.
1
The primary reference for these requirements is the Prospectors & Developers Association of Canada
(PDAC) “e3Plus: Excellence in Health and Safety e-toolkit (EHS)” Version-01, pages 98-102 (PDAC, 2009)

4.3 Operator Training Considerations
All chainsaw operators must be trained by qualified external consultants or one or more
experienced senior staff members designated by the Construction Manager and
Environmental Manager, in consultation with the Project Health and Safety Officer.
Training programs shall be specific to the make and model of the chainsaw assigned to
a prospective operator, and shall include review of the manufacturer’s user manual and
the specific functions of all factory-installed safety devices. Training shall include both
the documented classroom and on-the-job training (OJT) options permitted by GG-06,
“ESMS Training Program.” All chainsaw operator training sessions shall, at a minimum,
emphasize the following points:
 All chainsaws will be physically identified with a GGI tracking control number
(painted or engraved); specific saws with be issued to specific operators, and the
operator will be held responsible for the care and proper use of the saw while it is
in their possession.
 Unauthorized removal of safety devices or modification of a chainsaw, including

unauthorized cannibalization of non-functional saws for spare parts, is a highly
dangerous practice and is strictly forbidden.
 Chainsaw parts (including chain bars) may NOT be interchanged between makes
or models, unless such interchange is specifically allowed in the manufacturer’s
manual.
 Chain rakers may NOT be filed off; chain sharpening files and filing techniques
may NOT deviate from the manufacturers’ instructions.
 Mufflers and spark arrestors may NOT be removed.
 Use only manufacturer-approved bar oil only (used motor oil may NOT be used).
 Do not fuel a chainsaw when hot; let cool for at least 30 minutes. Use only
premium grade fuel, mixed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions, and stored in containers specifically designed for fuel (used plastic
jugs originally intended for other purposes may NOT be used). Fuel must be
stored in drip trays or other appropriate containment when in the field, in
accordance with GG-14, “Handling and Storage of Hazardous Materials.”
 All saws will be provided with blade covers, which must be replaced when the
saw is not being used, is placed in storage, or is being transported.
 A fire extinguisher or supply of water should be kept near the field activity as well
as a shovel, for extinguishing any small fires that may be started from chainsaw
use in dry conditions.

 Chainsaws should be placed on the ground or a stable stump or log for starting;
NEVER start a saw on a knee or while being held with one hand.
 Always carry the chainsaw with the motor shut off, the blade pointing backwards,
and the chain guard in place.
 Chainsaws retained overnight in field camps shall not be stored directly on the
ground.
 Chainsaws shall be returned to the Mechanical Shop for routine maintenance

and verification of safety feature functionality on at least a monthly basis. No
mechanical maintenance beyond cleaning or changing a spark plug or replacing
a chain shall be attempted by a chainsaw operator in the field.
 When cutting, maintain full control over the saw at all times; make
sure you have secure, balanced footing, and do not work in an awkward position.
Clear debris away from the work area to improve footing. Never stand directly
behind the chainsaw or straddle the saw while cutting, stand to one side to
minimize injury from any potential kickback.
 To avoid kickback:
 Inspect the chain to make sure it is in good working condition; check that the
cutting teeth are properly sharpened. Dull chainsaws will kick back more
frequently and with greater force.
 Make sure that all parts are tight and the chain is at the proper tension.
 Adjust the idle correctly; the blade must stop when the throttle trigger is
released
 NEVER cut with the tip of the blade.
 Cut ONLY with the underside of the blade; never cut with the upper side of
the blade unless it is absolutely necessary, such as when making an
undercut on a limb to relieve tension.
 When removing limbs, make sure the saw tip does not touch another branch.
Make sure there are no hidden obstructions that the saw blade might hit and
cause the tip to kickback.
 NEVER cut with the saw held above shoulder height.
 Follow safe felling practices as follows:

 Operators shall plan the cut before starting, and seek the advice of a more
experienced employee if uncertain about any aspect of the felling procedure.
 Operators must keep other workers at least two tree lengths away when
felling a tree, and make sure they are aware of the operator’s activity.
 Operators must assess the tree and the site for felling hazards, including the
relative lean of the tree
 Operators shall examine the ground, the crown, the trunk and roots to check
if the wood appears to be sound, as it is more dangerous to fell a tree with rot
or potential root failure.
 Operators should determine whether or not the tree is under stress, as it may
fall unpredictably when pressure is released as it is cut; special attention
should be paid to branches or limbs that are bent or “pre-stressed”, as they
may spring back or break.
 Operators should note if the tree top is entangled in vines or with another
tree; do not cut trees if the tops are obscured by fog or rain.
 Operators felling a tree must plan an escape route preferably two routes in
different directions upgradient from the predicted direction of fall. Clear and
walk the paths to remove tripping and slipping hazards before cutting. The
escape routes should be about 135° from the planned direction of fall.
 Turn off the saw and immediately move along the exit pathway as the tree
begins to fall.
4.4 Personal Protective Equipment
Always keep a first aid kit nearby; the kit should include a large pressure bandage and
ties
All chainsaw operators will be issued the following personal protective equipment (PPE)
in compline with GG-11, “Personal Protective Equipment”:
 hard hat with ear muff-style noise protection;

 full-face safety shields;
 gauntlet-style leather gloves;
 chainsaw chaps (to be used when felling trees ONLY);
 cutter’s pants (to be used when cutting alignments in the bush); and
 high leather or rubber boots with steel toes and non-skid soles.

4.5 Field Inspections
Compliance with the requirements of this SOP shall be monitored via periodic
inspections conducted at the direction of Health and Safety Officer, in compliance with
GG-03, “Field Inspections.” Any non-conformance noted in such inspections shall be
collaboratively evaluated and resolved in accordance with GG-04, “Identification of Non-
conformances and Corrective Preventive Action.”
4.6 Records
Records of chainsaw assignment shall be retained by the Mechanical Shop; all training
records shall be filed in accordance with GG-05, “Records Management.”
5.0 REFERENCES
 GGI ESMS Plan

 GG-03, “Field Inspections.” Any non-conformance noted in such inspections
shall be collaboratively evaluated and resolved in accordance with
 GG-04, “Identification of Non-conformances and Corrective /Preventive Action.”
 GG-14, “Handling and Storage of Hazardous Materials”
 ANSI Standard B175.1-1991: “Safety Requirements for Gasoline Powered Chain
Saws”
 CSA Standard Z62.3-96: “Chain Saw Kickback”
 “e3Plus: Excellence in Health and Safety e-toolkit (EHS)” Version-01, pages 98-
102 (PDAC, 2009)

Figure 1: Management of Chainsaw Use
Procurement Manager
Procure chainsaws
constructed to recognized
safety standards
Environmental Mgr./
Construction Mgr./
H&S Manager
Select qualified trainer(s)
Trainer
Provide detailed
classroom
training and supervised
OJT per GG-06
Mechanical Shop
Assign ID nos. to saws,

conduct required
maintenance,
issue to trained operators
Chainsaw Operator)
Operate saw in strict

compliance with SOP
GG-27 and training
provided
Chainsaw Operator
Return saws to
Mechanical
Shop for routine
maintenance
Environmental Manager/
H&S Officer
Conduct
Field Inspections
per GG-03
No
Env. Mgr.
CPAR
required?
Yes
Env, Manager/Area
Records Clerk
Supervisors/Constr. Mgrs.
Issue CPAR, resolve
SOP compliance issues File records
with affected staff per GG-05
per GG-04

GG-28: Heat Stress

Effective Date: June 1, 2013 Revision Level: -0-
1.0 PURPOSE
This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) defines a range of practices that Guyana
Goldfields, Inc. (GGI) will use to minimize the potential for heat stress to be encountered
by the Aurora Gold Project workforce, contractors, and site visitors. The Aurora Project
site is located in a hot and humid tropical climate with temperatures that range from 22°
C to 34 °C or higher. Although most workers are expected to be from the local area and
relatively acclimatized to these conditions, there is still significant potential for heat
stress to occur, especially in dry seasons. Additionally, visitors from other locales may
be more prone to heat stress. Several factors contribute to heat stress in the work
environment, including high temperature and humidity; direct sun or heat; limited air
movement; physical exertion; poor physical condition; the effects of some medications;
low individual tolerance for hot workplaces; and insufficient water intake.
This SOP will apply over the life of the Project; it supports Section 2.12 of the GGI
Occupational Health and Safety Management/Accident Prevention Plan, and other GGI
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Heat Stroke
Heat stroke is a life-threatening heat related disorder that occurs when the body’s
temperature regulation abilities fail and body temperature rises to critical levels. The
primary signs and symptoms of heat stroke are confusion, irrational behaviour, loss of
consciousness, convulsions, a lack of sweating, hot dry skin, and an abnormally high
body temperature.
If an individual shows signs of possible heat stroke, professional medical treatment

should be obtained immediately. The worker should be placed in a shady, cooler area
and their outer clothing should be removed. Douse the worker with cool water and
circulate air to improve evaporative cooling. Provide the worker fluids, preferably water,
but avoid caffeine.

2.2 Heat Exhaustion
A combination of excessive heat and dehydration can result in heat exhaustion. Signs
and symptoms include headache, nausea, dizziness, weakness, thirst, and giddiness.
Fainting and collapse is often associated with heat exhaustion.
Workers suffering from heat exhaustion should be removed from the hot environment
and given fluid replacement. They should be encouraged to rest and if possible, ice
packs should wrapped in towels and applied to the core of the body.
2.3 Heat Cramps
Heat cramps can occur when performing hard physical labour in a hot environment.
They have been attributed to an electrolyte imbalance caused by sweating and lack of
water replenishment. Workers in hot environments should drink water every 15 to 20
minutes; carbohydrate-electrolyte replacement liquids (sports drinks) will also help
alleviate symptoms.
2.4 Heat Rashes
The most common problem in hot work environments is a result of the skin being
persistently wetted by unevaporated sweat, which can result in heat rashes. Heat rash
looks like a red cluster of pimples or small blisters and is more likely to occur on the
neck, upper chest, groin, under the breasts, and in elbow creases. The best treatment
for heat rash is to provide a cooler, less humid environment and keep the affected area
dry.
3.0 Responsibilities
The Health and Safety Officer will be responsible for ensuring that supervisors and
workers are trained on the prevention of heat stroke and other types of heat stress, and
how to recognize early signs of heat intolerance such as weakness, unsteady gait,
irritability, disorientation, changes in skin colour, or general malaise. The Health and
Safety Officer shall ensure that adequate training is provided visitors to the site that may
not be used to the heat.
3.2 Site Medics and First Aid Providers
Site Medics will provide medical care in the case of severe heat stress, i.e., heat stroke.
First Aid Providers should be able to diagnose heat stress related conditions and provide
medical care for less severe heat exhaustion, heat cramps, and heat rashes. First Aid
Providers may also help diagnose heat stroke.

3.3 Supervisors
Supervisors will remain alert to the signs of heat stress and will act to remove employees
or visitors from the heat if symptoms appear. Additionally, supervisors shall ensure that
workers have shady places to rest and adequate supplies of cool water or other
hydrating beverages available to the worksite.
3.4 All Employees
Throughout the work day, workers will make sure that they are drinking water or
hydrating beverages on a regular basis. Workers will be encouraged to immediately
report any heat-related problems that they experience or observe in fellow workers. Any
worker exhibiting signs of heat stress and exhaustion should be made to rest in a shady
location and drink plenty of water.
4 PROCEDURE
The following general practices are recommended for the prevention of heat stress.
 As part of induction training when first hired (see GG-06, “ESMS Training
Program”), the Health and Safety Officer shall train all workers in the prevention
and recognition of heat stress. Workers shall also be trained in the factors that
may increase the risk of heat stress (e.g., physical fitness level), proper use of
personal equipment, and the importance of reporting heat stress in its initial
stages. Site visitors shall also be alerted to the potential for heat stress in their
initial site briefings.
 Potable drinking water and other hydrating liquids (non-caffeinated) will be

provided to workers; workers should be encouraged to drink 150-200 mL of water
every half hour to an hour.
 Workers shall be encouraged to wear light clothing unless there are task-specific
PPE requirements.
 When necessary, physical demands will be reduced by lessening requirements

for extreme physical exertion, by increasing the number of workers doing a
particular job, or by the assignment of relief workers.
 Recovery areas such as fan-cooled enclosures or rooms or other shaded areas

will be provided where possible in order to allow intermittent rest periods.
 To the extent possible, hot jobs (e.g., welding and cutting) will be scheduled for
the cooler part of the day, and major maintenance and repair work shall be
scheduled for wetter seasons to the extent possible.

 PPE such as reflective clothing and wetted or water cooled garments can be
effective in reducing heat stress.
5 REFERENCES

 GGI Occupational Health and Safety Management/Accident Prevention Plan

GG-29: Determination of Environmental and Social
Aspects and Significant Impacts
1.0 PURPOSE
Inc. (GGI) will use to periodically evaluate, refine, and update its understanding of the
environmental and social aspects of Aurora Gold Project (Project) operations, based on
the initial results of the final updated Environmental and Social Impact Assessment
(ESIA) prepared for the Project.1 This SOP guides the preparation of an annually
updated register of environmental aspects and impacts, initially based on ESIA results,
which will in turn be used over the life of the Project as a primary reference in
determining appropriately prioritized objectives and targets for environmental and social
performance improvements (see GG-30, “Environmental and Social Objectives, Targets,
and Performance Improvement Program”).
This SOP will apply over the entire life of the Aurora Gold Project, and directly supports
the following Sections of the Project Environmental and Social Management System
Plan (ESMS Plan):
 Section 3.2, “Social and Environmental Aspects and Impacts, Risk Assessment,
and Risk Management Planning”;
 Section 4.1, “Environmental, Social, and Health & Safety (ESHS) Objectives and
Targets”, and
 Section 4.2 , “ESHS Performance Improvement Management

Program/Management Plans.”
1
See “Updated Environmental and Social Impact Assessment – Aurora Project, Guyana” (ENVIRON, 2013),
Section 6.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Environmental or Social Aspect
An environmental or social aspect is defined as any element of Aurora Gold Project

operations that can interact with the environment and/or adjacent communities; social
aspects are also considered to include aspects related specifically to human health and
safety. Aspects may be positive or negative; significant aspects are defined as those
aspects that have or can potentially have a substantial negative impact on human
welfare, quality of life, or the environment. Regulated aspects are subject to external
legal control through national laws and regulations.
2.2 Environment
The environment is defined as the natural and man-made physical surroundings in

which GGI operates [e.g., the Aurora mine site, Tapir Crossing, the Barama (M3) road
and Aurora extension, and the Buckhall logistics centre and river port], and includes air,
water, land, natural resources, plants, animals, humans, and their interrelationships.
3. RESPONSIBILITIES
3.1 Area Managers
GGI Area Managers (or their designees) are responsible for assisting in the identification
of environmental or social aspects specific to their assigned functional area or
department, as part of the development of a Project-specific Environmental and Social
Aspects Register (ESAR; see Figure 2).
The Environmental Manager or his designee will prepare the GGI ESAR and update it
on at least an annual basis, with the assistance and participation of affected Area
Managers, the Community Relations Manager, and other experienced staff as required.
The Environmental Manager will evaluate environmental or social aspects to determine
the relative significance of their impacts, and will recommend a threshold for undertaking
formal improvement actions based on overall impact scores, as discussed in Section 4.
3.3 Chief Operating Officer (COO)
The GGI COO or their designee will review and approve the ESAR and the
recommended numerical threshold for undertaking specific improvement actions.

4.0 PROCEDURE
The general process for periodically evaluating environmental aspects, creating or

updating the GGI EAR, and setting an appropriate improvement action threshold is
Figure 1.
4.1 Environmental and Social Aspects Review
The Environmental Manager (with the assistance of other experienced environmental

staff, as required) shall meet with the Area Managers on at least an annual basis to
conduct a review of the environmental and social aspects associated with the
operational areas for which they are responsible. Aspects will be identified and
documented for activities in the following general categories:
 emissions to air;
 wastewater discharges and other releases to water;
 hazardous material management;
 solid waste;
 hazardous waste;
 transportation;
 raw materials/natural resource use (including energy use);
 impacts to plants and animals; and
 community/external stakeholder relations.
Brief descriptions shall be recorded on the ESAR (see Figure 2) for all aspects so
identified, along with an indication of whether the associated environmental impacts are
considered positive or negative.2 Brief references shall be provided for any aspects
known to be regulated, using the Regulatory Requirements Register (prepared in
accordance with GG-31, “Development and Maintenance of Legal and Regulatory
Requirements Register”) as a primary reference. If any aspect is known to have an
open regulatory compliance issue associated with it, the circumstances shall be noted.
Any questions regarding regulatory applicability for a given aspect shall be referred to
GGI’s Legal Counsel for guidance.
4.2 Evaluation of Associated Impacts and Ranking of Relative Significance
In general, an aspect is likely to be considered significant if it is legally regulated (e.g., is

related to a specific permit condition), or if one or more of the following conditions exist
with regard to its associated environmental impacts:
 the scale of any associated environmental or social impacts is large;
2
Environmental and social aspects noted in Section 6 of the Project ESIA (ENVIRON, 2013) shall be
considered and entered in the first iteration of the ESAR.

 a high probability exists that such impacts will occur (i.e., they cannot be
considered a rare event or transient condition);
 the impact has a long duration;
 the impact may result in regulatory or legal exposure;
 the impact is technically difficult or expensive to manage or to mitigate;
 the impact is known to be of substantial concern to local communities or external

stakeholders; or
 the impact has the potential for negatively affecting the public image of GGI
and/or the Aurora Gold Project.
The relative significance of the environmental impacts associated with all negative
aspects shall be estimated using six basic factors, which include:
 the relative scale of the impact;
 the relative severity of the impact;
 the frequency or duration of the impact;
 the duration of the impact;
 GGI’s ability to influence the scale, severity, frequency, or duration of the

impact; and
 the potential for a negative image of GGI operations to be generated.
Each factor shall be ranked numerically from 1 to 5 on the basis of best professional
judgement and institutional knowledge, with 5 representing the worst case scenario for
all factors. For “ability to influence,” a higher ranking will indicate a generally greater
ability to influence, the assumption being that those issues that are clearly within GGI’s
ability to influence should be considered for more immediate action.
The rankings shall be added and the sum then multiplied by a probability factor of 0.1 to
1.0, 1.0 representing the most certain condition (i.e., highly likely to occur) and 0.1 being
the most uncertain or least likely to occur. The resulting composite impact score shall be
recorded on the ESAR.
4.3 Set Proposed Environmental Performance Improvement Threshold
The Environmental Manager shall review the draft of the ESAR compiled from input from
all affected functional areas or departments. Based on the range of impact scores

presented, a proposed numerical threshold shall be recommended, above which
objectives and targets for performance improvements will be established in the coming
year, in accordance with GG-30, “Environmental and Social Objectives, Targets, and
Performance Improvement Program.” Any aspect for which an open compliance issue is
known to exist or for which a regulatory deadline is pending shall categorically be
considered to be significant, regardless of impact score, and shall be prioritized for
improvement or action through the process described in GG-30.
4.4 ESAR Review and Approval
The completed ESAR and proposed threshold for undertaking improvement actions shall
be submitted to the COO or their designee for review and approval. All comments shall
be resolved to the reviewers’ satisfaction, and the document updated accordingly prior to
releasing for controlled distribution (see Section 4.6) and further use.
4.5 Review Adequacy of Current Operational Controls
All aspects determined to be significant (i.e., that have impact scores at or above the
approved action threshold) shall specifically require the development and
implementation of appropriate planning and procedural controls per Section 4.3
(“Operational Control’) of the GGI ESMS Plan. However, the Environmental Manager
shall also make a general evaluation of those aspects with scores below the threshold
described above, in order to ensure that current procedures, plans, or instructions are
adequate to at least maintain current levels of performance. If any modifications or
improvements are needed, the Environmental Manager shall take the necessary steps to
initiate appropriate planning or procedural changes. The results of this review shall be
summarized in a brief memorandum to file and retained in records as noted in Section
4.7.
4.6 Distribution of Approved ESAR
The approved ESAR shall be distributed at the direction of the Environmental Manager
for use in creating objectives and targets and performance improvement plans for the
following year, per GG-30, “Environmental and Social Objectives, Targets, and
Performance Improvement Program” and for consideration in establishing or upgrading
operational or mitigation plans and supporting SOPs per Section 4.3 of the ESMS Plan.
4.7 Records
A hard copy of each updated ESAR and the review memorandum noted in Section 4.5
shall be filed and maintained in accordance with GG-05, “Records Management.”

5.0 REFERENCES
 ENVIRON, 2013. “Updated Environmental and Social Impact Assessment –

Aurora Project, Guyana. Environmental Internal Corp, Washington DC. June
2103.
 GGI ESMS Plan
 GG-30, “Environmental and Social Objectives, Targets, and Performance
Improvement Program”
 GG-31, “Development and Maintenance of Legal and Regulatory Requirements
Register”

Figure 1: Environmental Aspects/Significant Impacts Determination Process
Environmental Mgr./
Area Managers
Identify/update
environmental
aspects
Environmental
Manager
Identify
associated
regulatory issues
Environmental Mgr./
Area Managers
Rank aspects on
basis of impact
significance; estimate
probabilities and
calculate score
Environmental Environmental
Manager Manager
Set proposed
Resolve comments improvement action
threshold
If no COO If yes
Approve ESAR?.
If yes
Environmental
Manager Records Clerk
Develop objectives,
targets, and File records per
improvement plans GG-05
per GG-30

Figure 2: Environmental Aspects Register Format
Environmental and Social Aspects Register (ESAR)
Approved by: ______________ Approved by: _____________________ Issue Date:_____________ Improvement Action Threshold Number : ___________
COO Environmental Manger
Regulated?
+ or – If so, provide citation; flag Impact significance Impact
Aspect Aspect Description impacts? any aspects with open Ranking (- aspects only) Score
Category regulatory issues
Scale Severity Frequency Duration Ability Image Probability

to influence factor (X)
Emissions to air
Wastewater discharges and other

releases to water
Hazardous material management
Solid waste
Hazardous waste
Transportation
Raw materials/natural resource/energy

use
Impacts to plants and animals
Community issues/external stakeholder

relations
Occupational health and safety

GG-30: Environmental and Social Objectives, Targets, and
Performance Improvement Program

1.0 PURPOSE
Inc. (GGI) will use to periodically determine appropriately prioritized objectives and
targets for environmental and social (including human health and safety) performance
improvements at the Aurora Gold Project. At a minimum, such targets will be
determined for those environmental and social aspects with impacts deemed to be
“significant” by the process described in SOP GG-29, “Determination of Environmental
and Social Aspects and Significant Impacts.”
This SOP will apply over the entire life of the Aurora Gold Project, and directly supports
the following Sections of the Project Environmental and Social Management System
Plan (ESMS Plan):
 Section 3.2, “Social and Environmental Aspects and Impacts, Risk Assessment,
and Risk Management Planning”;
 Section 4.1, “Environmental, Social, and Health & Safety (ESHS) Objectives and
Targets”, and
 Section 4.2 , “ESHS Performance Improvement Management

Program/Management Plans.”
2.0 DEFINITIONS
An environmental or social aspect is defined as any element of Aurora Gold Project

operations that can interact with the environment and/or adjacent communities; social
aspects are also considered to include aspects related specifically to human health and
safety. Aspects may be positive or negative; significant aspects are defined as those
aspects that have or can potentially have a substantial negative impact on human

welfare, quality of life, or the environment. Regulated aspects are subject to external
legal control through national laws and regulations.
2.2 Environment
The environment is defined as the natural and man-made physical surroundings in

which GGI operates [e.g., the Aurora mine site, Tapir Crossing, the Barama (M3) road
and Aurora extension, and the Buckhall logistics centre and river port], and includes air,
water, land, natural resources, plants, animals, humans, and their interrelationships.
2.3 Environmental or Social Objective
An environmental or social objective is defined as an overall environmental or social

goal, consistent with GGI’s Human Resources, Community Relations, and
Environmental, Health, and Safety Policies (see ESMS Plan Appendix C), which GGI
intends to achieve by means of the processes described in this procedure.
2.4 Environmental or Social Target
An environmental or social target is defined as a detailed performance requirement

applicable to all or part of Aurora Gold Project operations, that is based on an
environmental or social objective and provides the incentive or structure by which such
objectives can be achieved.
2.5 Performance Indicators
Performance indicators are quantitative, semi-quantitative, or qualitative measurement

tools that many be established to support the evaluation of environmental or social
performance, or the monitoring of progress with respect to the achievement of a specific
target.
3. RESPONSIBILITIES
3.1 Area Managers
GGI Area Managers (or their designees) are responsible for assisting in the identification
of environmental and/or social aspects specific to their assigned functional area or
department, as part of the development of a Project-specific Environmental and Social
Objectives and Targets Register (ESOTR; see Figure 2).
The Environmental Manager or designee will prepare the GGI EOTR and update it on at
least an annual basis, with the assistance and participation of other experienced staff as
required. The Environmental Manager will evaluate significant environmental aspects as

documented in the current approved Environmental Aspects Register (EAR; see SOP-
01, “Determination of Environmental Aspects and Significant Impacts” and develop
appropriate objectives, targets, performance indicators, as well as appropriately detailed
Environmental or Social Action Plans (ESAPs; see Figure 4) for undertaking specific
performance improvement actions, as discussed in Section 4.
The GGI COO will review and approve the ESOTR and the recommended ESAPs as
part of annual management review process described in GG-34, “Management
Reviews.”
4.0 PROCEDURE
The general process for periodically evaluating GGI’s significant environmental and
social aspects and creating or updating the GGI ESOTR and associated ESAPs is
Figure 1.
4.1 Prioritization of Significant Aspects
The Environmental Manager shall review the current approved Environmental and Social
Aspects register (ESAR) developed under GG-29, “Determination of Environmental and
Social Aspects and Significant Impacts.” Ranked aspects shall be entered into the
ESOTR worksheet (see Figure 2). Regulatory status shall also be described; see the
Regulatory Requirements Register prepared under GG-31, “Development and
Maintenance of Legal and Regulatory Requirements Register.”
The adequacy of current operational controls (e.g., current operational plans, impact
mitigation plans, or SOPs) shall also be considered. If found to be missing for any noted
significant aspect, the Environmental Manager shall initiate action as necessary to fill the
noted planning gap, in parallel with the completion of the ESOTR. If new SOPs are
required, they shall be prepared in accordance with GG-02, “Preparation, Review,
Approval, and Update of Standard Operating Procedures.” Once approved, new plans
or SOPs shall be distributed for use in accordance with GG-07, “Distribution and Control
of ESMS Documents” and appropriate training actions initiated in compliance with GG-
06, “ESMS Training Program.”
Each significant aspect will be prioritized using the logic chart included as Figure 3,
which is focused on first resolving those issues for which the greatest potential financial
or legal liability exists. Six potential priority designations should be considered, which
are explained in the following paragraphs:
 Priority 1 aspects are defined as those negative significant aspects for which
there is a known lack of regulatory compliance and a pending regulatory

deadline. Lack of compliance is a condition that may represent substantial legal
and financial liabilities to GGI, and is contrary to GGI’s Environmental, Health,
and Safety Policy (see ESMS Plan Appendix C). If multiple Priority 1 aspects
are noted, they will be prioritized further on the basis of their associated
regulatory deadlines or due dates.
 Priority 2 aspects are also negative, significant, and have a known lack of
regulatory compliance, but do not have a pending regulatory deadline. If
multiple Priority 2 aspects are noted, they will be prioritized further on the basis of
their original ESAR impact scores.
 Priority 3 aspects are negative and significant, but are not out of compliance.
If multiple Priority 3 aspects are noted, they will be prioritized further on the basis
of their original ESAR impact scores.
 Priority 4 aspects consist of all remaining negative aspects with impact scores
above the annually established threshold for improvement action. Priority 4
aspects will be prioritized further on the basis of their original ESAR impact
scores.
 Priority 5 aspects consist of all remaining negative aspects with impact scores
below the annually established threshold for improvement action. Priority 5
aspects will be prioritized further on the basis of their original ESAR impact
scores.
 Priority 6 aspects are categorically positive, and as such will not be candidates
for improvement actions until all Priority 1-5 items are resolved or effectively
mitigated. If multiple Priority 6 aspects are identified, they shall be further
prioritized for improvement action at management’s discretion.
4.4 Objectives, Targets, and Performance Indicators
The Environmental Manager shall prepare appropriate objective and targets for each
prioritized aspect, and record the information on the ESOTR. Targets may be devised
that if achieved, would also fully achieve the associated objective. Targets may also be
incremental; the rate of progress may vary with the nature and complexity of the
objective and the availability of resources, as long as achievement of the target will also
represent a credible step towards achievement of the objective. Appropriate
performance indicators may be added at the Environmental Manager’s discretion as an
aid in monitoring progress towards the achievement of specific performance
improvement targets over the next fiscal year.
An example of a potential environmental objective, target, and performance indicator

sequence is provided as follows:

 Example Significant Aspect: Use of fresh water for process use.
 Example Significant Impact: Overuse or diversion of fresh water in seasonally

low flow conditions may potentially impact biota and minimum biological base
flows needs.
 Example Objective: Reduce fresh water needs in order to provide additional

biological buffer in low flow (dry season) conditions.
 Example Target: Achieve 5% reduction in fresh water needs by end of calendar

year (CY) 20XX.
 Example Performance Indicator: Current volume of monthly process water

provided by the Fresh Water Pond, as a percentage of average monthly usage
rates over previous 2 years.
An example of a potential social objective, target, and performance indicator sequence is

also provided as follows:
 Example Significant Aspect: Traffic hazards from the transportation of

materials and equipment from Buckhall to the Aurora site..
 Example Significant Impact: Heavy Project traffic increases the potential for
accidents involving Barama employees or residents of the Buckhall community.
 Example Objective: Prevent traffic accidents involving Barama employees,

residents of the Buckhall community
 Example Target: Achieve and maintain a zero traffic accident rate on the
Barama (M3) road.
 Example Performance Indicator: Quarterly accident rate involving GGI or

contractor vehicles and Barama employees or residents of the Buckhall
community.
4.5 Preparation of Environmental or Social Action Plans (ESAPs) for Next Fiscal
Year
The Environmental Manager will summarize specific proposed actions on the draft
ESOTR for each significant aspect, which should be designed to help GGI achieve the
proposed target over the next fiscal year. As previously noted, all actions necessary to
achieve a specific objective do not necessarily need to be taken in a given year, but the
proposed action should represent a demonstrable improvement that will ultimately help
GGI meet the underlying objective. The proposed action shall form the basis of an
ESAP (see Figure 4) that identifies organizational responsibilities and support needs,
budget requirements, procurement or contracting needs, schedule requirements, and

other information necessary to complete the required action. Progress reporting
requirements and schedules should also be defined as necessary to support any
specified performance indicators.
4.6 Management Review
The completed draft EOTR and EAPs will be presented to the COO for evaluation as
part of the Management Review process described in Section 7.5 of the GGI ESMS Plan
and GG-34, “Management Reviews.” All comments shall be resolved and the ESOTR
and associated ESAPs updated accordingly. Once approved, the ESAPs may be issued
to the department or individuals responsible for completion of the required action.
4.7 Progress Monitoring
The organization or individuals responsible for completion of approved ESAPs shall

report progress to the Environmental Manager in manner specified in the ESAP, with
data provided to support the required performance indicator or as otherwise specified.
4.8 Records
Hard copies of each approved ESOTR and final issued ESPs shall be filed and
maintained in accordance with GG-05, “Records Management”, as well as records
copies of any newly prepared plans or SOPs and associated training records.
5.0 REFERENCES
 GGI ESMS Plan

 GG-02, “Preparation, Review, Approval, and Update of Standard Operating
Procedures”
 GG-07, ““Distribution and Control of ESMS Documents”
 GG-29, “Determination of Environmental and Social Aspects and Significant
Impacts”
Register”
 GG-34, “Management Reviews”

Figure 1: Objectives and Targets Development/Action Planning Process
Environmental
Manager
Review current
approved ESAR
(ref: GG-29)
Environmental
Manager
Note open regulatory
compliance issues
or pending deadlines
Environmental
Manager
Review status of
operational controls
on significant aspects
Environmental
Env. Mgr. Mgr./Area Managers
If yes
Develop/update
New plan or plans or new SOPs
SOP? per GG-02
Environmental
Manager Records Clerk
Prioritize aspects Distribute new
per logic chart plans/SOPs
per GG-07
Environmental
Environmental
Manager
Mgr./Area Managers
Prepare suggested
objectives, targets, Train affected staff
Environmental performance per GG-06
Manager indicators, and
ESAPs; submit
Resolve comments
for review and
authorization as part
of annual
management review
(ref: GG-34)
If no COO
O&Ts & ESAPs
OK?
If yes
Environmental
Records Clerk
Manager
Issue ESAPs, File records per

monitor progress SOP -10

Figure 2: Environmental and Social Objectives and Targets Register Format
Environmental and Social Objectives and Targets Register (ESOTR)
Approved by: ______________ Approved by: _____________________ Issue Date:_____________

COO Environmental Manager
Aspect Significant Aspect Description Regulated? If so, provide citation; Impact Priority
Category flag any aspects with open Score Group Objective Target Performance Indicator
regulatory issues
Emissions to air
Wastewater discharges and other

releases to water
Hazardous material management
Waste management
Transportation
Raw materials/natural resource/energy

use
Impacts to plants and animals
Community issues/external stakeholder

relations
Occupational health and safety
Figure 3: Logic Chart for Prioritizing Significant Environmental Aspects
+ or – If ‐ Signif icant If yes Open If yes Regulatory If yes Sort by action
aspect?
environmental compliance deadline Priority 1
aspect? issue? pending? due date
If + If no If no If no
Sort by
Priority 2
impact score
Sort by
Priority 3
impact score
Aspect rank If yes Sort by

> current Priority 4
threshold? impact score
If no
Sort by
Priority 5
impact score
Sort by
Priority 6 management
direction
Figure 4: Environmental or Social Action Plan (ESAP) Format
ENVIRONMENTAL OR SOCIAL ACTION PLAN (ESAP)
Prepared by: Approved by: Issue date:
Environmental Manager COO

Description of Significant Aspect:
Objective: Target:
Responsible
Required Improvement Actions or Tasks Individual Due Date
or Department
Budgetary Considerations/Requirements:
Reporting Requirements and Schedule:

GG-31: Development and Maintenance of
Legal and Regulatory Requirements Register
”
Effective Date: October 20, 2012 Revision Level: -1-
This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) defines the methods used by Guyana Goldfields,
Inc. (GGI) to document and maintain its understanding of 1) the legal, regulatory, and other
requirements that will apply to Aurora Project activities in all phases of mine life, as well as 2)
any associated permitting, planning, operating, monitoring, or reporting requirements. These
requirements will be documented in a master Regulatory Requirements Register that will serve
to guide permit application, planning, and monitoring activities in day-to-day operations.
The Regulatory Requirements Register discussed in this procedure will be evaluated and
updated, as necessary, on at least an annual basis, or when prompted by regulatory changes or
significant policy, process, or facility changes that could affect the Project’s permit conditions or
regulatory compliance status. These documents will also be verified and used as a primary
reference in periodic regulatory compliance audits (see GG-32, “Regulatory Compliance
Verification Audits”).
This SOP will apply over the life of the Aurora Project; it supports Section 3.1 (“Legal and Other
Requirements”) of the GGI Environmental and Social Management System Plan (ESMS Plan),
and other GGI Management Plans and SOPs when specified therein.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
An environmental or social aspect is defined as any element of Aurora Project activities or

processes that can interact with the environment, the workforce, or local communities, at any
phase in the Project. Aspects are considered significant if they can potentially have a
substantial negative impact on the environment, or the health, safety, or well-being of the
workforce, local communities, contractors, or site visitors. Regulated aspects are subject to
control under the laws or regulations of the nation of Guyana.

2.2 Environment
The environment is defined as the physical surroundings in which GGI operates (e.g., mine, mill,
the Aurora to Buckhall road, the Aurora man-camp and supporting infrastructure, Tapir
Crossing, Buckhall), and includes air, water, land, natural resources, plants, animals, humans,
and their interrelationships.
2.3 “Other” Requirements
“Other” requirements are defined as voluntary industry-specific guidelines, lending institution

guidelines, or other requirements that may not be specifically required by governing permits or
regulations, but that GGI management chooses to adopt as a matter of policy, using the same
general level of control that would be afforded an actual regulatory requirement. Examples of
“other” requirements applicable to the Aurora Project include:
 the International Cyanide Management Code [ICMC; International Cyanide Management

Institute (ICMI), 2012)];
 the World Bank/International Finance Corporation (IFC) “Environmental, Health and

Safety Guidelines for Mining” (IFC, 2007); and
 the IFC environmental and social Performance Standards (IFC, 2012).
3.1 Legal Counsel
Legal Counsel for the Aurora Project shall coordinate with the Environmental Manager in the
identification of legal, regulatory, and other requirements that apply to all phases and aspects of
Project operations. Legal Counsel is responsible for maintaining access to websites,
governmental gazettes, and other sources of information defining current and pending
regulations, and for periodically updating the Regulatory Requirements Register as necessary to
address any new regulations, or revisions to previously identified regulations. Legal Counsel
shall also engage the Operations Manager and Environmental Manager in discussion of
specific permit requirements, and work with them to ensure that level of effort necessary for
permit preparation, reviews, and approval is properly scheduled and budgeted.
The Environmental Manager responsible for preparing and periodically updating the Regulatory
Requirements Register, with the assistance of Legal Counsel and the Operations Manager

3.3 All Personnel
GGI personnel are responsible for participating in the training programs established by GG-06,
“ESMS Training Program” and thereby developing a working understanding of the regulatory
compliance requirements applicable to their specific work areas. All personnel shall notify their
supervisors, the Environmental Officer or Health and Safety Officer, or the Environmental
Manager regarding any spills, accidents, equipment malfunctions, environmental conditions, or
unsafe practices or conditions that could be a potentially significant environmental or social
impact, or a violation of a permit conditions or other regulatory compliance requirement.
4.0 PROCEDURE
The process for creating and updating the Aurora Project Regulatory Requirements Register) is
described in the following steps and summarized as a flowchart in Figure 1.
4.1 Conduct Legal and Regulatory Requirements Review
On at least an annual basis (or when prompted by significant facility changes or notifications of
regulatory changes), the legal, regulatory, and “other” requirements applicable to Aurora Project
activities shall be reviewed by Legal Counsel with the assistance of the Environmental Manager.
Legal Counsel shall maintain access to the permit requirements, regulatory requirements
databases, reference documents, government gazettes, and other information as necessary to
support the completion and update of a complete and accurate listing of permits and other
regulatory requirements. At a minimum, permit requirements and the applicability of any
regulatory and other requirements shall be evaluated for the following issues, as applicable to
the current phase of mine life:
 exploratory investigations, including acquisition of soil and water samples (surface and
subsurface), management of exploration wastes, and stabilization/restoration of
exploration sites,
 hazardous materials and hazardous waste management;
 transportation, storage, and use of sodium cyanide reagent;
 purchase, transportation, storage, and use of explosives;
 usage and maintenance of roadways between the Aurora and Buckhall sites;
 generation and transmission of electrical power;
 site and transportation security (including communications requirements involving police

or military and regulations on small arms use);

 non-hazardous solid waste management, including construction and permitting of
landfills at Aurora and Buckhall;
 extraction or abstraction of water resources;
 wastewater discharges;
 erosion control and stormwater management;
 air emissions (including greenhouse gases);
 protection of biodiversity/threatened or endangered species;
 emergency preparedness and response planning and community outreach issues;
 spill response; and
 hazardous materials/hazardous waste worker training.
It is recognized that in Guyana, regulations may not always be promulgated in the subject areas
suggested by this list; however, the list should be revisited in each review in order to detect the
potential introduction of regulatory changes.
4.2 Preparation and Update of Regulatory Requirements Register
Legal Counsel shall document all regulatory requirements identified in the review discussed in
Section 4.1 in a Regulatory Requirements Register (see Figure 2). Any specific permitting,
planning, monitoring, and/or reporting requirements prompted by the governing regulation shall
be summarized in the last column of the register, or cross-references provided to appropriate
documents. A master list of permit requirements and associated agency or directorate contacts
shall also be prepared that encompasses all phases of the Project, using the Master Permits
List format specified in Figure 3.
4.3 Review
The completed Regulatory Requirements Register and all subsequent updates shall be
submitted to the VP, Aurora Project for final review and approval. All review comments shall be
resolved before distribution.
4.4 Controlled Distribution
The approved Regulatory Requirements Register and Master Permits List will be distributed in
accordance with GG-07, “Distribution and Control of ESMS Documents” as necessary to
support 1) permit preparation and submittal actions; 2) the monitoring and reporting activities
described by the Aurora Project Environmental and Social Monitoring Plan; and 3) the
processes described in:

 GG-29, ““Determination of Environmental and Social Aspects and Significant Impacts”;
 GG-30, “Environmental and Social Objectives, Targets, and Performance Improvement

Program”; and
 GG-32, “Regulatory Compliance Verification Audits.”
4.5 Training
Training shall be conducted for all employees whose job descriptions require an understanding
of the permitting process, permit requirements, and other regulatory compliance requirements,
in accordance with GG-06, “ESMS Training Program.” Training shall be conducted by or at the
direction of Legal Counsel or the Environmental Manager.
4.6 Compliance Audits
At least once every two years, the Environmental Manger shall schedule internal compliance
audits in accordance with GG-32, “Regulatory Compliance Verification Audits.” As noted in GG-
32 the scope of such audit will include independent verification of the accuracy of the current
version of the Regulatory Requirements Register and Master Permits List developed under this
SOP. Legal Counsel shall update the list and register as necessary as part of the resolution of
audit findings, as also discussed in GG-32.
4.7 Records
Record copies of all current and superseded versions of the Regulatory Requirements Register,
the Master Permits List, and associated training and compliance audit records shall be retained
in accordance with GG-05, “Records Management.”
5.0 REFERENCES
 ICMI, 2012; International Cyanide Management Code; accessed at

http://www.cyanidecode.org/pdf/thecode.pdf; International Cyanide Management
Institute, Washington, D.C., USA, July 2012.
 IFC, 2007; “Environmental, Health and Safety Guidelines for Mining”, December 10,
2007; accessed online at http://www.ifc.org/ifcext/enviro.nsf/AttachmentsByTitle/gui_
EHSGuidelines2007_Mining/$FILE/Final+-+Mining.pdf ; World Bank Group/International
Finance Corporation, Washington, DC. 2007.
 IFC, 2012; Performance Standard 1, “Assessment and Management of Environmental
and Social Risks and Impacts”, Version January 1, 2012; accessed online at
http://www.ifc.org/ ifcext/sustainability.nsf/AttachmentsByTitle/pol_Performance
Standards2006_full/$FILE/IFC+Performance+Standards.pdf ; World Bank
 GGI Environmental and Social Monitoring Plan

 GG-29, ““Determination of Environmental and Social Aspects and Significant Impacts”
 GG-30, “Environmental and Social Objectives, Targets, and Performance Improvement
Program”
 GG-32, “Regulatory Compliance Verification Audits”

Figure 1: Preparation and Maintenance
of Regulatory Requirements Register and Master Permits List
Env. Manager/
Legal Counsel
Conduct
permitting/legal
requirements review
Env. Manager/
Legal Counsel
Env. Manager/
Legal Counsel Prepare or update
Regulatory
Resolve comments Requirements
Register
and Permit List
VP,
If no Aurora Proj..
Accept?
If yes
Env. Manager
Distribute new
or updated SOPs per
GG-07, train users as
required per GG-06
Env. Manager or
Designee
Conduct biennial
complaince audit
perGG-32
Env. Mgr...
If yes
Modify register
?
If no
Records Clerk
File records per

GG-05

Figure 2: Regulatory Requirements Register
Aurora Project – Regulatory Requirements Register

Last updated: _________________ By: _________________
Legal Counsel
Regulated Applicable Associated Summary Description Permitting, planning,

Area Regulation or Permit, License, or of Requirement monitoring, and/or
Standard Agreement reporting requirements
(summary)
Exploratory investigations
Hazardous waste
Hazardous materials
(general)
Hazardous materials
(sodium cyanide)
Purchase, transportation,
storage, and use of
explosives
Transportation of
concentrate
Usage and maintenance of

roadways

(summary)
Transmission and usage of

Electrical power
Site and transportation

security
Non-hazardous solid waste

management
Extraction or abstraction of
water resources
Wastewater discharges
Erosion control and

stormwater management
Air emissions (including

greenhouse gases)
Protection of
biodiversity/threatened or
endangered species
Emergency preparedness
and response planning and
community outreach

(summary)
Spill response
Hazardous
materials/hazardous waste
worker training
To be determined (TBD)
TBD

Figure 3: Master Permits List
Aurora Project – Master Permits List

Last updated: _________________ By: _________________
Legal Counsel
Project Phase Applicable Associated Responsible Summary of Current status

or Activity Regulation or Permit or License Agency/ Approval (In Preparation,
Standard Contact Information Conditions Submitted,
Approved)
Exploration
Construction
Operations

Project Phase Applicable Associated Responsible Summary of Current status
or Activity Regulation or Permit or License Agency/ Approval (In Preparation,
Standard Contact Information Conditions Submitted,
Approved)
Decommissioning
and closure
Postclosure

GG-32: Regulatory Compliance Verification Audits

1.0 PURPOSE
Goldfields, Inc. (GGI) Aurora Gold Project (Project) shall use to periodically verify
compliance with applicable environmental regulations and other requirements. The
current version of the Regulatory Requirements Register developed in accordance with
GG-31, “Development and Maintenance of Legal and Regulatory Requirements
Register” shall serve as the basis of the compliance verification audit. This SOP will
apply over the construction, operations, and decommissioning/closure phases of the
Project, and supports Section 3.1(“Legal and Other Requirements”) and 7.2.2
(“Regulatory Compliance Verification Audits”) of the Project Environmental and Social
Management System Plan (ESMS Plan).
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Compliance Verification Audit
A compliance verification audit is a comprehensive annual review of the regulatory

compliance status of Aurora Gold Project operations sites.
2.2 Compliance Verification Auditor or Audit Team
The compliance verification auditor for a compliance verification audit shall be a (or, if
an audit team is assigned, shall include at least one) compliance specialist well-versed
in applicable permit requirements and World Bank/International Finance Corporation
(IFC) environmental and occupational health and safety regulations. Selection of the
compliance verification auditor or audit team is at the discretion of the Environmental
Manager.

The Environmental Manager is responsible for scheduling annual compliance verification

audits, selecting the Audit Team Leader, and for appointing any other members of the
audit team. The Environmental Manager shall also review all resulting compliance
verification audit reports, and initiate any required corrective and preventive action
requests (CPARs) per GG-04, “Identification of Nonconformances and Corrective/
Preventive Action.” The Environmental Manager shall also direct any required updates
to the Regulatory Requirements Register (see GG-31, “Development and Maintenance
of Legal and Regulatory Requirements Register”) that may be detected in the audit. All
or a portion of these responsibilities may be delegated to another appropriate
management representative.
4.0 PROCEDURE
The regulatory compliance audit process is described in the following steps and is
summarized as a flowchart in Figure 1.
4.1 Schedule Annual Compliance Verification Audit
The Environmental Manager shall contact the Construction Manager (or, during the
operational phase of the Project, the Operations Manager) and schedule the compliance
verification audit, giving due consideration to the need to minimize disruption to routine
operations. A memo confirming the schedule so established shall be issued, with a copy
forwarded to the VP, Aurora Project and GGI’s Legal Counsel. All audit reports shall be
considered to be proprietary and confidential materials.
4.2 Select Audit Team Leader and Members
The Environmental Manager shall select an appropriately qualified compliance auditor or

audit team. The auditor (and/or the audit team members) may be a GGI employee or an
external consultant. All team members shall receive at least reading-level training in the
requirements of this SOP, in accordance with GG-06, “ESMS Training Program.”
4.3 Conduct Compliance Verification Audit
The auditor or audit team shall conduct the verification through a combination of physical
inspections and ESMS record reviews, using an appropriate sample of the records
produced since the preceding compliance verification. Special attention shall be placed

on new or substantially modified operations and nonconforming operations and
conditions that may have been noted during previous verification audits. The auditor or
audit team shall employ a checklist based on the individual requirements identified in the
current Regulatory Requirements Registrar (see GG-31, “Development and
Maintenance of Legal and Regulatory Requirements Register”) to guide the review of
information.
4.4 Preparation of Compliance Verification Audit Report
The compliance verification audit report shall include a brief discussion of the objectives
and scope of the audit. Any protocols followed during the audit shall be cited in the
report. The report will summarize all audit findings and include the following information
for each finding: the regulatory citation; a brief summary description of the specific
regulatory requirement, as interpreted by the audit team; and discussions of any
potential or observed nonconformances. All audit reports shall be marked “Confidential.”
Suggested format for preparing a compliance verification audit report is included in
Figure 2.
4.5 Review of Compliance Verification Audit Report
The draft audit report will be reviewed for accuracy and applicability of cited
requirements by the Environmental Manager. The auditor or audit team shall issue a
final compliance verification report after the resolution of all review comments. The
Environmental Manager shall sign the approved audit report.
4.6 CPAR Initiation and Review of Regulatory Compliance Matrix
Upon receipt of notification of any potential nonconforming conditions from the

compliance verification audit report, the Environmental Manager shall initiate any
necessary CPARs in accordance with GG-04, “Identification of Non-conformances and
Corrective/Preventive Action.” The Environmental Manager shall refer any suggestions
for changes to the Regulatory Requirements Register to Legal Counsel for consideration
during annual review, as required by see GG-31, “Development and Maintenance of
Legal and Regulatory Requirements Register.”
4.7 Records
Record copies of audit team training, the annual compliance verification audit report, and
any resulting CPARs shall be filed in accordance with GG-05, “Records Management.”

5.0 REFERENCES
 GGI ESMS Plan

 GG-04, “Identification of Nonconformances and Corrective/Preventive Action”
Register”

Figure 1: Planning and Conducting Regulatory Compliance Audits
Schedule
annual compliance
verification audit
Select auditor
or audit team, train per
GG-06
Auditor/Audit Team
Review Regulatory
Requirements Register,
prepare checklist
Auditor/Audit Team
Conduct audit
Auditor/Audit Team Auditor/Audit Team

Prepare verification
Resolve comments
audit report
No Env. Mgr.
Accept?
Yes
Env. Mgr. Yes Initiate CPAR,
CPAR needed? resolve per GG-04
No
Legal Counsel
Env.Mgr. Yes Update Regulatory
Update register? Requirements Register
per GG-31
No
Records Clerk
File records
per GG-05

Figure 2: Compliance Verification Audit Report Format
CONFIDENTIAL
Aurora Gold Project Compliance Verification Audit Report
Approved By: ______________________ ____________

Environmental Manager Date
Audit Objective and Scope
Identify the following:
 auditor or audit team leader

 members of audit team (if applicable)
 date audit was performed
 areas or facilities which were audited
 protocols or guidelines used (including date and revision level of Regulatory
Requirements Register)
1. Audit Summary
Summarize the following information for each audit finding:
 regulatory citation
 description of requirement imposed by regulation
 description of finding of nonconformance (reference CPARs by number)
2. Recommendations for Revision to Regulatory Compliance Matrix
If, based on the verification audit and knowledge of environmental compliance obligations, the
audit team either has discovered errors in the Regulatory Requirements Register or has
suggestions on how to improve it, this section should be used to summarize suggested changes.
3. Conclusion and Recommendations
Include any positive observations on areas where the Project manages compliance obligations
particularly well; and make recommendations for general corrective and preventive actions to
correct the nonconformances and prevent them from recurring.
__________________________________ _______________________
Compliance Verification Auditor Date
__________________________________ _______________________
Team Members (as applicable) Date

GG-33: Internal ESMS Audits

1. PURPOSE

planning, performing, and documenting periodic internal audits of the Environmental and
Social Management System (ESMS) established for the Guyana Gold Fields Inc. (GGI)
Aurora Gold Project (Project).
This SOP will apply over the operational and decommissioning/closure phases of the
Project, and supports Section 7.4 (“Internal ESMS Audits”) of the Project Environmental
and Social Management Systems Plan (ESMS Plan).
2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 Internal ESMS Audit
An internal ESMS audit is defined as a planned and documented investigation of

objective evidence, performed in accordance with written procedures or checklists, for
the purpose of verifying that applicable elements of the Project ESMS have been
developed, documented, and effectively implemented. Such audits may be performed
by internal and/or contractor staff, and are planned, organized, and conducted by a
qualified Lead Auditor. Depending on the overall complexity or specific technical issues
likely to be encountered in the audit, the Lead Auditor may be supported by an audit
team consisting of one or more auditors or observers. Audit team members may be
selected from GGI staff, provided that they are independent from the day-to-day
management of the areas to be audited.
2.2 Lead Auditor
The Lead Auditor is a qualified and trained individual who is authorized to plan,
organize, and direct internal ESMS audits; to report findings and observations; and to
evaluate corrective and preventive action. The Environmental Manager will confirm the
Lead Auditor’s qualifications based on education, experience, or completion of
appropriate training programs.

2.3 Auditor
An Auditor is defined as a qualified and trained individual who is authorized to perform

specific internal ESMS audit functions under the direction of a Lead Auditor. At a
minimum, each auditor must attend a documented training session (see GG-06, “ESMS
Training Program”) conducted by the Lead Auditor that presents the detailed
requirements of this procedure and discusses their roles in the planned audit.
2.4 Audit Observer
An Audit Observer is an audit team member permitted to observe audit activities

under the direction of the Lead Auditor. At the Lead Auditor's discretion, technical
observers may be requested to perform specific audit functions in relation to their area
of expertise. At a minimum, each observer must attend a training session (see GG-06,
“ESMS Training Program”) conducted by the Lead Auditor that presents the detailed
requirements of this procedure and discusses their roles in the planned audit.
2.5 Finding
A finding is defined as a deficiency or lack of conformance with any element of the

GGI ESMS. All findings must be formally resolved using the procedure defined in GG-
04, “Identification of Non-conformances and Corrective/Preventive Action” to ensure
effective correction of the observed condition and create system improvements or other
preventive measures to reduce or preclude recurrence.
The Environmental Manager is responsible for scheduling an internal ESMS audit on at

least a biannual basis, and for and selecting an appropriately qualified Lead Auditor who
is independent of the day-to-day management of the areas to be audited. The
Environmental Manager is responsible for approving the audit plan and checklists,
evaluating and approving ESMS audit reports, and in coordinating any necessary
corrective and preventive action that may be required.
3.2 Lead Auditor
The Lead Auditor may be a GGI or contractor employee, at the Environmental

Manager’s discretion, and is responsible for the organization and direction of internal
ESMS audits as well as for selecting, training, and supervising the activities of the audit
team. The Lead Auditor also prepares audit plans and reports, and is responsible for

evaluating and approving any required corrective and preventive action responses
resulting from audit findings.
3.3 Auditors or Observers
Auditors are responsible for assisting in audit preparation, conducting audit

investigations, and reporting results in compliance with this procedure, under the
direction of the Lead Auditor. When requested, audit observers may assist in audit
preparation and in auditing areas in which they have specific expertise.
3.4 Area Managers
GGI Area Managers or supervisors will provide time, workspace, and personnel as
necessary to support the performance of the audit. They are responsible for working
with the Environmental Manager in the prompt and effective resolution of audit findings,
in accordance with GG-04, “Identification of Non-conformances and Corrective/
Preventive Action.”
4.0 PROCEDURE
The internal ESMS audit process is described in the following steps, and is
summarized in the flowchart shown in Figure 1.
4.1 Audit Scheduling
Internal ESMS audits will be conducted at least every two years, but frequency may be
increased at the discretion of the Chief Operating Officer or Environmental Manager.
4.2 Audit Notification
The Environmental Manager will appoint the Lead Auditor, who will in turn notify the
affected managers or supervisors by memo or e-mail at least three weeks prior to the
projected audit date. The notification memo will set the date, time, and location of the
opening meeting, and request that appropriate GGI personnel attend.
4.3 Audit Plan
The Lead Auditor will prepare an audit plan for each internal ESMS audit. At a
minimum, the audit plan will include the following:
 the audit number (consecutive, by calendar year);

 a brief statement of the audit objectives;
 identification of the specific operational area or areas being audited;

 a discussion of any special emphasis or focus;
 references to appropriate plans, procedures, or requirements documents;
 the planned date(s) of the audit; and
 identification of the audit team and discussion of the team members’ assigned
roles.
During preparation of the audit plan, records of previous audits and any associated
corrective and preventive action requests (CPARs; see GG-04, “Identification of Non-
conformances and Corrective/Preventive Action”) will be reviewed. Trends or recurring
problems identified during the review will be reflected in the scope of the audit. Other
areas of special emphasis will also be noted as appropriate.
Audit team selection will be based on consideration of the particular areas of emphasis
for the audit and the experience, qualifications, and capabilities of the prospective team
members. Audit team members should be sufficiently independent of the day-to-day
management of the audit areas that they are responsible for, so that the potential for
conflict of interest is minimized.
4.4 Audit Checklist Preparation
The Lead Auditor will prepare or direct the preparation of an audit checklist based on
the overall requirements of the GGI ESMS Plan. Auditors or observers may be
assigned the preparation of specific checklist sections, especially in areas for which
they will assume auditing responsibilities. Checklist content will be consistent with the
scope of the audit presented in the Audit Plan. Copies of the checklist, the audit plan,
and any required reference specifications, procedures or plans will be approved by the
Environmental Manager prior to the audit. The Lead Auditor will brief the audit team on
the general scope of the audit and the details of the audit plan, and will discuss audit
checklist assignments prior to the pre-audit opening meeting.
4.5 Opening Meeting
The pre-audit opening meeting will be conducted by the Lead Auditor, and will be
attended by the audit team members and representatives of the audited operational
area(s). Attendance will be documented. The scope of the audit and duties of the
auditors or any technical observers will be briefly presented. Questions from the
audited organization will be answered, proper lines of communication established, and
a time set for the closeout meeting.
4.6 Conducting the Audit
Each auditor will proceed with the investigations required by their assigned portion of
the checklist. Auditing methods will include records review; interviews with individual
GGI staff members; direct observation; or an appropriate combination of these

methods. The audit team will meet periodically and report on audit progress as
requested by the Lead Auditor. Any observed conditions that represent unsafe
conditions or require immediate action should be promptly referred to the responsible
manager or supervisor. Demands on operational resources and time should not be
increased beyond the level presented in the opening meeting without first discussing
such requests with the affected managers or supervisors. When the checklist items
have been completed, the audit team will meet and present their potential findings to
the Lead Auditor. The Lead Auditor will review the auditors’ input, obtain additional
clarifications where required, and prepare or direct the preparation of a draft list of
potential findings.
4.7 Closing Meeting
A draft list of potential findings and general observations will be presented in a brief
post-audit closing meeting. Attendance will be documented. Discussion will generally
be limited to the presentation of findings and the clarification of any misunderstandings.
4.8 Audit Report Preparation
After the closing meeting, the auditors will prepare final copies of their completed
checklist sections and submit them to the Lead Auditor. The Lead Auditor will prepare
a formal audit report, which will include the following items:
 a brief description of the audit scope;
 the identification of the audit team and key personnel contacted from the
audited organization;
 a general statement summarizing the effectiveness of the ESMS; and
 a brief discussion of any findings.
4.9 Review of Corrective and Preventive Action Responses and Audit Closeout
The Lead Auditor will participate in the development of corrective and preventive actions
in accordance with GG-04, “Identification of Non-conformances and Corrective/
Preventive Action”, as necessary, to ensure that each finding or observation has been
adequately addressed. As noted in GG-04, if multiple corrective and preventive actions
are required, the Lead Auditor may, at his discretion, initiate one or several CPAR
documents to facilitate the efficient tracking of closure actions. For the sake of
efficiency, all required actions for a specific responsible area or department should be
grouped under a single CPAR.

4.10 Audit Documentation
Once the audit has been closed, the Lead Auditor will forward a complete copy of the
audit documentation for filing in accordance with GG-05, “Records Management.” At a
minimum, audit documentation will include copies of the audit notification memo, the
audit plan, audit opening and closing meeting attendance sheets, the completed audit
questionnaire, the audit report, and any associated CPAR record(s).
5.0 REFERENCES
 GGI ESMS Plan


Figure 1: Planning and Conducting Internal ESMS Audits
Environmental Mgr.
Select Lead Auditor,
obtain and confirm
qualifications
Lead Auditor
Prepare/distribute
audit notification memo
Lead Auditor
Select audit team,

train per GG-06
Lead Auditor Lead Auditor

Resolve comments Prepare Audit Plan
and checklist
No Env. Mgr.
Accept?
Yes
Lead Auditor/Audit Team
Conduct audit
as planned
Lead Auditor Lead Auditor/Audit Team

Resolve comments Prepare Audit Report and
CPARs as required
per GG-04
No Env. Mgr.
Accept?
Yes
Environmental Mgr.
Resolve CPARs
per GG-04,
notify Lead Auditor
when closed
Lead Auditor
Records Clerk
Issue audit
File records
closure memo,
per GG-05
assemble audit records
package

GG-34: Management Reviews

1.0 PURPOSE
Inc. (GGI) will use to conduct annual management reviews to evaluate the suitability and
effectiveness of the Environmental and Social Management System (ESMS) established
for the Aurora Gold Project (Project).
This SOP will apply over the operational and decommissioning/closure phases of the
Project, and supports Section 7.5 (“Management Review”) of the Project Environmental
and Social Management System Plan (ESMS Plan).
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Management Review
Management review is defined as a high-level evaluation of the suitability and

effectiveness of the ESMS, as currently documented and implemented. Such reviews
will focus on:
 the degree to which the principles and commitments contained in GGI’s Human
Resources, Community Relations, and Environmental, Health, and Safety
Policies (see ESMS Plan Appendix C) are being supported;
 the level of compliance maintained with respect to applicable regulatory

requirements (see GG-32, “Regulatory Compliance Verification Audits”);
 GGI’s responsiveness to the environmental and social issues communicated by

the Project’s external stakeholders;
 indications of improvement of environmental, health and safety, and social

performance relative to previous reviews; and
 The level of conformance that has been maintained with the current version of
the Project ESMS Plan and its supporting plans and procedures.

3. RESPONSIBILITIES
GGI’s COO is responsible for performing (or delegating the performance of) a
management review in compliance with this SOP on at least an annual basis. The COO
is responsible for evaluating and approving the suggested agenda for the review, as well
as for the review and approval of the final report, if delegated, and for authorizing any
resulting action items.
3.2 Environmental Superintendent
The Environmental Manager is responsible for requesting the performance of the review,
and for submitting all necessary records and system documentation to the COO or their
designee in advance of the review. The Environmental Manager shall also prepare a
suggested agenda for the review, to be approved by the COO.
4.0 PROCEDURE
The management review process consists of the following steps (summarized as a

flowchart in Figure 1):
4.1 Schedule and Agenda
The Environmental Manager will advise the COO when a management review should be
conducted and will submit a suggested agenda for review and approval. Management
reviews may consider one, several, or all elements of the ESMS, but at a minimum
should specifically consider the following:
 results of any internal or external audits which have been completed since the
last management review;
 the nature of the issues addressed in all Corrective/Preventative Action Requests

(CPARs; see GG-04, “Identification of Nonconformances and Corrective/
Preventive Action”) generated since the previous management review, along with
CPAR completion status;
 any grievances (see ESMS Plan Appendix A, “Labour Grievance Procedure” and
Appendix B, “Community and Environmental Grievance Procedure”) or other
stakeholder complaints or concerns received since the previous management
review;
 environmental monitoring data summaries or summary reports;

 any accident or incident reports;
 progress made against GGI’s current environmental objectives and targets (see
GG-30, ““Environmental and Social Objectives, Targets, and Performance
Improvement Program”;
 the report from the previous management review; and
 information on recent or pending organizational or facility changes, corporate

policy directives, regulatory changes, or other external developments that may
affect GGI’s environment and social aspects and impacts (see GG-29,
“Determination of Environmental and Social Aspects and Significant Impacts”).
4.2 Assemble Background Information
The Environmental Manager shall assemble reference materials for the COO’s use that
address the information needs described in Section 4.1, as well as reference copies of
the current version of the ESMS Plan, relevant management plans, SOPs, and other
documents as requested or deemed necessary to support the proposed review agenda.
4.3 Approval of Agenda
The COO shall review the proposed review agenda and resolve any questions or
concerns with the Environmental Manager before proceeding with the review.
4.4 Performance of Management Review and Preparation of Management Review

Report
The COO, at their discretion, may personally prepare or delegate the conduct of the
review and the preparation of a summary Management Review Report (MRR) that
documents the scope of the review, its results, and any appropriate action items. MRR
format is discretional. The review may be based on evaluation of documents,
discussions with specific individuals, direct observation of specific aspects of mine
operations, or any suitable combination of methods. Timetables for the resolution of all
action items shall be defined, as well as individual responsibilities for action item
completion. If the review is delegated, the MRR shall be reviewed by the COO and all
comments resolved prior to further discussion with the Environmental Manager.
4.5 Resolution of Action Items
The COO shall discuss the results of the final MRR with the Environmental Manager,
with an emphasis on observations, concerns, and specific action item requirements. If
any action item constitutes a non-conformance, it shall be separately documented
Manager and resolved in accordance with GG-04, “Identification of Non-conformances
and Corrective/Preventive Action.” If an action item does not constitute a non-

conformance, copies of the requested action shall be distributed to the assigned
personnel by the Environmental Manager and completed in compliance with the
schedule specified in the MRR. The Environmental Manager shall track progress on all
required actions, and provide a simple closure memo to the COO when they are
complete.
4.6 Records
The final management review agenda, final MRRs, action item closure memos, and any
associated CPARs shall be filed in accordance with GG-05, “Records Management.”
5.0 REFERENCES
 GGI ESMS Plan, with Appendix A (“Labour Grievance Procedure”), Appendix B

(“Community and Environmental Grievance Procedure”), and Appendix C
(Human Resources, Community Relations, and Environmental, Health, and
Safety Policies”)
 GG-04, “Identification of Non-conformance and Corrective/Preventive Action”
 GG-29, “Determination of Environmental and Social Aspects and Significant
Impacts”
 GG-30, “Environmental and Social Objectives, Targets, and Performance
Improvement Program”

Figure 1: Management Review Process

GG-35: Community Health and Safety Awareness Meetings

This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) outlines the procedures that Guyana
Goldfields, Inc. (GGI) will follow in conducting periodic community health and safety
awareness meetings for the Aurora Gold Project (Project). This SOP will apply
during the construction and operational phases of the project. It supports the Project
Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan, Cyanide Management Plan,
Community Relations Management Plan, and Section 8 (“Stakeholder Engagement”)
and Section 9 (“External Communications and Grievance Mechanisms” of the
Environmental and Social Management Systems Plan (ESMS Plan).
2.0 DEFINITIONS
 None
3.1 Community Relations Manager, Health and Safety Officer, and

The Community Relations Manager, Health and Safety Officer, and Environmental
Manager are collectively responsible for conducting periodic community health and
safety awareness meetings in the community of Buckhall, and Aranka Mouth, and, as
appropriate, at one or more Barama Company Ltd. (Barama) sites, on at least an
annual basis. They will also assist in distributing agendas or written materials in
advance of meetings, and will assist in the answering of questions or concerns and
the resolution of any complaints.
4.0 PROCEDURE
The general process for conducting periodic community health and safety awareness
meetings is outlined in the following paragraphs. The process is also summarized as
a flowchart in Figure 1.
4.1 General
It is recognized that over the life of the Aurora Gold Project, some of the Project
workforce will be composed of local residents. As a consequence, the Project and

the local communities share a common interest in mitigating the health and safety
hazards experienced by the Project workforce, whether such hazards originate in the
workplace or in the communities, or may be associated with the transportation of
goods and materials to the Aurora site. Formal community health and safety
meetings shall therefore be conducted at least annually in Aranka Mouth and
Buckhall, as well as Barama camps or offices that may be near the Barama road that
will experience an increase in vehicle traffic and may be called upon to participate in
the investigation and cleanup of any transportation-related accidents that may occur
on the Barama portion of the road. Additional meetings may be scheduled as
necessary to discuss specific questions or health and safety issues, or if
management or Project staff identify new issues that merit broader discussion. All
meetings will include an open discussion period in which residents can openly
express perceived risks or hazards and their other interests, concerns, and opinions.
4.2 Organization and Scheduling
The Community Relations Manager, Health and Safety Officer, and Environmental
Manager shall collaboratively select an appropriate venue for each year’s meeting,
rotating locations as necessary from year to year to ensure that reasonable
participation opportunities are provided to all affected communities. The primary
purpose of these annual meetings will be to provide a forum for local community
residents to air their mining-related health and safety concerns and questions, as well
as to provide information to local communities that:
 describes the general health and safety hazards associated with mine
construction, operations, and closure, including discussion of the hazards
experienced by mine employees, any environmental hazards, and hazards
associated with the transportation of cyanide reagent, fuel, and other
supplies on the Barama (M3) Road and the extension of the M3 to Tapir
Crossing and the Aurora site;
 describes the measures that have been established to mitigate such hazards
and thereby protect the health and safety of the workforce and the residents
of local communities;
 describes any planned or pending process or infrastructure improvements

that will serve to further minimize or mitigate occupational health and safety
risks;
 informs the community of standard actions and procedures to follow in the

event of an emergency related to mine operations or the transportation of
concentrate or supplies (as defined in the Project Emergency Preparedness
and Response Plan and Cyanide Management Plan, or if hazards or risks to
public health and safety as a result of mine operations are observed; and
 also provides a forum to discuss the monitoring and prevention of

communicable diseases (see GG-10, “Prevention and Monitoring of
Communicable Diseases”) that could potentially affect the workforce as well
as local community residents.

The content of these meetings will be dependent upon an evaluation of community
health and safety risks, as well as the perception of risk that the community may
have about Project operations. Meeting attendance may be open, by invitation to
specific individuals, by invitation plus guest, or other appropriate format as
recommended by the Community Relations Manager, bearing in mind that the intent
of the meeting is to focus on communication with community residents on specific
health and safety related issues. The Community Relations Manager should provide
guidance in identifying who will benefit most from participation, and when and where
to conduct such meetings so they are accessible to all who will benefit from
attending. An attempt should be made to engage any governmental representatives,
members of the clergy, or other individuals well-respected in the community.
Appropriate posters, flyers or other advance materials or agendas should be

prepared in advance of the meeting.
4.3 Conducting the Health and Safety Awareness Meeting
The level of detail discussed in community meetings may be expected to vary with
Project phase activities and the number and age of the attendees. Meetings shall be
organized and conducted in an orderly and professional manner, using prepared
materials and visual aids to present information in as straightforward and
understandable form as possible. Project attendees should include, at a minimum,
the Community Relations Manager, Health and Safety Officer, and Environmental
Manager. An attendance sheet should be distributed. It should be clear from the
outset of the meeting that a generous amount of time will be set aside for comments,
questions, and discussion at the end of the information presentation.
Minutes shall be recorded, with special attention given to the discussion period and
specific issues, concerns, or complaints. Attendees should be advised that the
Project will provide a thoughtful response to all issues, concerns, and complaints that
may have been raised in the meeting.
It is recognized that public meeting dynamics are difficult to predict and disruptions
may occur; however, a concerted effort shall be made to conduct the meeting in as
positive and productive manner as is possible. Aurora Gold Project employees will
conduct themselves professionally and politely at all times. However, if disruptions
are excessive to the point that a productive discussion cannot be held, GGI
participants may politely and patiently terminate the meeting, advising the
participants that a follow-on meeting will be scheduled at some point in future.
4.4 Resolution of Action Items or Complaints
Meeting minutes, attendance sheets, and copies of all distributed materials shall be
reviewed by the Community Relations Manager, Health and Safety Officer, and
Environmental Manager, and forwarded to the VP, Aurora Project and the GGI Chief
Operations Officer (COO)for their review. The VP, Aurora Project and the GGI Chief
Operations Officer (COO)shall jointly decide on an appropriate course of action to
resolve any action items resulting from the meeting. Direction shall be provided to

the Community Relations Manager, Health and Safety Officer, and Environmental
Manager by internal memo on other required action items, which may include holding
additional information-sharing meetings, distribution of additional information, one-on-
one discussions with specific individuals, or other appropriate actions. If no other
actions are required, the reviewed minutes and other information shall be filed as
noted in Section 4.5 and referred to in the planning of the next meeting.
4.5 Records
Records produced as a result of implementation of this SOP include materials

distributed in the meeting, attendance sheets, minutes, and any internal memos
issued to initiate other action. All records shall be forwarded to the Records Clerk,
who shall file the documents in accordance with GG-05, “Records Management.”
5.0 REFERENCES
 GGI ESMS Plan

 GGI Cyanide Management Plan
 GG-05, Records Management”
 GG-10, “Prevention and Monitoring of Communicable Diseases”

-
Figure 1: Community Health and Safety Awareness Meeting Process
Prepare for annual
or special Community H&S
Awareness meeting
Community Relations
Manager, H&S Officer
Contact community
leaders, discuss purpose,
schedule meetings
dates and set venue
Community Relations
Mgr./H&S Officer
Conduct meeting,
answer questions,
identify action items,
Community Relations
Mgr./H&S Officer
Prepare minutes,
submit to VP, Aurora
Project and COO
COO/
VP, Aurora Project Yes
Another meeting
needed?
No
COO/
VP, Aurora Project No
Other info or
action?
Yes
Community Relations Records Clerk
Mgr./H&S Officer
File records per GG-05
Distribute information
or take other action
as appropriate

GG-36: Lockout/Tag-out Requirements

1.0 PURPOSE
This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) establishes a “lockout/tag-out” process for

the operational phase of the Guyana Goldfields, Inc. (GGI) Aurora Gold Project (Project).
This procedure will be invoked after commissioning and acceptance of the mill, process
plant, power generation plant, and other facilities from the Engineer/Procure Construct
(EPC) contractor. It is intended for use by the GGI and contractor workforce and is
designed to prevent serious injuries or potential fatalities due to the unexpected start-up,
energizing, activation, or release of electrical or mechanical energy or compressed air or
gases during the construction, servicing, cleaning, inspection, and/or maintenance of
machinery, conveyor systems, and other stationary equipment.
This procedure does not apply to the maintenance or repair of vehicles or mobile
equipment, or to the use of cord-connected electrical equipment that can be easily
unplugged or deactivated by the personnel using the equipment.
This procedure will apply during the operational and decommissioning/closure phases of
the Project, and supports Section 3.3 (“Occupational Health and Safety Hazard
Identification, Risk Assessment, and Risk Management Planning”) and Section 4.3
(“Operational Control”) of the Project Environmental and Social Management System
Plan (ESMS Plan).
2.0 DEFINITIONS
For the purpose of this procedure, affected employee refers to any Project employee or
contractor, whose assigned duties require the operation or use of machinery or
equipment on which construction, servicing, maintenance, modification, or other tasks
are being performed under lockout/tag-out conditions, or whose job requires working in
an area in which such servicing or maintenance is being performed.
2.2 Authorized Employee
Authorized employee refers to a competent and experienced individual assigned to

perform construction, service, maintenance, or other job assignments under lockout/tag-
out conditions, and who therefore is responsible for personally locking out or tagging out

the affected machinery or equipment. The authorized employee is also the only person
authorized to remove such locks or tags.
2.3 Energy-Isolating Device
An energy-isolating device is a type of mechanical device that physically prevents

transmittal or release of energy. Such devices may include:
 manually operated electrical circuit breakers;

 disconnect switches;
 manually operated switches that disconnect the conductors of a circuit from all
ungrounded supply conductors;
 line valves in piping systems for fluids or compressed gases; and
 similar devices used to block or isolate energy.
2.4 Hazardous Energy System
Hazardous energy system refers to any machinery or equipment item or other device
that could cause personal injury or other loss in the event of unexpected activation, start-
up, or release. A hazardous energy system may be directly connected to an energy
source, may contain residual or stored energy (e.g., mechanical, electrical, thermal,
chemical), or may enable a release of materials or flow of liquids or gases, including
water and steam.
2.5 Lockout
Lockout refers to the placement of a locking device on energy-isolating equipment to

ensure that the machinery or equipment items being controlled cannot be physically
operated until the device is removed.
2.6 Lockout Device
A lockout (or locking) device uses a keyed (or combination) lock or other positive
method (e.g., installation of blind flanges to isolate a section of piping system) to secure
energy-isolating equipment in a safe position and prevent the energizing of associated
machinery or equipment. Where technically and economically feasible, lockout devices
are preferred over “tag-out” methods in the design of new installations or modifications.
2.7 Servicing and/or Maintenance
Servicing and/or maintenance means workplace activities such as constructing,

installing, setting up, adjusting, inspecting, modifying, and maintaining and/or servicing
machines or equipment. These activities include lubrication, cleaning, or “un-jamming”
of blocked or broken machines or equipment and making adjustments or repairs, where
the employee may be exposed to the unexpected energizing or start-up of the
equipment or a hazardous release of energy. For the purposes of this SOP, “servicing

and/or maintenance” should not be interpreted to include frequent, routine maintenance
or service activities that are normally performed while the system is in operation in
accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
2.8 Tag-out
Tag-out refers to the placement of a tag device on an energy-isolating equipment item in

order to visually warn operators or technicians that the energy-isolating equipment
and/or machinery being controlled may not be operated until the device is removed.
2.9 Tag-out Device
Tag-out device refers to a prominently marked visual warning device, such as a tag or
warning sign, and a positive means of attachment (e.g., nylon cable ties, wires, or
chains), which can be securely fastened to an energy-isolating equipment item. The
purpose of such devices is to warn operators or technicians that the machinery or
equipment being controlled may not be operated until the tag-out device is removed.
Tag-out devices should be used in new installations or modifications of existing
machinery or equipment only when the installation of lockout devices (see Section 2.6) is
not technically or economically feasible.
3.1 Operations Manager/Health and Safety Officer
The Operations Manager and Health and Safety Officer are jointly responsible for
ensuring that the provisions of this SOP are observed. They are also responsible for:
 ensuring that new or significantly modified machinery or equipment is designed

to employ lockout devices in lieu of tag-out devices, wherever technically and
economically feasible; and
 ensuring that appropriate lockout/tag-out devices are provided for hazardous

energy systems, and for reviewing and authorizing other appropriate corrective
and preventive actions that may result from the periodic inspections and
evaluations described in this SOP.
3.2 Are Mangers or Supervisors
GGI Area Managers or Supervisors are responsible for performing or supervising risk
assessments in their assigned work areas to identify any specific machinery, equipment,
or other systems or devices that could cause injury due to unexpected energizing or
start-up during servicing, cleaning, inspection, and/or maintenance. All such machinery

and equipment shall be documented on a periodically updated Hazardous Energy
System Equipment List.
Supervisors have overall responsibility for safety within their work groups and/or work
areas and are responsible for controlling and directing the entire lockout/tag-out process,
either personally or by an authorised designee. Supervisors are also responsible for
designating a primary authorized employee in the event that one or more authorized
employees are engaged in the same operation under lockout/tag-out procedures.
The Health and Safety Officer or his designee is responsible for preparing equipment-
specific Lockout/Tag-out Instructions as described in Section 4.3, and shall coordinate
all necessary staff training in accordance with GG-05, “ESMS Training Program” in order
to ensure that all employees receive training in energy control principles and the
requirements of this procedure at a level commensurate with their work assignments.
The Health and Safety Officer or his designee will also perform periodic inspections of
lockout/tag-out procedures in accordance with GG-03, “Field Inspection, “Surveillance
Inspection.” The Health and Safety Officer shall also review and approve the
periodically updated list of Hazardous Energy System Equipment List, and associated
equipment-specific Lockout/Tag-out Instructions and their updates.
3.4 Affected and Authorized Employees
All affected or authorized employees are responsible for compliance with the
requirements of this SOP as applicable to their individual work assignments. It is the
responsibility of the authorized employee to implement the specific lockout/tag-out
process established for a particular hazardous energy system in conformance with this
SOP before beginning work on any such system.
3.5 Primary Authorized Employee
The primary authorized employee has overall responsibility for implementation of

lockout/tag-out procedures, in the event that the anticipated repair or maintenance action
involves a group of workers or extends over multiple shifts.
3.6 All GGI Employees
All GGI employees are expected to have a general understanding of basic energy
control principles and the overall purpose of the lockout/tag-out process described by
this procedure. Unauthorized employees shall in no case attempt to remove, alter,
or interfere with the function of lockout/tag-out devices; unauthorized removal of
such devices may constitute grounds for dismissal. Any employees who are aware of
machinery or equipment that may meet the definition of a “Hazardous Energy System”
but that has not been identified and/or listed as such should bring that equipment to the

immediate attention of their supervisors or the Health and Safety Officer (see GG-24,
“Recognition and Reporting of Safety Hazards”).
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 Identification and Documentation of Hazardous Energy System Equipment
The Health and Safety Officer shall either perform or direct a risk assessment per GG-
09, “Identification of Project-related Safety Hazards, and Assessment of Risks.” The risk
assessment process shall include a comprehensive, facility-wide survey of hazardous
energy systems (as defined in Section 2.4 above). The purpose of the survey is to
identify and evaluate the condition of machinery, equipment, or other devices, which are
connected to an energy source or contain residual or stored energy that could cause
injury or loss from unexpected activation or start-up.
Electricity is likely to be the most common source of energy encountered in the Project
and may be directly connected to motors, energized circuits, or heaters, or stored in
batteries. Mechanical hazards such as moving gears, blades, shafts, conveyor belts,
rotary mills, or rotary or gyratory crushers are typically dependent upon electricity but
may also include stored energy in springs or pressure vessels, or potential energy due to
gravity. Other sources of energy that must be considered in identifying hazardous
energy systems include: thermal energy such as heat from combustion sources or
steam; chemical energy which may result in heat, pressure, or explosion; pneumatic
energy from pressurized systems; and hydraulic energy in pressurized actuators,
reservoirs, or supply lines.
Hazardous energy systems that require special lockout/tag-out procedures prior to

servicing or maintenance shall be clearly identified as such by means of a conspicuous
sign. Any equipment items that in the Health and Safety Officer’s judgment require
immediate modification or replacement to allow adequate lockout/tag-out protection shall
be documented on a corrective/preventive action request (CPAR) and forwarded to the
responsible Area Manager for action, in accordance with GG-04, “Identification of Non-
The Hazardous Energy Systems Survey shall be repeated on at least an annual basis,
or when prompted by major facility changes, equipment replacements, or management
request. If the annual survey does not prompt a revision to the Hazardous Energy
System Equipment List (see Section 4.2), a brief memo to file shall be prepared to
document review results.

4.2 Preparation or Update of Hazardous Energy System Equipment List
All hazardous energy system equipment items or machinery identified in the survey
described in Section 4.1 shall be identified by name, numerical designator, and location
in an up-to-date, facility-specific Hazardous Energy System Equipment List (see Figure
2). Facility maps shall be attached to the list with detail sufficient to locate each
identified equipment item. Each listed system shall be clearly identified by means of a
conspicuously posted metal, plastic, or plastic-laminated paper sign bearing the
numerical designation and the following warning:
WARNING!
SEE LOCKOUT / TAG-OUT
INSTRUCTION [INSERT NUMBER]
BEFORE PERFORMING ANY
SERVICE OR MAINTENANCE
ON THIS EQUIPMENT
4.3 Preparation of Lockout/Tag-out Instructions
Simple, step-by-step instructions shall be prepared for each identified equipment item
using the form depicted in Figure 3. The written instruction for any given hazardous
energy system shall be based on the generic lockout/tag-out process described below
and as depicted in Figure 1. In all cases, the instruction shall include: the name,
numerical designator, and location of the equipment item; a list of the employees
authorized to perform lockout/tag-out functions for the specific equipment item; and the
specific steps to be followed to properly secure the hazardous energy system. At a
minimum, these steps shall include:
 Identify Energy Source(s): Identify the type and magnitude of the energy
source(s), the hazards of the energy to be controlled, and the methods to control
them.
 Notify Affected Personnel: Notify the affected supervisor and Area Manager
and all affected employees that the equipment or system will be shut down for
the required servicing and/or maintenance activities.
 De-energize System: Turn off or shut down the machinery, equipment, or

system involved following standard operational procedures.

 Isolate System: Completely isolate the equipment from the energy source(s)
using appropriate isolating devices (e.g., turn off the disconnect switch or circuit
breaker, install blind flanges, or install or insert locks, keys, chains, self-locking
fasteners, or other devices).
 Install Lockout Device: Lockout devices shall be preferentially specified over

tag-out devices wherever technically and economically feasible. If the equipment
will accept a lockout device, the instruction should require the installation of a
specific type of device. If padlocks or combination locks are used, they shall be
specifically assigned to the authorized employee. If the energy-isolating device
will not accept a lockout device, note on the instruction and require that a suitable
tag (see Section 4.4) be installed in a visible blocking position with a durable
nylon cable tie, wire, or chain.
 Release or Neutralize Stored or Residual Energy: As appropriate, release or

neutralize any stored or residual energy (e.g., by grounding, draining, blocking,
repositioning, or bleeding the system).
 Conduct “Try” Test: Verify that the system is in a zero-energy state and that no
employees are exposed, and perform a “try” test (i.e., deliberately attempt to
activate the system). The try test is considered successful if the system cannot
be activated.
 Conduct Service or Repair: At the completion of this initial sequence of

activities, the system may be considered locked or tagged out, and the intended
servicing and/or maintenance activities may be performed.
 The instruction shall also include the following sequence of activities to remove
the system from lockout/tag-out status.
 Verify operational condition: Upon completion of the servicing or maintenance

activities, check the machinery or equipment and the immediate area. Make sure
that the system is in operating condition and ready to be activated.
 Verify affected employee location: Verify that all affected employees are clear
of the system, in a safe location, and aware that the system is about to be
activated.
 Verify that controls are in neutral (as applicable).
 Remove lockout device or tag: The authorized employee shall remove the
lockout device and any energy-isolating devices, or tag as appropriate.
 Re-energize system: Re-energize the system, and notify all affected employees
that the service/repair activities have been completed and the system is back in
service.

The Hazardous Energy System Equipment List and Lockout/Tag-out Instructions (or
updates; see Section 4.9) shall be presented to the Health and Safety Officer for review
and approval. Comments shall be resolved to the reviewer’s satisfaction; approval shall
be indicated by the reviewer’s signature in the blocks provided on page 1 of each form.
The Health and Safety Officer shall distribute copies of the current approved Hazardous
Energy System Equipment List and a compiled and indexed manual of current
Lockout/Tag-out Instructions to upper management and affected supervisors, in
accordance with GG-07, “Distribution and Control of ESMS Documents.” Copies
distributed to affected supervisors shall be kept in a location readily accessible by
affected and authorized employees. Individual copies of current Lockout/Tag-out
Instructions shall be placed in appropriate protective covers and securely fastened or
posted in a protected location near each affected equipment item. Superseded versions
of the Hazardous Energy System Equipment List and of Lockout/Tag-out Instructions
shall be physically retrieved and destroyed.
4.4 Tag-out Procedures
If the energy-isolating device will not accept a lockout device, the Health and Safety
Officer or his designee shall tag out the energy-isolating device using one of the
following tags, as appropriate to the situation:
WARNING! WARNING!
EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM
UNDER REPAIR OR MAINTENANCE UNDER REPAIR OR MAINTENANCE
DO NOT START DO NOT ENERGIZE

WARNING! WARNING!
EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM
UNDER REPAIR OR MAINTENANCE UNDER REPAIR OR MAINTENANCE
DO NOT OPEN DO NOT CLOSE
Tags shall be made of metal, plastic, or strong, plastic-laminated paper that will not fade
or deteriorate if exposed to weather or damp or wet conditions, and must be affixed via
nylon cable ties, wire, chain, or other secure method that is not easily removed without
the use of tools. Where appropriate, additional safety measures may be used with the
tag-out system to provide additional protection, and could include:

 removing part of the isolating circuit;
 blocking a controlling switch;
 opening an extra disconnecting device; or
 removing a valve handle.
When a tag-out device is used in place of a lockout device, it must be affixed to the
energy-isolating device so that it clearly indicates that moving the device from the “safe”
or “off” position is prohibited. If it is not possible to attach a tag-out device directly, it
must be located as close as safely possible to the energy-isolating device, plainly visible
to anyone attempting to operate it.
Affected employees’ training must emphasize that such tags must be recognized and
treated in the same manner as a lockout device, and shall not be removed, bypassed, or
ignored.
4.5 Distribution of Lockout and Tag-out Devices
Area EHS Coordinators and Area Supervisors shall arrange for the distribution of
appropriate lockout/tag-out materials and hardware (e.g., locks, keys, chains, key
blocks, wedges, adapter pins, and self-locking fasteners) to authorized employees.
4.6 Lockout/Tag-out Process
Prior to performing any servicing and/or maintenance on any machinery, equipment, or

mechanical, electrical system or other process, the affected employee shall identify the
numerical designation on the machinery or equipment and obtain the appropriate
Lockout/Tag-out Instructions for that specific hazardous energy system.
 The actual lockout/tag-out process must be performed by an authorized

employee, and may not be delegated to other personnel. The authorized
employee shall follow the appropriate Lockout/Tag-out Instructions and complete
the servicing and/or maintenance task as planned.
If there is no “Hazardous Energy System” designation and the work to be performed

clearly poses an energy control safety issue, the affected supervisor shall bring the
situation to the attention of the Health and Safety Officer, who shall immediately initiate a
CPAR in accordance with GG-04, “Identification of Non-conformances and
Corrective/Preventive Action.” Servicing and/or maintenance tasks shall not proceed
until the CPAR has been resolved.
4.7 Lockout/Tag-out Protection for Groups of Employees
When a servicing or maintenance operation involves more than one authorized

employee, lockout/tag-out procedures must provide each member of the work group with
the same level of protection. The Area Manager or responsible supervisor will assign a
primary authorized employee, who will have overall responsibility for the service or

maintenance operation and is the first authorized employee to attach his or her
lockout/tag-out device to the energy-isolating device which then serves as the “group”
device.
Each authorized employee must attach a personal lockout or tag-out device to the group
lockout device before beginning work and must not remove it until they have finished
work on the machine or equipment. The primary authorized employee will be the last
person to remove his or her lockout/tag-out device, and only after all others have been
removed.
If the servicing or maintenance operation involves more than one shift or more than one
group of employees, in addition to the primary authorized employee within each group or
on each shift, the EHS Coordinator or Area Supervisor shall assign a primary authorized
employee as the group coordinator with overall responsibility to coordinate the different
work groups and maintain continuous lockout or tag-out protection.
4.8 Contractors
Contractors working on hazardous energy systems shall be required to work under the
provisions of this procedure as a condition of their contract or procurement document, in
accordance with Section 4.3.3 of the Project ESMS Plan. The Health and safety Officer
or his designee shall plan and either conduct or arrange all necessary training for all
authorized contractor employees. Such training shall provide these employees with an
understanding of the purpose and function of the lockout/tag-out program and shall
impart the knowledge necessary to carry out their contractual responsibilities.
4.9 Periodic Lockout/Tag-out Program Inspections
The Health and Safety Officer or his designee shall inspect lockout/tag-out activities on a
discretionary basis, but at least one lockout/tag-out action by each authorized employee
should be observed and evaluated each year. Such inspections shall be planned and
documented as specified in GG-03, “Field Inspections.” At a minimum, the review shall
verify that employees know and can apply the energy control procedures required by the
current version of applicable Lockout/Tag-out Instructions, and that employees respond
properly to any deviations or inadequacies that may be identified.
Unacceptable employee practices or equipment issues that require immediate attention
to ensure adequate lockout/tag-out protection shall be documented on a CPAR and
resolved in accordance with GG-04, “Identification of Non-conformances and Corrective/
Preventive Action.”
4.10 Maintenance of Lockout/Tag-out Records
Copies of current and superseded versions of the Hazardous Energy System Equipment
List, individual equipment-specific Lockout/Tag-out Instructions, training records, facility
evaluation or inspection memos, and associated corrective/ preventive action records
shall be retained in compliance with GG-05, “Records Management.”

5.0 REFERENCES
 GGI ESMS Plan

 GG-05, Records Management”
Risks”

Figure 1A: Lockout/Tag-out Process
H&S Officer/Area Mgr. H&S Officer Yes

Resolve comments Conduct hazardous energy H&S Officer
with responsible systems surveys Need lockout mod?
Area Manager in assigned work areas
No
No H&S Officer
Accept?
Yes
H&S Officer
Prepare/update list &
Lockout/Tag-out
Instructions
Records Clerk
Controlled
distribution per GG-07,
label systems/equipment
H&S Officer/
Area Managers
Train personnel
per GG-06
Authorized Employee
Conduct lockout/tag-out See
for repair actions Figure 1B
per accepted instructions
H&S Officer
Conduct annual
hazardous energy systems
inspection per GG-03
Records Clerk
Yes H&S Officer No File records
Update instructions per GG-05
or list?
H&S Officer No H&S Officer/Area Mgr.

Need lockout mod? Initiate CPAR
and resolve
per GG-04
Yes

Figure 1B: Lockout/Tag-out Process
Authorized Employee
See Ensure availability of
Figure 1A required lockout/tag-out
device(s)
Authorized Employee
Notify affected employees
of pending shutdown
Authorized Employee
Shut down/deactivate
system/equipment per
operational procedures
Authorized Employee Authorized Employee

Isolate system/equipment Verify operational
from energy source(s) readiness

Release or neutralize Ensure affected
stored or employees are in
residual energy safe locations
Authorized Employee
No Auth.Employee
Verify controls are
Successful “try in neutral
test?” (as applicable)
Yes
Tag out energy- No Auth.Employee
isolating device w/ Lockout device? Remove lockout device(s)
appropriate warning sign or tag(s)
Yes
Lock out the
Re-energize/turn on
energy-isolating device
system or equipment
using method
specified in instruction
Authorized Employee(s)
See
Conduct repair/service Figure 1A

Figure 2: Hazardous Energy System Equipment List
HAZARDOUS ENERGY SYSTEM

EQUIPMENT LIST
Approved by: Last Update:
Number Equipment/Machinery Location

Description (attach maps or sketches
as appropriate)

Figure 3: Hazardous Energy System Equipment
Lockout/Tag-out Instruction Form
LOCKOUT/TAG-OUT INSTRUCTION
Approved by: Last Update:
Number: Equipment/Machinery Description: Location:
Employee(s) Authorized to Perform Lockout/Tag-out Tasks:
Lockout Device or Tag Description:
Lockout/Tag-out Steps:
 Identify Energy Source(s)
 Notify Affected Personnel: Notify the affected supervisor and Area Manager
and all affected employees that the equipment or system will be shut down for
the required servicing and/or maintenance activities.
 De-energize System: Turn off or shut down the machinery, equipment, or

system involved in accordance with (described)
 Isolate System: Completely isolate the equipment from the energy source(s)
by using appropriate isolating devices (describe):
 Install Lockout Device
 Release or Neutralize Stored or Residual Energy (Describe action):
 Conduct “Try” Test: Verify that the system is in a zero-energy state and that
no employees are exposed; deliberately attempt to activate the system. The
try test is considered successful if the system cannot be activated.
 Conduct Required Service or Repair

LOCKOUT/TAG-OUT INSTRUCTION
 Verify operational condition: Upon completion of the servicing or

maintenance activities, check the machinery or equipment and the immediate
area. Make sure that the system is in operating condition and ready to be
activated.
 Verify affected employee location: Verify that all affected employees are
clear of the system, in a safe location, and aware that the system is about to
be activated.
 Verify that controls are in neutral (as applicable).
 Remove lockout device or tag: The authorized employee shall remove the
lockout device and any energy-isolating devices, or tag as appropriate.
 Re-energize system: Re-energize the system, and notify all affected

employees that the service/repair activities have been completed and the
system is back in service.

GG-37: Control of Erosion and Sedimentation

This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) defines the measures that Guyana
Goldfields, Inc. (GGI) will implement to address specific erosion control needs at the
Aurora Project. Action under this SOP may be taken in response to the direct
observation of an erosion issue, a specific management request, or when prompted by
the routine monitoring of project roadways, earthworks, and infrastructure as described
in the GGI Erosion Prevention and Control Plan.
This SOP will apply over the life of the Aurora Project. It is designed to support the
implementation of the Erosion Prevention and Control Plan; Section 4.3.2 (“Management
of Social and Environmental Impacts” of the GGI Environmental and Social Management
System Plan (ESMS Plan); and other GGI Management Plans and SOPs when specified
therein.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Gabions
Gabions are rectangular steel mesh cages or boxes filled with coarse boulders or riprap
that can be wired or interlocked to create a stable erosional barrier that can withstand
substantial waterflow. Example installations are shown in the GGI Erosion Prevention
and Control Plan, Appendix C, Figures C-3 and C-4.
The Environmental Manager or his designee will evaluate Aurora Project erosion control
needs, whether reported or observed directly or identified as part of the monitoring
conducted under Erosion Prevention and Control Plan requirements, and work with the
Construction Manager or his designee to develop an appropriate technical approach to

correcting the observed condition, as well as to lay out an appropriate scope for the safe
and timely completion of field work.
The Environmental Officer will assist the Environmental Manager in evaluating specific
erosion control needs, and is responsible for managing stores of basic erosion control
supplies at the Aurora site, as well as stocks of appropriate native plants at the site
restoration nursery. The Environmental Officer will also monitor and direct the activities
of the GGI Erosion Control Team, and will conduct post-work inspections of erosion
control actions to ensure that the desired outcome has been achieved.
The Construction Manager will assign or request the hiring of the workers that will
comprise the Erosion Control Team, and will work with the Environmental Manager to
develop an appropriate scope for the required field work.
3.5 Erosion Control Team
The Erosion Control Team is responsible, under the direction of the Environmental
Officer, for completion of the specific erosion control tasks requested by the
Environmental Manager and Construction Manager.
3.6 All GGI Staff
All GGI staff are responsible for reporting unusual or significant erosion conditions that
may be observed on Project roadways, trails, dikes or embankments, mining areas,
stockpiles, or other earthworks to their supervisors, the Construction Manager, the
Environmental Officer, or the Environmental Manager, for evaluation and potential
correction in compliance with the GGI Erosion Prevention and Control Plan and this
SOP.
4.0 PROCEDURE
The general process for taking action in response to identified erosion control needs is
described in the following steps, and summarized as a flowchart in Figure 1.
4.1 Regulatory Considerations
The World Bank Group/International Finance Corporation (IFC) Environmental, Health,

and Safety Guidelines for Mining (IFC, 2007) specify a Total Suspended Solids (TSS)
standard (50 mg/L) for site runoff and treated effluents. The Guyana Mining Act (No 20
of 1989) does not specify standards for site runoff, although a 100 mg/L TSS and 50
Nephelometric Turbidity Units (NTU) standard for effluents from settling ponds may be
inferred.
As GGI is committed to meeting the more stringent of all applicable regulations and
guidelines, the ultimate goal of the Erosion Prevention and Control Plan and this SOP is
therefore to ensure that no site runoff or treated effluents with TSS > 50 mg/L and
turbidity > 50 NTU are released to local waterways.
4.2 Site Restoration Nursery
A site restoration nursery will be established and maintained within the boundaries of the
Aurora concession under the direction of the Environmental Officer. The nursery will
contain seeds or seedlings of two easily propagated native plants, Common baromalli or
(Catostemma commune) and Conga palm (Cecropia Loeflling); see Figure 2. Initial
stocks of plant material will be selectively harvested from both the Aurora project site
and the access road right of way (ROW). Both plants are known to have high survival
rates. Conga palm is one of the first species to naturally colonize cleared areas in this
part of Guyana, and Common baromalli is a common understory tree species that will
ultimately grow to canopy height.
The initial harvesting of nursery stock from natural sources will be limited to the minimum
necessary to establish the nursery. No individual collection site will be denuded or over-
harvested. Once the initial nursery stock is collected, it is intended that additional stock
be developed through cuttings to the extent possible, to reduce the need for additional
harvesting from natural sources.
4.3 Maintenance of General Erosion Control Supplies
The Environmental Officer shall also establish and maintain appropriate stocks of basic
erosion prevention materials for use by the Erosion Control Team, in sufficient quantities
to permit a rapid and complete response to basic erosion control needs (e.g.,
reclamation of roadway ROWs or boundaries of building sites; maintenance of culverts,
catch drains, or diversion structures). Such materials may include:
 wood-and-geotextile silt fencing material (see Erosion Prevention and Control

Plan, Appendix C, Section 2);
 rice sacks, for transportation of nursery seedlings;
 non-phosphate fertilizers;
 sandbags, for temporary control of water features;
 plastic culvert and side-drain pipe sections;
 coarse rock and gravel (when made available as part of mining operations) for
use in armouring water control features;

 geotextile material in lengths and widths appropriate for potential erosion control
needs;
 steel mesh for construction of gabions, with small stockpiles of ripap rock
appropriately sized for typical intended applications;
 supplies of reserved topsoil;
 jute or coconut fibre matting; and
 plastic totes or containers, with distribution hoses, for transporting water to

planting sites and watering new plantings.
4.4 Identification and Evaluation of Erosion Control Needs/Preparation of Erosion

Control Instructions
As discussed in Section 5 of the GGI Erosion Prevention and Control Plan, erosion
control needs may be identified as a result of the monitoring of:
 new construction;
 the ongoing use of the Buckhall to Aurora access road; and
 constructed roadways, wharf areas, and other earthworks at the Aurora, Tapir
Crossing, and Buckhall sites.
Erosion control needs may also be directly observed by any member of the GGI
workforce. Regardless of the source, erosion control issues should be referred to the
Environmental Manager and Construction Manager for evaluation using the decision tree
flowcharts contained in Appendix D of the GGI Erosion Prevention and Control Plan as
general guidance. The Appendix D flowcharts will note a number of situations in which
geotechnical or civil engineering input or specialty contractor services (i.e.,
hydroseeding) may be required. If the Environmental Manager and Construction
Manager concur with the guidance provided, engineering and/or contractor support
should be arranged.
After completion of the evaluation and the development of an appropriate control

strategy, the Environmental Manager and Construction Manager meet with the Erosion
Control Team to discuss the work to be done. The location of the observed erosion
problem and the specific issues that must be rectified will be noted, along with an
explanation of the Global Positioning System (GPS) coordinates or other locational
information as appropriate. Any required engineering input or required interactions with
external contractors (including any requirements for offsite analysis of grab samples for
TSS and turbidity) should be discussed, along with specific instruction for the inspection
of the site after works have been completed.
4.5 Field Work/ECI Implementation
All field work shall be conducted in accordance with the GGI Occupational Health and
Safety/Accident Prevention Plan and the applicable SOPs cited therein.
The Erosion Control Team will conduct the work as planned, under the supervision of
the Environmental Officer. If the condition at the work site is observed to be
substantially worse than anticipated, the Environmental Manager and Construction
Manager will be immediately notified and modifications made as appropriate for the
changed conditions.
Special precautions should be taken with all revegetation tasks; seedlings should be
wrapped in rice sacks during transport to prevent drying and planting should occur the
same day as harvesting to prevent the roots from drying out. Plants shall be transported
form the nursery to the work site in rice sacks, with a small quantity of topsoil so that the
root systems do not dry out. After a transplant holes are dug, topsoil should be placed in
the hole to provide better nutrients and to prevent the roots of the transplant from drying
out. Generally speaking, harvesting of plants and preparation of the planting site should
be scheduled for the morning and early afternoon, with actual planting to follow in the
late afternoon, so that dew and potential nighttime rainfall provides the plants sufficient
moisture to survive. In very dry conditions, transplanted seedlings will require at least an
initial watering.
After completion of any revegetation actions, the Environmental Officer should evaluate
the plant stocks remaining in the nursery, and take steps as necessary to propagate new
cuttings or seedlings, or to collect additional specimens as necessary to provide an
adequate nursery reserve.
Erosion prevention work on or near roadways (e.g., cleaning of culverts or side drains,
re-armouring of slopes, placement of fiber mats) may require appropriate warning signs,
and as necessary, use of flagmen to control traffic, as noted in the Occupational Health
and Safety/Accident Prevention Plan. All excavations or works in progress will be
appropriately flagged and marked until complete. Completed sites shall be examined
carefully for trash, equipment, or unused materials; all wastes shall be removed from the
site and disposal of properly in accordance with the GGI Waste Management Plan.
4.6 Follow-on Inspection
Completed erosion control works shall be inspected by the Environmental Officer. If the
work is unacceptable or additional plantings or rework is required, the Environmental
Manager and Construction Manager shall be notified and the Erosion Control Team
mobilised to conduct the required actions or repairs. When the Environmental Officer is
satisfied that all works have been satisfactorily completed, photographs shall be taken
and forwarded to the Environmental Manager electronically with the location and date
noted.
4.7 Project Records
Records produced as a result of the implementation of the SOP will consist of annotated
photographs of accepted restoration areas, which shall be retained as described by GG-
05, “Records Management.”
5.0 REFERENCES
 GGI ESMS Plan

 GGI Erosion Prevention and Control Plan
 Guyana Mining Act (No 20 of 1989)
 IFC, 2007; “Environmental, Health and Safety Guidelines for Mining”, December
10, 2007; accessed online at http://www.ifc.org/ifcext/enviro.nsf/Attachments
ByTitle/gui_EHSGuidelines2007_Mining/$FILE/Final+-+Mining.pdf ; World Bank

Figure 1: Implementation of Erosion Control Actions

Figure 2: Native Plants in Restoration Nursery
Conga palm (Cecropia Loefling)
Common baromalli (Catostemma commune)

GG-38: Working at Heights

This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) establishes minimum safety requirements for
Guyana Goldfields, Inc. (GGI) employees performing construction or maintenance work
at heights for the Aurora Project. Work areas affected by this SOP may include the roof
areas of Project buildings, rainwater collection cistern support structures, masts of drill
rigs, and other structures typically 1 - 2 stories in height; see Appendix 1 for examples
of affected structures and potential work areas.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Fall Arrestors
Fall Arrestors are items of special personal protective equipment (PPE) used to prevent
the serious injuries or fatalities that could result from an accidental fall from height. They
typically include a body harness and a short retractable lanyard that clips to an item of
infrastructure, or to a fixed safety rope, cleat, or cable. See Figure 1 for an example of a
safety harness and retractable lanyard.
Prior to the start of work, the Health and Safety Officer or his designee shall review all
ladders, safety gear, and tools assembled for a given high work project, for consistency
with this SOP and general safe work practices,
3.2 Supervisor or Lead Worker
The supervisor or lead member of a work team assigned to work at height is responsible
for selecting the appropriate ladder, PPE, and tools for the job, and for reviewing safety
procedures with the Health and Safety Officer prior to the initiation of work.
GG-38
1 Revision -1-
4.0 PROCEDURE
The overall process to be followed when working at heights is described in the following
steps, and is summarized in the flowchart shown in Figure 2.
4.1 Preparation for Climbing
The supervisor or lead member of any GGI work team assigned responsibilities for
working at heights shall assemble the work team and all required equipment for review
by the Health and Safety Officer prior to starting work. At a minimum, items to consider
in preparation for working at heights include the following:
 Inspect all ladders before every use. If there are defects, the ladder should be
taken out of service and repaired or replaced. Defects may include loose or
missing rungs, cracks or splits (if made of wood), or a bent frame.
 Fall arrest devices are required for all personnel working at heights; inspect all
fall arrest equipment before every use. If there are any defects, the equipment
should be taken out of service and replaced. Defects may include mold, mildew,
fraying, or tears in the harness, or cracks in metal fittings.
 All workers should wear proper footwear with non-skid soles. Leather boots with
a heel are preferred; muddy boots must be cleaned before climbing ladders.
 Wear a hard hat, preferably with a chin strap; wear leather gloves if needed for
the task and for protection against hot reflective surfaces.
 Use a belt for tools and/or plan to raise and lower tools to and from the work area
with a rope; heavy tools (power tools, saws, and hammers in particular) should
be secured with lanyards.
 Always work in a group of two or more, with one individual assigned to the
ground surface to assist in raising and lowering of tools, and for steadying
portable ladders.
 Only use electrical tools and extension cords with proper ground fault interrupters
(GFIs); avoid using electrical tools in rainy conditions.
 Prepare for the weather. Whenever possible, avoid conducting work at heights
when it is raining. If work during rain is required, wear appropriate rain gear and
ensure that footwear retains traction when wet.
 Take frequent breaks and drink water to stay hydrated, especially during sunny
weather conditions.
GG-38
2 Revision -1-
 With respect to portable ladders, choose the proper ladder for the task;
 Ladders should be tall enough to permit work to be accomplished without

dangerous reaching;
 Straight ladders should be placed against a building at a 4:1 slope (height

to base); this means that ladders should be 0.3 m from the wall for every
1.2 m in height;
 Ladders should extend at least 3 rungs (or about 0.9 m) above the
roofline;
 Never use a metal ladder if using electrical equipment; select a wooden

or fiberglass ladder instead;
 Place ladder on a firm, stable, flat surface, using large flat boards to level
uneven surfaces if necessary; and
 Assign a worker to hold the bottom of the ladder to ensure stability when
it is being used.
 For stationary ladders, ensure that a stationary safety line or other fall protection
arrangement is in place and in good working order; an example of a stationary
line is provided in the Figure 3.
The Health and Safety Officer shall review the condition and adequacy of the assembled
equipment and PPE for the job, and ensure that all staff are aware of the requirements
of this SOP prior to starting work. Attendance may be documented in the Health and
Safety Officer’s personal log or by a standard GGI training attendance sheet as provided
in GG-06, “ESMS Training Program.”
4.2 Climbing a Ladder
Before climbing any ladder, all workers must obtain approval from the Health and Safety
Officer that the ladder is in good condition and that all personal safety equipment has
been donned appropriately. Items to remember in climbing a ladder include:
 When climbing up, face forward towards the ladder.
 Maintain three points of contact with hands and feet at all times (see Figure 4).
 Do not climb above the second highest step on a step ladder or the third from the
top on a straight ladder. If you have to climb above these steps, then the ladder
is too short to do the job and a taller ladder should be obtained.

 Make sure that only one worker uses a ladder at a time.
 Ensure that any electrical extension cords are properly secured to prevent cuts,
scrapes or other damage.
 Do not carry tools in your hands. Place them in a tool belt and/or pull up to the
work area with a rope.
 If working above 2 m without a guard rail, use a fall arrest system with a full body
harness (See Figures 1 and 5). This includes stationary ladders and drill rigs that
extend above 2 m. Ensure that the harness and lanyard will support the weight
of the worker and his tool belt.
 The body harness should have a drop-forged “dee” ring in the back to attach the
lifeline.
 The lifeline may be retractable or fixed-length, and must be of sufficient strength

to stop free fall.
 The attachment point should be strong enough to support at least 2,300 kg, and
should be located to prevent entanglement and to safely limit the distance of a
potential free fall.
 When working on a roof without fall protection, workers should stay at least 2 m
from the edge of the roof. This distance can be maintained using a fall restraint
system anchored to the roof, or by roping off an area 2 m from the edge of the
roof. See Figure 6 for an illustration.
 If the weather is sunny and the work area is reflective, wear UV eye protection.
4.3 Descending from Heights
When descending from a high work area, observe the following:
 When climbing down, face forward towards the ladder.
 Disengage fall arrestors.
 Maintain three points of contact (with hands and feet) at all times.
 Do not carry any tools in your hands. If tools were brought up by a rope, lower
the tools down to a worker on the ground before descending.
 Make sure that only one person uses a ladder at a time.

 Remove fall arrestor PPE and properly stow in its designated storage area.
Return portable ladders to storage
4.4 Records
The Health and Safety Officer of his designee shall record the names of the participants
in the pre-work review described in Section 4.1, in a personal logbook or on the standard
GGI training record form as described in GG-06, “ESMS Training Program.”
5.0 REFERENCES


Figure 1: Examples of Fall Arrestor Harness and Retractable Lanyard1
1
Source: http://www.rigidlifelines.com/products.html

Figure 2: Working at Heights – Typical Work Process
Lead Worker
Assemble tools
and safety equipment
Lead Worker No Lead Worker Lead Worker

Moveable ladder? Ladder Condition Fall protection
OK? OK?
Yes No No
Lead Worker Lead Worker Lead Worker
Advise H&S Officer, No Lead Worker
remove from service, Ladder condition Advise H&S Officer Advise H&S Officer
select replacement OK?
No
Lead Worker H&S officer/Contractor H&S officer/Contractor
Install safety line or other
Assemble workers, Repair or replace ladder fall protection for fixed
distribute safety gear ladders
H&S Officer Yes

OK to work?
No
Workers
Correct discrepancies
as directed by H&S Officer
Workers
Place ladders, don
PPE, ascend ladder, (3 pt.
contact), fix or engage
all fall arrestors
Workers
Raise tools/power cords
to working level by rope,
secure with lanyards
Workers
Complete required task,
de-energize and lower
tools/power cords
Workers
Disengage fall arrestors,
descend ladder
(3 pt. contact)
Workers Records Clerk
Remove and stow PPE File records

(and ladder If portable) per GG-05

Figure 3: Example of a Safety Line for a Stationary Ladder2
Figure 4: Illustration of Using

Three Points of Contact for Climbing a Ladder 3
2
(Source: Oregon OSHA’s Oregon OSHA standards and Technical Resources publication: Fall Protection for the
Construction Industry. Oregon Occupational Health and Safety Administration. http://www.orosha.org/pdf/pubs/2824.pdf)
3
(Source: OSHA. Portable Ladder Safety. Occupational Health and Safety Administration.
http://www.osha.gov/Publications/portable_ladder_qc.html)
GG-38
8 Revision -1-
Figure 5. Illustration of a Full Body Harness and Lanyard4
Figure 6: Illustration of a Fall Restraint System

and Fall Prevention Warning lines on Roofs5
4
5

Attachment 1: Typical Project Locations Involving Work at Heights

GG-39: Monitoring and Maintenance of Potable Water Quality

1.0 PURPOSE
Inc. (GGI) will use to monitor and maintain potable water quality for the Aurora Gold
Project. Water for the Aurora Project will be collected in cisterns fed by rooftop
collection systems and wells. All water used as potable water will require treatment and
testing. This SOP will apply during the construction phase of the Project pending the
anticipated installation of self-contained, modular water treatment plants at Buckhall and
the Aurora man-camp; these units are expected to be commissioned prior to the
operational phase of the Project. At that time, this SOP will be modified to incorporate
the manufacturer’s operations and maintenance (O&M) instructions and specific
requirements for treatment plant water quality testing instructions. This SOP supports
Section 4.3.2 of the GGI Environmental and Social Management Plan (ESMS Plan)
Section 2.7 of the GGI Occupational Health and Safety Management/Accident
Prevention Plan and other GGI Management Plans and SOPs when specified therein.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Potable Water
Potable water is defined as the water used for drinking, bathing, cooking, washing of
foods, washing of cooking and eating utensils, and the washing of food preparation and
processing areas.
2.2 Filtration
Filtration is a primary treatment method for drinking water where suspended particles
and associated microorganisms are removed by a physical sieve or filter.
2.3 Chlorination
Chlorination is the use of chlorine in water to inactivate bacteria and other

microorganisms through chemical reactions.

2.4 Ultraviolet light (UV)
Ultraviolet light (UV) is a drinking water treatment system, typically used at the point of
use and know to be effective at removing microorganisms from water.
The Environmental Manager or his designee will conduct annual site surveys at the
Aurora and Buckhall project locations that examine water treatment equipment,
practices, and general sanitation. The Environmental Manager will oversee the treatment
and testing of the potable water at all three project locations, and will adjust the testing
schedule as needed, based on the results observed. When the modular water treatment
plants are installed at Buckhall and the Aurora man-camp, the Environmental Manager
will also direct an appropriate update of this SOP to incorporate the plant manufacturer’s
O&M instructions and testing requirements.
In the event that there is a positive biological test in the potable water supply, the Health
and Safety Officer will work with the Environmental Manager to determine the cause of
the contamination and coordinate decontamination efforts. The Health and Safety
Officer will also be responsible for working with the Site Medics to determine any
likelihood of workers developing disease as the result of any potential biological
contamination.
3.3 Camp Managers
Camp Managers will ensure that potable water is provided and maintained at all
worksites. Camp Managers will also oversee and assist with the treatment and testing
of water.
4.0 PROCEDURE
The general processes for the treatment and testing of potable water are described in
the following sections and summarized in Figure 1.
4.1 Provision of Potable Water
Potable water shall be provided in all places of employment for drinking; cooking;
washing of the person; washing of foods; cooking or eating utensils; food preparation
and processing premises; bathrooms; and eyewash and safety shower stations. Water
treatment and testing requirements associated with this program are designed to provide
assurance of acceptable water quality pending installation of modular water treatment
plants at Buckhall and the Aurora man-camp.
Potable drinking water dispensers shall be designed, constructed, and serviced so that
sanitary conditions are maintained, capable of being closed, and equipped with a tap.
Portable drinking water containers should be cleaned using a dilute bleach solution daily
prior to filling with drinking water. Commonly shared drinking cups or sports water
bottles are not allowed. Additionally, care should be taken to ensure that hands,
glasses, cups, sports bottles, and other containers should not contact the bottled water
coolers’ spigots. Potable water storage tanks and containers, especially those potable
water storage tanks supplying water for drinking purposes, should be handled with extra
care to avoid potential contamination. All collection or storage cisterns fed by rooftop
collection systems, streams, or wells should be periodically cleaned and inspected using
appropriate cleaning and disinfection methods.
4.2 Potable Water Treatment
Potable water used at Buckhall and the Aurora man-camp will be treated with a
combination of filtration, chlorination, and UV. Filtration adds protection against
protozoa (e.g., Giardia lamblia) and reduces turbidity. Chlorine added to the water is
effective at killing most disease-causing organisms in the water, and UV provides
disinfection at the point of use. Please note that the water treatment methods noted in
this SOP will be superseded when self-contained modular water treatment plants are
installed at Buckhall and the Aurora man-camp prior to the operational phase of the
Project.
4.2.1 Filtration
The first step in the disinfection process is filtration. Not only does filtration remove a
number of microbial contaminants from the water, it also increases the efficiency of other
treatment methods by removing particles and organic matter. Disinfection with chlorine
or UV can be inhibited by turbidity because viruses and other microorganisms are often
associated with particles (HC 2011). All water used for potable water on the Aurora
Gold Project should be filtered using a 0.1 µm filter.
4.2.2 Chlorine Treatment
As long as chlorine levels are maintained, chlorine treatment of water is effective at

removing most microorganisms of concern from drinking water. Maintenance of chlorine
treatment shall be coordinated to maintain residual chlorine between 0.2 to 3.5 ppm.
Should sample results fall below this applicable range, the maximum residual
disinfectant level for chlorine is 4 ppm. When the chlorine concentration is above 3.5
ppm, process treatment techniques to reduce the chlorine levels may be necessary.
Water characteristics (e.g., solids, pH, alkalinity, hardness) will influence the amount of
chlorine required to be added to alter concentration.

To raise the chlorine level by 0.5 ppm, follow the steps below.
1. For each 1,000 litres of water, premix 1 gram (1/4 teaspoon) of 65% granular
calcium hypochlorite with 1 litre of water. Household bleach may also be used
provided the manufacture date is within three months and it is stored away from
heat and light. The percentage of chlorine in household bleach is variable, so the
Environmental Manager should determine how much bleach is necessary for
treatment. Check Material Safety Data Sheets to ensure that proper personal
protective equipment (PPE) is worn.
2. Add mixture to tank. Mix thoroughly by recirculation or other means.
3. Recheck residual chlorine, and repeat steps 1 and 2 if necessary.
4.2.3 UV Treatment
UV treatment should be done as the last step in the disinfection process just prior to
distribution. UV treatment should always be proceeded by filtration because suspended
particles can shield microorganisms from the light (HC 2011). UV treatment should be
used at all project locations at the point of use of the water distribution. The proper UV
dosage should be determined by the Environmental Manager with assistance from a
licensed water quality engineer. In Canada, a UV dose of 40 milliJoule/cm2 is commonly
applied to water systems, frequently along with chlorine and filtration (HC 2011).
4.2.4 Disinfection Treatment
Prior to beginning disinfection, verify all facility personnel are aware that water should
not be used until treatment is complete. To disinfect water systems and tanks, raise
residual chlorine to approximately 50 ppm. Follow the steps below.
1. Flush and refill tank only if inspection warrants.
2. For each 1,000 litres of water, dissolve 75 grams (0.4 cups) of 65% granular
calcium hypochlorite in one litre of water. This should yield the desired 50 ppm
residual chlorine. Other chemicals such as liquid household bleach can also be
used. The percentage of chlorine in household bleach is variable, so the
Environmental Manager should determine how much bleach is necessary for
treatment. Check Material Safety Data Sheets to ensure that proper personal
protective equipment (PPE) is worn.
3. Add the one-litre mixture to each 1,000 litres of water. Mix thoroughly by
recirculation or other means.
4. Run all taps until lines are filled with treated water.

5. Allow disinfectant treatment to remain in the system at least twelve hours.
6. Empty the system and tank and refill using the maintenance chlorine treatment.
7. Test the chlorine concentration to verify that it is within acceptable limits and total
coliform levels are equal to zero (Section 4.3.2 and 4.3.3).
4.3 Potable Water Testing
All potable water should be tested with the following schedule, with modifications to be
made at the Environmental Manager’s discretion based on the results received:
 Baseline: mercury and pesticides (malathion)

 Weekly: free chlorine and UV unit functionality
 Quarterly: total and fecal coliforms and other essential characteristics classified
in the “Guyana Specification for Drinking Water” (GNBS 2004)
 Periodic (as needed): Legionella
A summary of these testing recommendations and procedures for positive results is

provided in Table 1.
Table 1. Summary of Drinking Water Tests
Testing Frequency Test Procedure for Positive Test*

Baseline Mercury, pesticides Evaluate treatment methods and alternative
(malathion) sources
Weekly Residual chlorine Follow treatment procedure outlined in Section
4.2.2
Weekly Functional check of Check for UV source functionality, replace if burned
UV unit out
Quarterly Total and fecal Follow methods outlined in Section 4.3.3, test for
coliforms Legionella
Quarterly Drinking Water Evaluate treatment methods and alternative
Specifications sources
As Needed Legionella Institute more frequent cleaning, testing, and
disinfection
*In the case of residual chlorine, a “positive test” would be one with residual chlorine levels less than 0.2 ppm
4.3.1 Baseline Mercury and Pesticide Testing
Since Project sites may be in areas potentially associated with legacy artisanal or small-
scale mining (ASM) and periodic malaria fogging operations using malathion, unless
reliable baseline data exist for the specific sources in question, samples should also be
taken from all sources to confirm the acceptability of mercury and pesticide
concentrations (although mercury analysis for rooftop collection samples would likely not
be required). Current treatment methods must be reviewed for adequacy after review of
baseline data, and alternate sources located if mercury and/or pesticide contamination is
detected at unacceptable concentrations.
4.3.2 Chlorine Testing
Chlorine is added to react with all of the chemicals in the water; any remaining chlorine
is residual chlorine, which does the disinfecting. Testing for residual chlorine ensures
that there is enough chlorine remaining in the water to continue contaminant disinfection.
Potable water shall be tested for residual chlorine on a weekly basis; the applicable
range is between 0.2 and 3.5 ppm. Per the scheduled testing frequency, collect a
sample (or multiple samples) and test according to the manufacturer’s test kit procedure.
It is recommended that portable chlorine testing equipment such as the Hach Pocket
Colorimeter II (http://www.hach.com/pocket-colorimeter-ii-chlorine-free-and-total-
/product?id=7640442953) be used.
Prior to collecting the sample, flush and clear the line at the sample point for one minute.
It is recommended the sample(s) be collected at the farthest point or extent of the
distribution system.
If residual chlorine is less than 0.2 ppm, maintenance chlorine treatment is necessary
until the chlorine level is within the acceptable range, as specified in Section 4.2.2
Maintenance Chlorine Treatment.
Testing more frequently than scheduled may be required depending on water usage and
other conditions. Each location should establish a schedule that enables it to maintain
chlorine at the proper level. Maintain testing records per Section 4.4.
4.3.3 Total and Fecal Coliform Testing
Bacteriological testing of potable water for total coliform bacteria provides information on
bodily waste (i.e., fecal) contamination of the water supply by indicating whether coliform
organisms are present or absent.
As the UV unit provides a significant level of protection against bacteriological

contamination, functionality should be checked on at least a weekly basis.
At least quarterly, collect a water sample (or multiple samples) using a container
provided by a qualified water quality laboratory. Prior to collecting the sample, flush and
clear the line at the sample point for one minute. It is recommended to collect the
sample(s) at the farthest point or extent of the distribution system. Label the sample
container with the project site, date, time, and location of collection.
Send the sample to a qualified water quality lab for total coliform bacteria analysis.
Maintain testing records per Section 4.4.

To ensure accurate analytical results:
 Keep the sample out of direct sunlight.

 Chill and fill the sample cooler for transporting or shipping with ice as soon as
possible.
 Arrange for sample shipment and the start of testing for total coliform bacteria
within 24 hours of sample collection.
 Follow sample collection and chain of custody documentation procedures.
If the quarterly sample for total coliform bacteria is positive (i.e., above zero), follow
these steps.
1. Do not touch, handle, or use the water.
2. Find an alternative source of water (i.e., bottled) or boil the water. If boiling the
water, bring the water to a boil and let it boil for two minutes before using.
3. Coordinate disinfection treatment as described in Section 4.2.4.
4. Collect at least four same day repeat total coliform bacteria samples within 24
hours of receiving the initial positive total coliform bacteria results. If the system
has five or fewer service connections or the positive sample was obtained at the
distribution system end point, the number of repeat samples or the collection
period can be adjusted.
5. Collect a sample for residual chlorine analysis to determine if it is within an

acceptable range. If residual chlorine is less than 0.2 ppm, maintenance chlorine
treatments will be necessary until the chlorine level is within the acceptable
range, as specified in Section 4.2.2.
6. Repeat the disinfection process or maintenance chlorine treatment until an entire

set of repeat samples are equal to zero for total coliform bacteria, prior to
reinstating water usage.
4.3.4 Legionella Testing
Potable water is also a common source of Legionella bacteria. Specifically, water

distribution systems, cooling towers, hot water tanks (i.e., boilers and hot water heaters),
air conditioning systems, and large plumbing systems are areas where the bacteria can
be found. Heat, stagnation, scale, and sediment can promote bacterial growth.
Exposure to the bacteria can cause Legionnaires’ disease (a serious lung infection or
pneumonia). Exposure occurs when water is aerosolized into a mist and/or droplets
contaminated with the Legionella bacteria. Since Legionella bacteria are reasonably
resistant to standard water disinfection, control methods may require multiple treatment
techniques.

Periodic sampling and testing for the presence of legionella bacteria is recommended to
show that adequate microbiological control is being achieved. If residual chlorine is less
than 0.2 ppm or total coliform bacteria is above zero, this indicates that microbiological
control may not have been achieved, and Legionella testing is recommended.
Legionella testing should be done by collection of a water sample or swabbing the

interior of an area (i.e., faucet or pipe) where there is scale build-up. The sample should
be sent to a qualified water quality laboratory. In the event of positive Legionella
sample, more frequent testing, cleaning, and disinfection will be required.
4.3.5 Guyana Drinking Water Specification Testing
All potable water shall be tested quarterly for the essential characteristics classified in
the “Guyana Specification for Drinking Water” (GNBS 2004), i.e., colour, odour, taste,
turbidity, pH, total hardness, iron, chlorides, and residual free chlorine. Water samples
should be collected in containers provided by a qualified water quality laboratory.
4.4 Records
The Environmental Manager or his designee shall ensure that copies of completed
testing and treatment records are retained in accordance with GG-05, “Records
Management.”
5.0 REFERENCES
 GGI Occupational Health and Safety/Accident Management Plan

 GNBS 2004, “Guyana Specification for Drinking Water”
 Health Canada (HC) 2011. Guidelines for Canadian Drinking Water Quality.
Guideline Technical Document: Enteric Viruses. Health Canada, March 2011.

Figure 1: Potable Water Treatment and Testing Process

GG-40: Site Security

1.0 PURPOSE
This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) describes minimum general requirements for
management of site security at key Guyana Goldfields, Inc. (GGI) Aurora Gold Project
(Project) facilities (e.g., the Aurora mine site, mill, process plant, and supporting
infrastructure and man camp; the Tapir Crossing barge ferry on the Cuyuni River; and
the Buckhall logistics support centre and river port).
This SOP will apply over the life of the Project; it supports Sections 4.3 (“Operational
Control”) and 6 (“Emergency Preparedness and Response”) of the GGI Environmental
and Social Management System Plan (ESMS Plan).
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Site Security
Site security is defined as controlling and monitoring physical access to Aurora Gold
Project facilities and operations in order to minimize the potential for vandalism, theft, or
loss, and to minimize the potential physical endangerment of local residents, transient
individuals or groups, or the GGI workforce, contractors, or site visitors.
3.1 GGI and Contractor Workforce
GGI employees and Aurora Gold Project contractors are responsible for complying with
the security measures and processes described in this SOP. Any employee or
contractor who becomes aware of a situation that places the security of any aspect of
the Aurora Gold Project or the workforce in jeopardy shall immediately report the
situation to their supervisors or to any member of the security force. All employees,
contractors, and visitors will be issued temporary or permanent Aurora Gold Project

security identification badges, which shall be worn at all times while on Aurora Gold
Project property.
3.2 Chief of Security
The security force shall be led by an experienced Chief of Security, who will report to the
Construction Manager(or, during the operational phase of the Project, the Operations
Manager) and the Vice President, Aurora Project. The Chief of Security will be
responsible for staffing the site security force with appropriately trained and experienced
personnel, for maintaining security force discipline, and for serving as a key liaison
contact with the Guyana Police Force (GPF) with respect to significant security issues.
The Chief of Secuirty or his designee shall also ensure that security force members are
properly trained in the safe, non-excessive use of non-lethal security equipment and
other security resources. The Chief of Security or designated security staff will also be
responsible for providing security badges to all newly hired GGI personnel, contractors,
and site visitors, as well as for the issue of permanent or temporary security identification
badges.
4.0 PROCEDURES
The general process to be followed for managing site security is presented in the
following paragraphs and summarized as a flowchart in Figure 1.
4.1 Security Systems Acceptance Inspection
The Chief of Security or a knowledgeable designee shall participate in the review of the
design of the Aurora Gold Project mill, mine, access road, Tapir Crossing, and Buckhall
logistics facility in order to verify the adequacy of physical security provisions. At a
minimum, site designs shall provide for:
 barrier gates and guardhouse(s) at the main entrance to the Aurora site;
 a guardhouse on the north bank of the Cuyuni River at Tapir Crossing
 perimeter security fencing, barrier gate, and guardhouse at the main entrance to
the Buckhall logistics facility;
 a guardhouse and passenger processing/luggage weighing and inspection facility

adjacent to the Aurora site airstrip;
 secondary high-security fencing, locking gates, and where appropriate, video

monitors for the gold room, chemical reagent storage tank areas, individual
explosives magazines and blasting agent silos, and power substations.

Security review comments shall be addressed by the Engineer/Procure/Construct (EPC)
contractor and properly reflected in final designs and specifications.
4.2 Inspection of Constructed Security Systems
The Chief of Security or his designee shall participate in the acceptance inspection of
constructed facilities to verify the adequacy of physical barriers, signage, and other
security systems. Comments or inpsectoin pickups shall be forwarded to the
Construction Manager and EPC contractor for evaluation and resolution.
4.3 General Site Security Rule and Requirements
All project workforce members, contractors, and visitors shall observe the following
security rules at all Aurora Gold Project facilities (e.g., the Aurora mine site, mill, process
plant, and supporting infrastructure and man camp; the Tapir Crossing barge ferry; and
the Buckhall logistics support centre and river port):
 No authorized visitors are permitted within the security perimeters of the Aurora
and Buckhall sites; encounters with unauthorized individuals will be immediately
referred to uniformed security personnel and/or the Chief of Security for
investigation and appropriate action. Requests for emergency medical or
humanitarian assistance will be coordinated with GGI medics and responded to
appropriately in accordance with the Project Community Relations Management
Plan and Influx Management Plan.
 Unauthorised use of the GGI airstrip, the Tapir Crossing barge ferry, or GGI
vehicles is considered to be a serious breach of security; any such breach shall
be immediately reported to the Chief of Security and appropriately responded to
and investigated as noted in Section 4.4.
 All employees, visitors, and contractors must present personal identification and
be logged in and out of the mine/mill and port sites. All personal luggage is
subject to search for prohibited items as per the GGI Labour Grievance
Procedure. No entry shall be permitted without proper documentation. All
employees, contractors, and visitors must be issued a security identification
badge, to be worn on the visible exterior of their clothing.
 At a minimum, all employees, visitors, and contractors shall be required to wear

hard hats, safety glasses, and safety shoes or boots within any Aurora Gold
Project security perimeter, except within the man-camp and administrative areas.
 All visitors to Buckhall and/or the Aurora site will require prearranged company
escorts. Use of cameras by visitors will be evaluated and authorized by Aurora
Gold Project management on a case-by-case basis. Overnight visits will require
prearranged company housing and canteen access.

 Possession, consumption, or being under the influence of alcoholic beverages or
illegal drugs is specifically prohibited for all employees, contractors, or visitors, as
noted in the GGI Labour Grievance Procedure (ESMS Plan, Appendix A).
 Possession of firearms, explosives, or other potentially lethal weapons is

specifically prohibited; as a general rule, security personnel are permitted to use
non-lethal security equipment or guard dogs only to the extent permitted by the
Government of Guyana, in full accordance with arrangements made with the
GPF, and only if security force members are properly trained in the safe, non-
excessive use of such resources. The Chief of Security or his designee is
responsible for providing such training for all security staff as previously noted.
 Collecting, purchasing, or possessing wild animals, wild animal products, or

archaeological artifacts is specifically prohibited; with respect to the latter, if any
such artifacts are encountered in the normal course of work, they shall not be
further disturbed and shall be immediately reported to a supervisor or the
Environmental Officer, in accordance with the requirements of GG-25, “Chance
Archaeological Finds.”
 All staff, contractors, or visitors shall immediately report any incident, conflict,
unlawful activity, theft, or accident to their immediate supervisor, company escort,
or any uniformed security guard.
 All traffic to the site shall be managed in accordance with the Project
Transportation Management Plan; security will be advised when all convoys or
authorized GGI vehicles leave Buckhall or cross the Cuynui River at Tapir
Crossing. Delivery drivers must show proper documents or bills of lading upon
arrival at the Aurora site. Security guards will maintain logs of all arrivals and
departures; they will advise the purchasing department or delivery point manager
when goods or equipment arrive and ensure that drivers are escorted to the final
offloading area or delivery location.
 Non-company vehicles arriving at the Buckhall river port site or the Aurora mine
site shall be inspected for contraband (e.g., alcohol, weapons) as well as fuel
leaks or other potential hazards. Drivers and passengers in any vehicle in which
contraband is discovered shall be detained and the matter referred to the GPF
for their appropriate action.
 All vehicles traveling to the Aurora site must check in at Buckhall in accordance
with the Transportation Management Plan. Arrival of a non-company vehicle at
Tapir Crossing or the Aurora site that has not first checked in a Buckhall will be
considered a potential security breach, to be investigated as noted in Section 4.4.
 Any Aurora Gold Project employee, contractor, or visitor involved in malicious

vandalism, theft of company materials, or any other criminal activity will be
disciplined and potentially referred to the GPF for prosecution in accordance with

the GGI Labour Grievance Procedure (ESMS Plan, Appendix A). Employees
involved in such activities may be terminated; contractors may have their
contracts cancelled. Observations of illegal activity must be immediately
reported to a uniformed security guard.
 Upon leaving the Aurora site for Buckhall, or from Buckhall to other destinations,
all vendor/delivery and non-company vehicles will be inspected to ensure that all
materials leaving the facility are properly accounted for and that proper
documentation is available.
 Security staff will restrict access to specific areas of the Project and provide all
necessary support in the event of a fire, flood, explosion, major fuel or reagent
spill, medical emergency, or other emergency conditions, as defined by the
Project’s Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan and (during the
operational phase of the Project) Cyanide Management Plan.
4.4 Security Inspections and Patrols
The GGI security force shall conduct routine daily or weekly inspections or patrols of the
security perimeters of the Buckhall and Aurora sites, checking facility security including
any holes in security fencing or other adjacent or unfenced areas in which unauthorized
persons or domestic animals may gain entry to the site. Any observed issues shall be
reported to the Chief of Security. Any security breaches detected by roving patrols that
result in the detaining of unauthorized individuals or encounters with armed intruders
shall require immediate notification of the Chief of Security and liaison with the GPF in
accordance with the requirements of the Project Influx Management Plan and
Community Relations Management Plan.
4.5 Records
session attendance sheets and any distributed handout materials. Other records to be
retained include: design security review/facility acceptance records, security badge
assignment records, daily entry/exit log forms, patrol/inspection reports, and any
completed CPAR forms.
5.0 REFERENCES
 GGI ESMS Plan (including, Appendix A, "Labour Grievance Procedure"

 GGI Transportation Management Plan
 GGI Influx Management Plan
 GGI Cyanide Management Plan.

 GG-03, “Field Inspections”
 GG-04, “Identification of Nonconformances and Corrective/Preventive Action”

Figure 1: Security Management Process
Constructoin Mgr../ Chief of Security

EPC Contractor Evaluate security aspects
of construction design
Resolve comments
dwgs. and specifications
No Chief of Security
Accept?
Yes
Construction Mgr./ Chief of Security

EPC Contractor Inspect constructed
barriers and
Resolve comments
security systems
No Chief of Security
Accept?
Yes
Security Chief/Staff
Brief all new hires/
contractors/visitors
in security requirements
per GG-06
Security Chief/Staff
Monitor site security
via daily rounds, monthly
Inspections per GG-03
No
Chief of Security
Security breach?
Yes
Chief of Security
Advise Construction Mgr.,
Environmental Manager,
Health and Safety Officer
VP, Aurora Project &
authorities as required
Environmental Manager Records Clerk

Initiate CPAR and
File records
resolution process
per GG-05
per GG-04.

GG-41: Management of Aviation Fuel
and Fuelling Operations
Inc. (Guyana Goldfields) will use to manage aviation fuel and fuelling operations for
helicopter services for the Aurora Project or other exploration activities. This SOP will
apply over the life of the Project; it supports Sections 4.3.2 (“”Management of
Environmental and Social Impacts”) and 6 (“Emergency Preparedness and Response”)
of the GIG Environmental and Social Management System Plan (ESMS Plan), the GGI
Occupational Health and Safety Management/Accident Prevention Plan (OHSM/AP
Plan), the Exploration Management Plan, and other GGI Management Plans and SOPs
2.0 DEFINITIONS
None
3.1 Exploration/Operations Managers
The Exploration or Operations Managers shall be responsible for communication with

the helicopter service contractor, determining the fuel grade and volumes needed to
support anticipated helicopter services, and requesting fuel purchases for delivery to the
Tapir Crossing helipad or other designated locations.
3.2 Purchasing Manager
The responsible Exploration or Operations Manager will select an aviation fuel vendor
currently licensed by the Guyana Energy Agency, and ensure that procurement
documents specify provision of fuel of the requested grade in clean containers in good
condition, and that all containers are numbered and marked with the delivery date prior
to transportation to the site.

3.3 Designated Stores Coordinator
The Designated Stores Coordinator will ensure that the fuel storage shed is secure and
neatly organized. The Designated Stores Coordinator will issue fuel to helicopter pilots
and keep track of all fuel received or issued on a log sheet kept in the fuel storage shed.
Other duties include retrieval and storage of empty containers and response to any
fuelling spills.
3.4 Environmental Manager / Health and Safety Officer
The Environmental Manager or Health and Safety Officer will perform monthly
inspections of the storage facility for general housekeeping, documentation of fuel
receipt and issue, fire extinguisher condition, and the adequacy of the spill kit supplies
kept at the fuel storage shed.
4.0 PROCEDURE
The general process for managing aviation fuel is described in the following steps, and is
summarized as a flowchart in Figure 1.
4.1 Procurement and Transportation of Aviation Fuel
The Exploration Manager or Operations manager requiring helicopter services will

communicate with the helicopter provide required fuel grades and volumes to the
Purchasing Manager, who will purchase fuel from an aviation fuel vender licensed by the
Guyana Energy Agency. Procurement documents must specify that fuel will be provided
in clean 20 litre clear plastic jerrycans in good condition. Prior to transport to the Aurora
Project site, all fuel containers will be labelled and numbered with a unique identifier and
dated with the receipt date. Labels will be sturdy wire tags written in indelible ink.
Transportation of aviation fuel to Tapir Crossing or other designated storage locations

will normally be made by GGI personnel at the direction of the responsible Exploration
or Operations Manager
4.2 Storage of Aviation Fuel
Aviation fuel will be stored on a shelf in the fuel storage shed near the helipad prepared
at Tapir Crossing (see Figures 2a and 2b). The fuel storage shed will be locked;
access will be limited to the Designated Stores Coordinator and the Environmental or
Health and Safety Officers. All fuel stored in the shed will be logged in by the
Designated Stores Coordinator upon receipt; the log sheet will be stored in the fuel
storage shed. An example of the log sheet is provided as Figure 3. The oldest stock of
fuel will be stored closest to the door. Empty fuel containers will be stored on a separate
shelf on the opposite wall until they are returned to the vendor.

4.3 Issuing of Aviation Fuel
The Designated Stores Coordinator will issue fuel to pilots as directed by the responsible
Exploration Manager or Operations Manager. All fuel shall be issued by receipt date;
oldest fuel must be issued first. Fuel with any obvious sludge or debris, or from
containers whose integrity is in any way compromised shall not be issued, and will be
set aside for vendor return and replacement. Only pilots may receive fuel, and only
pilots will conduct the actual fuelling, as noted in GG-42, “Helicopter Safety.” Along with
the fuel, the Designated Stores Coordinator will issue a spill tray to the pilots for use
during fuelling and will retrieve the spill tray and empty fuel containers. The Designated
Stores Coordinator will also be responsible for the clean-up of any fuel spills and
disposal of any clean-up waste in accordance with the GGI Waste Management Plan
and Spill Prevention, Control, and Contingency Plans (Aurora Project Areas).
4.4 Fuel Storage Shed Housekeeping
The fuel storage shed shall be kept clean and organized at all times. Only the following
items may be stored in the fuel storage shed: aviation fuel in appropriate containers,
empty fuel containers, a spill kit, a spill tray, fire extinguishers, and the fuel receipt/issue
and inspection log sheets. Smoking is not allowed within 30 m of the fuel storage shed.
The Environmental Manager or Health and Safety Officer will inspect the fuel storage
shed monthly. Inspections will include checks for the following: general housekeeping,
the fuel receipt and issue logging process, and the adequacy of the spill kit. Results will
be documented on the inspection log sheet (see Figure 4), and any deficiencies
immediately attended to by the Designated Stores Coordinator. Current inspection log
sheet will be stored in the fuel storage shed.
5.0 Records
Completed fuel receipt/issue and inspection log sheets shall be routed to the Records
Clerk for retention in accordance with GG- 05, “Records Management.”
5.0 REFERENCES
 GGI ESMS Plan

 GGI Exploration Management Plan
 GGI OHSM/AP Plan
 GGI Spill Prevention, Control, and Contingency Plans (Aurora Project Areas)
 GG 05, “Records Management”
 GG-42, “Helicopter Safety”

Figure 1: Aviation Fuel Management Process

Figure 2a: Fuel Storage Shed at Tapir Crossing
Figure 2b. Inside of Fuel Storage Shed

Figure 2: Example of Aviation Fuel Log Sheet
Container Date of Container Date of

Recipient Comments
Number Receipt Size (litres) Issue

Figure 4. Example of Fuel Storage Shed Inspection Sheet
Aviation Fuel Storage Shed Inspection Sheet
Inspector: Date:
1. Is housekeeping acceptable? □Yes □No

Comments:
2. Is the spill kit present and in good condition? □Yes □No

Comments:
3. Are the oldest fuel containers located at the front of the shed? □Yes □No
Comments:
4. Are filled and empty fuel containers on separate shelves? □Yes □No
Comments:
5. Is the log sheet filled out? □Yes □No

Comments:
6. Are all fuel containers in the shed documented on the log sheet? □Yes □No
Comments:
7. Is there a fire extinguisher in working condition? □Yes □No

Comments:
8. Was the fuel storage shed locked when you arrived? □Yes □No
Comments:
9. Did you confirm acceptable completion of any required □Yes □No

corrective action?

GG-42: Helicopter Safety

This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) defines minimum safety requirements for
Guyana Goldfields, Inc. (GGI) employees, contractors, and visitors who may be required
to travel to Aurora Project (Project) or other GGI concession locations via contracted
helicopter services. This SOP incorporates best management practices selected from
Section 7.5 of the Prospectors & Developers Association of Canada (PDAC) Field Safety
Pocket Guide (PDAC, 2012), and will apply over the life of the Project. It supports
Section 6 (“Emergency Preparedness and Response”) of the GGI Environmental and
Social Management System Plan (ESMS Plan), as well as the Project Occupational
Health and Safety/Accident Prevention Plan, the Exploration Management Plan, and
other GGI Management Plans and SOPs when specified therein.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
None
3.1 Purchasing Manager
The Purchasing Manager is responsible for establishing a service contract with a

qualified helicopter flight service; the contract shall require:
 submittal of current flight operations certifications as issued by the Guyana Civil

Aviation Authority (GCAA);
 submittal of annual GCAA annual aviation safety audit report for GGI review,
along with copies of the current airworthiness certificate(s) for the aircraft
assigned to the Project; and
 compliance with selected elements of this SOP on the part of the contractor’s
pilot (e.g., provision of pre-flight briefings for GGI staff and other routine safety
practices as described herein).
GG-42 1 Revision 1-
The Environmental Manager is responsible for the review and approval of the helicopter
service contractor’s current certifications and annual aviation safety audit report, prior to
authorization of any helicopter transport services at the Aurora Project.
3.3 Exploration/Operations Manager
The Exploration Manager or Operations Manager is responsible for identifying and

scheduling helicopter support needs sufficiently in advance of the need date to permit a
review of the contractor’s current aviation safety audit report, verification of their current
certification status, development of any temporary helipads that may be required to
support the proposed work, and the purchasing and staging of appropriate stores of
aviation fuel at the Tapir Crossing heliport or other locations per SOP GG-41,
“Management of Aviation Fuel and Fuelling Operations.”
3.4 Contractor Pilots

The helicopter service’s pilot is in charge of, and responsible for, the safe operation of
the aircraft; they are also specifically responsible for:
 providing pre-flight briefings to all passengers, prior to all flights;

 filing written flight plans with GCAA, as appropriate;
 fuelling operations;
 supervising cargo loading and passenger boarding and disembarkation;
 planning all flights to ensure they can be completed in daylight hours;
 maintaining radio contact with GGI security services; and
 ensuring that the aircraft is equipped with an emergency transponder, fire
extinguisher, emergency first aid kit, and appropriate emergency communications
and survival equipment.
3.5 GGI Personnel, Contractors, and Site Visitors
GGI personnel, contractors, and site visitors who are required to travel by helicopter are
individually and collectively responsible for obeying the instructions of the pilot, and for
observing the safe practices described in this SOP.
4.0 PROCEDURE
The safe management of helicopter operations is discussed in the following sections and
depicted as a flowchart in Figure 1.
4.1 General Considerations
Helicopters are a highly versatile, flexible, and low (environmental) impact means of
transporting personnel and equipment to remote locations. However, helicopter-related
incidents and accidents are recognized internationally as the leading cause of fatalities

in mineral exploration operations. Significant risks associated with helicopter use
include:
 impact by rotors, flying objects from rotor downwash, and damage caused by
improperly carried equipment;
 crashes caused by pilot error, bad weather, overloading, or inadequate

maintenance;
 pilot fatigue, brought on by difficult working conditions or excessive client

pressures or work requests;
 crashes in water resulting in drowning due to inability to escape from a

submerged or overturned aircraft;
 serious injury or death from accidental contact with rotor blades; and
 stranding in remote locations due to crashes or mechanical breakdown.
All GGI staff, contractors, or site visitors who must travel to remote areas of GGI’s
concession via helicopter, as well as the helicopter service contractor’s pilot, are
therefore required to strictly comply with the minimum safety practices discussed in this
SOP. Any willful violation of these requirements may serve as grounds for
immediate dismissal or termination of contract.
4.2 Contracting Helicopter Services
The Purchasing Manager is responsible for establishing a service contract with a

qualified helicopter service. As noted in Section 3.1, the contract shall require:
 submittal of current GCAA flight operations certifications;
 submittal of the annual GCAA annual aviation safety audit report and
airworthiness certificates for GGI review; and
 compliance with selected elements of this SOP on the part of the contractor’s
pilot (e.g., pre-flight briefings for GGI staff and other routine safety practices as
described herein).
The helicopter service’s credentials and certifications shall be reviewed for

completeness and currency by the Environmental Manager, prior to authorization of
flight operations. Any observed issues with the required certifications shall be resolved
to GGI’s satisfaction, or alternate sources will be required.
4.3 Pre-flight Operations
All necessary reserves of aviation fuel shall be delivered to the Tapir Crossing aviation
fuel storage shed (see SOP GG-41, “Management of Aviation Fuel and Fuelling

Operations”) at least one day prior to the start of project flight operations. All GGI staff,
contractors, or site visitors who may be required to travel by helicopter will be trained in
the requirements of this SOP in accordance with GG-06, “ESMS Training Program” prior
to the arrival of the helicopter on site; training records shall be retained on file as noted
in Section 4.5.
If temporary helipads are required in remote locations, efforts shall be made to locate the
pad on flat ground that has already been cleared for other purposes, or does not have
significant vegetation. If there are no viable alternatives and forest clearance is a
requirement, the area shall first be screened in accordance with GG-08, “Environmental
and Social Footprint Surveys.”
Landing zone dimensions shall be defined by the helicopter service contractor’s pilot, but
are typically the diameter of the main rotor plus 20 metres. All temporary or permanent
landing zones centres shall be marked by a large “H” made of fluorescent paint or cloth;
the permanent helipad at Tapir Crossing shall also have a fluorescent windsock.
4.4 Safe Practices for Helicopter Passengers
The pilot will provide a safety briefing before each flight that addresses safe helicopter
approach and departure routes, danger zones, mandatory use of seat belts and hearing
protection (see GG-11, “Personal Protective Equipment), operation of doors, stowing
cargo/cabin baggage, safety equipment location, communications with the pilot, and
emergency procedures. In addition, all helicopter passengers shall observe the
following safe practices (adapted from Section 7.5 of the PDAC Field Safety Pocket
Guide (PDAC, 2012):
 Maintain vigilant and safe behavior at all times, and refrain from any horseplay in
and around the helicopter.
 The responsible Exploration or Operations Manager shall keep track of flight

plans and schedules; ground-to-air radio communication between and among the
nearest GGI Security Office, the Exploration or Operations Manager, the pilot,
and passengers/field crews will be required at all times.
 Never accept unsafe practices by pilots, or pressure pilots to use unsafe

practices or to work to the point of fatigue.
 All operations must commence and complete in full daylight; night operations
are not permitted.
 Remember that the pilot is in command – regardless of your position, do exactly

what the pilot says to do at all times.
 No operations requiring the use of external slings will be permitted under this
SOP.

 Provide the pilot the weight of all cargo, samples, packs, equipment, and
personnel (plus hand-carried items); a scale will be made available at the Tapir
Crossing helipad for this purpose.
 Inform the pilot about any potentially dangerous goods cargo (e.g., compressed
gas cylinders, fuel) and accept his direction on safe stowage.
 Never approach or exit without the pilot’s direct permission; wait until visibility is
clear and/or until the helicopter has shut down before approaching
 Do not approach or exit the helicopter when the rotors are moving slowly; the
main rotor will droop as the engine slows or idles, especially when it is windy.
 Rotor clearance is greatly reduced when the ground is uneven or hummocky; if

the helicopter is on a slope, crouch very low and use the downhill side to
approach or exit
 To the extent possible, always attempt to approach the helicopter by moving

toward the front and in full view of the pilot; make sure you have eye contact
with the pilot before approaching and approach or exit in a crouching position.
 Passengers must wear hearing protection and seatbelts; wear headsets as

necessary for communication with the pilot, otherwise wear muffs or disposable
earplugs.
 Load and unload with the engine shut down; stow field gear, samples, and packs
carefully in the cargo compartment, making sure the cargo door is firmly latched.
 Tie down or restrain all cabin baggage; ensure that no loose items can interfere
with the helicopter’s flight controls.
 Notify the pilot of any unusual hazard observed during the flight – do not assume
the pilot has seen it.
 Do not distract the pilot or upset the helicopter balance with sudden or
unpredictable movements during takeoff, landing, or flight.
 Never throw anything out of the helicopter.
 Never ride on the skids of a helicopter.
 Never exit towards the helicopter tail rotor.
 In the event of a crash or stranding from mechanical failure, stay in the vicinity of
the helicopter and follow the pilot’s instructions.

 When leaving a helicopter, refasten the seat belt behind you, step down smoothly
and close the door carefully. Don’t slam the doors - close them gently and don’t
let them swing in the wind. Move at least 10 metres away with your gear to a
place where the pilot can see you. Crouch down and remain crouched until the
helicopter has taken off. Signal the pilot to indicate that everyone is clear during
unloading and prior to takeoff.
4.5 Records
All training records and helicopter service procurement records shall be routed to the
Records Clerk and retained on file in accordance with GG-05, “Records Management.”
5.0 REFERENCES
 GGI ESMS Plan

 GG-08, “Environmental and Social Footprint Surveys”
 PDAC, 20112; Field Safety Pocket Guide, Section 7.5, “Aircraft”; accessed at
http://www.pdac.ca/pdac/misc/pdf/2012-pocket-manual.pdf ; Prospectors &
Developers Association of Canada, Toronto, ON, Canada, 2012.

Figure 1: Operational Safety Process for Contracted Helicopter Services
Purchasing Mgr..
Env. Manager/
Establish helicopter Purchasing Mgr.
services contract, Resolve comments or
request annual select alternate
aviation safety support contractor
audit report
Purchasing Mgr..
Forward annual
aviation safety audit
report to
Environmental Mgr.
If no Env. Mgr. If yes

Accept?
If yes
Pilot
Env. Manager/
Purchasing Mgr. Conduct preflight
Advise Exploration inspection, refuel per
or Operations GG-41 as required
Managers
Pilot
Exploration or
Operations Manager
Weigh and load cargo
Schedule helicopter
support, do logistics
Planning, train staff
per GG-06
Pilot
Conduct preflight
indoctrination, load
Env. Mgr. If no passengers, travel to
destination
Helipad
needed?
If yes Pilot
Exploration or Conduct preflight
Operations Manager
indoctrination, load
Survey per GG-08, Passengers and
clear helipad area cargo, return to
Aurora heliport
Pilot
Pilot If yes
Travel to Tapir
Crossing or More flights?
other established
heliport
If no
Pilot
Records Clerk
Return to
File records
Georgetown
per GG-05

GG-43: Safe Operation of
Grove Model 530 Hydraulic Cranes
Effective Date: November 5, 2012 Revision Level: -1-
operation of Grove Model 530 hydraulic cranes on the Guyana Goldfields, Inc. (GGI)
Aurora Project.
Management System Plan (ESMS Plan), the Project Health and Safety/Accident
Prevention Plan, and other GGI Management Plans and SOPs when specified therein.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Crane Operator
The crane operator is defined as a GGI worker who has the specific skills and training
that permit them to be authorized to operate Grove Model 530 hydraulic crane.
Operator training is defined as completion of an approved training course or practical

hands-on training in the use of Grove Model 530 hydraulic cranes under the supervision
of qualified operators or manufacturers’ representatives.
The Mechanical Shop Manager is responsible for monitoring manufacturers’ onsite

maintenance contracts to ensure that the Grove Model 530 cranes owned or leased by
GGI are maintained in a safe operating condition.

The Construction Manager is responsible for ensuring that crane operators receive
appropriate classroom and hands-on training from authorized equipment manufacturer
representatives and/or experienced operators as described by this SOP. The
Construction Manager is also responsible for issuing vehicle operator qualification cards
(see Figure 2) to operators who successfully complete training, and for routing training
records to file as noted in Section 4.6.
3.3 Crane Operator
The GGI crane operator is responsible for successfully completing all required operator
training sessions and examinations as specified herein. GGI crane operators shall
complete pre-shift safety inspections as described herein, and shall report any problems
to the Mechanical Shop for resolution. They are also responsible for safely operating
their assigned cranes in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions and the general
guidance provided in Section 4.4.
3.4 Riggers
Supervisors or other experienced staff shall serve as riggers in all load lifting operations
using mobile hydraulic cranes. Riggers shall be trained in the general requirements of
this SOP, and shall be adept in use of appropriate hand signals to raise, lower, and
position the load in the manner indicated in Figure 3.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 Procurement or Leasing of Hydraulic Cranes and Entry into Maintenance

Tracking System
Purchase or lease contracts for Grove Model 530 hydraulic cranes shall include
appropriate provisions for long-term onsite maintenance and onsite operator training
support. Safety equipment included with or installed on each crane shall include:
 full vehicle operating/running lights;

 redundant braking capabilities;
 wide-angle rear view and hoist mirrors;
 duty meters, pressure/temperature sensors, and alarms for hydraulics and other
major systems and subsystems;
 wheel position and outrigger position indicators;
 warning horns;
 backup alarms;
 tire chocks and tire pressure indicators;
 portable fire extinguisher and spill kit;

 separation of steering hydraulics from main hydraulic systems;
 engine kill switch that permits immediate shutdown;
 electrical system lockout switches accessible from outside the battery
compartment;
 low-noise and well-ventilated or air-conditioned cab interior designs, with sun
screen;
 load charts prepared specifically for each as-delivered unit; and
 manufacturer’s operating instructions, for each as-delivered unit.
After receipt and acceptance of each crane, the Chief Mechanic or his designee shall
ensure that each unit is assigned an Aurora Project control number, which shall be
prominently marked on the side of the vehicle. Once identified, each crane shall be
entered into the Project maintenance tracking system.
4.2 Selection, Training, and Qualification of Crane Operators
The Construction Manager shall nominate personnel to serve as crane operators who
have appropriate experience and training, as well as exemplary safety records.
The Construction Manager shall ensure that all crane operator candidates attend a
training presented by the Construction Manager, assisted by the manufacturer's
representative and/or an experienced operator, selected by the Construction Manager.
The training session shall emphasize the minimum requirements for safe equipment
operation as described in applicable operator’s manuals (to be provided by the
manufacturer as noted in Section 4.1), as well as the general requirements presented in
Section 4.4. Crane operator candidates shall also complete on-the-job training (OJT)
under the direction of the manufacturer’s representative or an experienced operator.
OJT sessions shall be conducted until the operator satisfactorily demonstrates the
adequacy of their crane operating skills to the trainer. Successful candidates shall
receive a qualification card from the Construction Manager (see Figure 2) marked with
the specific equipment items that they are authorized to operate, to be carried with their
Aurora Project identification badge at all times.
GGI reserves the right to rescind an employee’s qualification card at any time in the
event of an at-fault accident or if unsafe behaviour is observed; see the GGI “Labour
4.3 Training of Riggers
Supervisors or other experienced staff shall be selected for duty as riggers in lifting
operations using mobile hydraulic cranes. Riggers shall be trained in the general
requirements of this SOP, with specific emphasis on the use of hand signals to raise,
lower, and position the load in the manner indicated in Figure 3.

Each GGI operator shall complete a documented inspection of their assigned equipment
before starting work, using the Operator’s Daily Inspection Report (Figure 4). Any noted
discrepancies shall be referred to mechanical shop personnel for correction prior to use.
Copies of the daily inspection report shall be forwarded to Mechanical Shop Manager
and to the Project files as noted in Section 4.6.
At a minimum, GGI crane operators and riggers must wear appropriate personal
protective equipment (see GG-11, “Personal Protective Equipment”). The crane shall be
operated in accordance with the manufacturer’s operating manual and the minimum
safety rules described in this SOP. These rules must be specifically addressed in the
training of GGI operators and shall be implemented in actual practice. Failure to follow
these rules may result in revocation of the operator’s qualification card or other
appropriate disciplinary action; see the GGI “Labour Grievance Procedure.”
General Rules for the Safe Operation of Grove Model 530 Hydraulic Cranes
 Only qualified operators (or trainees and qualified trainers) are permitted to
operate the crane – NO EXCEPTIONS! GGI operators will be required to
present their driver’s license and qualification card in order to receive crane
operation keys from the operations office.
 The crane must be operated in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s

operating manual and the guidelines provided by this SOP. In the event of any
conflict or interpretation questions, the requirements of the manufacturer’s
operating manual will always take precedence.
 Riding the hook of a mobile crane is extremely dangerous and is specifically

prohibited, as is any reckless operation of the crane, or operating the crane
under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Violations of these prohibitions will not
be tolerated and are grounds for immediate dismissal per the GGI “Labour
 The crane shall always be put in gear (and chocked, if the outriggers are not
deployed) when powered down and parked.
 The primary hoisting hook arrangement must be inspected for cracks using
magnetic particle testing methods on at least an annual basis.
 Operators must know the approximate weight of loads prior to lifting, and must
consult the load charts provided by the manufacturer for recommended operating

parameters; the weight of all chains, straps or other rigging equipment must also
be known and added to the estimated load weight.
 Chains or nylon straps used for lifting must be rated substantially in excess of the
anticipated load, and must be inspected carefully for damage by the crane
operator prior to each use. Frayed or cut nylon straps must be removed from
service and discarded; all chain hooks shall be fitted with safety clasps in good
condition.
 The recommended working range of the boom is noted in Figure 5; please note
that Figure 5 is provided for information only, and the working range defined in
the operating instructions provided with the as-delivered equipment by the
manufacturer must take precedence in all cases.
 Please note that lifting without having the outriggers deployed substantially
restricts the safe working area (i.e., 12 degree vs. 90 degree maximum angle of
rotation) of the crane; please see Figure 6 for a comparison of safe working
zones.
 The crane is designed for rough terrain, but steep roads shall nevertheless be
ascended and descended slowly and carefully, and the crane positioned on firm
ground in as flat an area as possible for safe operation.
 When moving the crane on roadways, operate the vehicle with the boom stowed,
and travel at a speed that will allow for safe stopping; reduce speed even further
for wet and slippery road conditions.
 Be aware of operating near overhead hazards, especially power lines that could
be struck by an extended mast or boom.
 Use riggers for all lifting operations; maintain eye contact and follow the rigger’s
hand signals (see Figure 3) in lifiting and positioning the load.
 Be extremely cautious in backing operations, when positioning the crane for a lift
or moving on roadways; ensure backup alarms are operational and use riggers
(with 2-way radios, if hand signals cannot be seen clearly) in areas of poor
visibility.
 Maintain awareness of other major equipment operations and general vehicle

traffic.

 Never leave the crane running while unattended. The operator shall take the
keys and chock the tires whenever leaving the crane.
 Immediately report all accidents involving crane operations to the Health and
Medical Response.”
4.6 Maintenance Monitoring Considerations
Maintenance for GGI cranes and other heavy equipment is typically provided as a
contracted service by the equipment provider or an authorized licensee. The Aurora
Project Mechanical Shop Manager or designee shall ensure that each heavy equipment
item is assigned an Aurora Project control number and entered into the Aurora Project’s
maintenance tracking system. The Mechanical Shop Manager or designee shall
monitor the status of subcontracted maintenance items and may request the Health and
Safety Officer to periodically evaluate the adequacy of subcontracted maintenance
functions via the processes described in GG-03, “Field Inspection.”
4.7 Records
accordance with GG-05, “Records Management” and include hard copies of all crane
operator training session attendance sheets and any distributed handout materials (see
GG-06, “ESMS Training Program”). Copies of pre-shift safety inspection reports and
repair records shall also be retained, along with surveillance inspection reports and
associated Corrective/ Preventive Action Requests (CPARs); see GG-03, “Field
Inspection” and GG-04, “Identification of Non-conformances and Corrective/Preventive
Action.”
5.0 REFERENCES
 GGI ESMS Plan


Figure 1: Hydraulic Crane Operation, and Maintenance Process
Procurement Manager
Purchase/lease hydraulic
crane with all required
accessories, spare parts,
service contracts,
operating instructions,
Crane Operator
and training support
Conduct pre-shift
inspections,
operate crane
Chief Mechanic safely, as trained
Obtain maintenance
schedules from mfgr.
representatives, enter Operators
crane(s) into maintenance Operators Yes Advise mechanical
tracking system Operational shop staff
problem?
No
Construction Manager Mechanical Shop Mechanical Shop
Designate crane Conduct routine
operator Conduct unscheduled
maintenance, update
candidates maintenance or repair
tracking system
Construction Manager H&S Officer

Inspect contracted
Select riggers and train
maintenance functions
per GG-06
per GG-03
Manufacturer Rep/
Qualified Trainer No H&S Officer
CPAR?
Conduct OJT for
operators per GG-06
Yes
H&S Officer
No Trainer Resolve with contractor
Qualify operator? per GG-04
Yes
Construction Manager Records Clerk
File records
Issue qualification card
per GG-05

Figure 2: Crane Operator Qualification Card
(not to scale)

Figure 3: Hand Signals for Raising, Lowering, and Positioning Loads1
1
Source: http://www.construction-machine.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/08/Learn-how-to-
communicate-using-hand-signals-with-a-crane-operator..gif

Figure 4: Crane Operator’s Daily Inspection Report
CRANE OPERATOR’S DAILY INSPECTION REPORT
Equipment Make/Model/Identification Number: Grove Model 530, ID No: _______
Note: Any deficiencies noted must be repaired

before the equipment can be used.
Inspection items Comments
1. Headlights/running lights/rear lights – operability

2. Brakes – operability
3. Tires – hub cracks, missing lug nuts
4. Tires – inflation pressure
5. Hydraulic hoses – obvious cracks or leaks
6. Impaired visibility/cracks in cab windows
7. Wiper systems – reservoir full and functional
8. Hydraulic hoses/actuators – obvious cracks or leaks
9. Hydraulic oil reservoir – cracks/leaks
10. Fuel tank – cracks, leaks, adequate fuel level
11. Horn/backup alarms - functional
12. Rigging/hoist chains rated for anticipated load and
in good condition
13. No visible damage to outriggers or boom
assembly
14. Manufacturer’s load charts for as-delivered
equipment available
15. Fire extinguisher charged/current inspection
16. Spill kit available and complete
Other Comments:
Operator Date Time
cc: Mechanical Shop Records

Figure 4: Safe Working Area Diagram2
2
Source: Grove RT 530E Product Guide; see http://www.bigge.com/crane-charts/rough-terrain-crane-charts/RT530E.pdf ; this figure is provided for
reference only and will be superseded by the direction provided in the operating instructions provided with the as-delivered equipment.

Figure 5: Nominal Working Range of Hydraulic Boom3
3
Source: Grove RT 530E Product Guide; see http://www.bigge.com/crane-charts/rough-terrain-crane-
charts/RT530E.pdf ; this figure is provided for reference only and will be superseded by the direction
provided in the operating instructions provided with the as-delivered equipment

GG-44: Management of Land Clearances

managing the clearance of land areas within the boundaries of GGI’s Aurora Project
concession, when required to support specific exploration, mining, or mining-related
construction operations. Areas to be cleared may include prospecting areas or
exploration trail alignments; surface trenches or other surface sampling locations; drill
pads; roadway alignments; and/or other undeveloped areas that must be cleared for
exploration purposes, or for construction of mine facilities or supporting infrastructure.
This SOP will apply through the end of the operational phase of the Project (assuming
no new clearance activities will take place during decommissioning and closure). It
Environmental and Social Management System Plan (ESMS Plan), and other GGI
2.0 DEFINITIONS
An archaeological find is defined as the chance discovery, during an environmental

and social footprint survey (defined in Section 2.3), of relics or human artefacts with
potential archaeological or historical significance. Archaeological finds will be
documented and evaluated in accordance with SOP GG-25, “Chance Archaeological
Finds.” Such finds could include human remains; pottery or pottery shards; stone tools
or implements; or metal, glass, or ceramic objects that could date to the colonial or pre-
colonial era. Refuse from artisanal and small-scale mining (ASM) or other intrusive
human activities that are clearly dated later than 1900 will generally not be considered to
be of archaeological or historical significance.
2.2 Cut Block
A cut block is defined as a unit or subdivision of an approved clearance area that is

assigned to a specific cutting crew. Dividing a clearance area into cut blocks allows

clearances to proceed in organized sequences or phases that minimize the total amount
of land exposed to erosion or overclearance in a given time period. Limiting access
within the clearance area to small, properly trained cutting and bulldozer crews also
reduces the risk of accidents and unsafe practices.
2.3 Environmental and Social Footprint Survey
An environmental and social footprint survey (see GG-08, “Environmental and Social
Footprint Surveys”) is defined as a field examination of a proposed trail, roadway
alignment, sampling area, or other clearance area for purposes of identifying and
protecting surface water features and other potentially sensitive environmental areas or
habitats, as well as noting any evidence of current or historical human use. Such
surveys must be completed before clearance actions may commence as described
herein.
3.1 Environmental Manager and Construction or Exploration Managers
The Environmental Manager and the Constructions or Exploration Managers shall

collaboratively review and approve of all Clearance Plans, including options for further
minimization of the clearance footprint as described herein. The Environmental
Manager is also responsible for initiating documented environmental and social footprint
surveys to support each required clearance action, in accordance with GG-08,
“Environmental and Social Footprint Surveys.”
The Environmental Officer is responsible for monitoring the implementation of approved

Clearance Plans, and for conducting periodic water quality sampling activities and other
documented field inspections in accordance with this SOP and GG-03, “Field
Inspections.”
3.3 Construction or Exploration Supervisors
At their Managers’ direction, Construction or Exploration Supervisors will prepare

Clearance Plans for assigned exploration areas or Project construction activities (e.g.,
clearance of footprint areas for open pit operations, waste rock stockpiles, or processing
plant areas) in compliance with the guidelines of this SOP.
3.4 Site Security Personnel
By definition, all footprint surveys will be conducted within the boundaries of the Aurora
Project concession, and any unauthorized ASM, logging, hunting, settlement, or other
intrusive human activities encountered in preparation for site clearance represents a

breach of security. Site security personnel are responsible for assessing the nature and
significance of the intrusive activities that may be reported as part of footprint surveys or
authorized land clearance actions, and for resolving the incursion within the guidelines
provided in GG-40, “Site Security” and the Project Influx Management Plan.
3.5 All GGI or Contractor Personnel
All GGI or contractor personnel involved in land clearance activities are responsible for
following the requirements of approved Clearance Plans, and shall immediately advise
their supervisors if unsafe conditions or erosional issues are noted, or if ASMs, other
unauthorized persons, or evidence of recent incursions by such individuals are observed
in the clearance area.
4.0 PROCEDURE
The process to be used for planning, evaluating, approving, and implementing land
clearance actions for the Aurora Project is summarized in the following sections, and is
depicted as a flowchart in Figure 1.
4.1 Preparation of Draft Clearance Plans
Exploratron or Construction Supervisors are responsible to their respective Managers for

preparing Clearance Plans for all proposed clearance areas. Such plans may be
prepared in standard GGI memo format, and a minimum must include or properly
consider the following:
 Definition of Clearance Boundaries: The boundaries of the proposed

clearance area must be plainly identified using current general arrangement
maps, drawings, photographs, and/or survey coordinates.
 Identification of Cut Blocks with Proposed Clearance: Following the

identification of overall clearance boundaries, the clearance area will be divided
into cut blocks. Cut block layout will be determined in part by terrain, as unstable
slopes, grades above 30 percent, waterways, or swampy areas will all serve as
potential natural boundaries. To the extent possible, the cut block layout must
minimize the area required to be disturbed.
 Layout of Skid Trails and Access Trails or Roads: Access throughout the
clearing area will be determined during the layout of cut blocks. All access roads
and skid trails will be situated within the clearing boundaries. Skidding distances
must be kept to less than 500m wherever possible, to prevent excessive rutting
and other potential erosional issues. Layout of roads and trails will consider the
suitability of terrain, and shall minimize steep approaches, water crossings, and
avoid entering floodplains to prevent excessive rutting, silt generation, and other

erosion. Because of potential erosional issues, clearing and skidding in saprolite
areas is not permitted in rainy seasons.
 Felling Standards: All trees with > 0.1m diameter at breast height (DBH) will be
felled using chainsaws and directional felling techniques. All logs, limbs and
branches with a diameter > 0.1m diameter and length > 2m, will be skidded to a
designated landing area and stored in securely placed stacks. Landing areas will
be located within the clearing boundaries on level ground, well away from water
sources to avoid potential silt generation. Tree stumps, roots, and saplings with
DBH <0.1m and other other ground vegetation will remain untouched within the
cut block/clearing areas, in order to assist in the stabilisation of topsoil.
Hardwood and softwood logs > 0.1m diameter may be sawn or milled to produce
dimensional lumber for camp and mine construction or repair. Lower-grade
softwood logs, hardwood and softwood limbs/branches, residues from
milling/sawing (e.g., slabs, trimmings, bark, chips, sawdust) will processed as
mulch and reserved in designated stockpiles, as organic mulch will be required in
the routine management of erosional issues over the life of the mine, as well as
in site reclamation and closure.
 Reservation of Topsoil and Other Organic Material: If clearance needs

require the removal of topsoil (e.g., pre-stripping of open pit mining areas;
preparations for concrete building, tanks, or machinery foundations; preparation
of foundation areas for waste rock stockpiles; or preparation of tailings or water
management pond basins), topsoil and associated organic matter shall be
reserved in a designated stockpile, as the latter material will serve as a valuable
resource in the eventual reclamation of the mine site.
 Erosion Prevention/Sediment Control Measures: Steep slopes are to be

avoided to the extent possible. Where steep slopes do exist, runoff from above
the clearance site must be diverted away from exposed slopes to minimize
erosion. Where steep slopes are cleared, appropriate stabilization structures
must be designed to prevent potential erosion and sedimentation. Erosion
prevention/control methods may be designed based on the options presented in
the Project Erosion Prevention and Control Plan, or may be designed specifically
for the proposed clearance, and fully documented in the affected Clearance Plan.
All water bodies, diversion channels or other preventive measures, and proposed
drainage patterns must be mapped, along with proposed downgradient sampling
points for periodic water quality monitoring.
 Health and Safety Considerations: Clearance Plans shall require daily tailgate
safety meetings for all GGI and contractor personnel involved in clearance
actions, as well as compliance with the Project Occupational Health and
Safety/Accident Prevention Plan and several key GGI SOPs; at a minimum, the
latter must include:

 GG-11, “Personal Protective Equipment”;
 GG-12, “First Aid and Medical Response”;
 GG-13. “Transportation Safety” ;
 GG-16, “Safe Operation of Heavy Equipment”;
 GG-17, “Vehicle Fuelling and Spill Prevention”;
 GG-27, “Chainsaw Safety”; and
 GG-40, “Site Security.”
The draft Clearance Plan will then be submitted to the Environmental Manager and
responsible Exploration or Construction Managers for review and approval.
4.2 Evaluation of Clearance Footprint Minimization/Additional Erosion Prevention

Options
The Environmental Manager and responsible Exploration or Construction Managers

shall review the draft Clearance Plan for compliance with the minimum requirements of
Section 4.1, relative to the purposes of the clearance, and for the specific evaluation of
additional options for further limiting or minimizing the proposed footprint and associated
environmental risks. If footprint reduction options are determined to exist that do not
create additional safety hazards, environmental impacts, and/or operational issues, the
Clearance Plan shall be returned to the responsible Exploration or Construction
Supervisors for revision and update.
4.3 Environmental and Social Footprint Surveys/Approval of Clearance Plan
After completion of the footprint minimization review, the Environmental Manager shall
request the performance of one or more environmental and social footprint surveys that
encompass initial cut blocks as well as the remainder of the entire proposed clearance
area. Such surveys shall be conducted in compliance with GG-08, “Environmental and
Social Footprint Survey.” As noted in GG-08, if any chance archaeological finds are
encountered, they shall be documented and referred to the GGI Environmental Manager
for further evaluation. As also noted in GG-08, if ASMs, other unauthorized persons, or
evidence of recent incursions by such individuals are observed in the clearance area,
GGI personnel will immediately leave the area and report the situation to their
supervisors and GGI security for their appropriate action. Clearance actions may not be
resumed until cleared by Security and re-scheduled by the Environmental Manager and
the responsible Exploration or Construction Manager.
The Environmental and Social Footprint Survey report will be reviewed by the
Environmental Manager. If survey results indicate sensitive habitats, other
environmental issues, or the presence of chance archaeological finds, the proposed
Clearance Plan will be returned to the affected construction or exploration supervisors
with recommendations for appropriate setbacks or other revisions. The Clearance Plan
will be updated and resubmitted for another footprint minimization options review as
noted in Section 4.2. However, if no environmental or cultural issues are noted, the
Clearance Plan will be considered approved and will be forwarded to the responsible

Construction or Exploration Supervisors for training of all affected GGI and contractor
staff (per GG- GG-06, “ESMS Training Program” ) prior to Plan implementation.
4.4 Implementation of Erosion Prevention Measures/Background Water Sampling
All required diversion channels and structures for the prevention of person shall be
prioritized for completion in accordance with Clearance Plan requirements, prior to the
initiation of major clearance actions. As soon as preventive measures are in effect,
baseline water quality samples will be collected by the Environmental Officer and sent to
an offsite analytical laboratory for evaluation against the mine site discharge limits
defined by Table 1 of “Environmental, Health and Safety Guidelines for Mining” (IFC,
2007). These baseline results shall be used for comparison with of routine water quality
monitoring samples collected throughout the clearance and erosional stabilisation
process.
4.5 Completion and Routine Inspections of Clearance Actions
The responsible Construction or Exploration Supervisors shall implement the approved

Clearance Plan as stated; any requested modifications are subject to the same review
and approval requirements as the original as elaborated in Sections 4.1 through 4.3
above. At the Environmental Manager’s direction, the Environmental Officer shall
periodically inspect clearance activities for conformance with the approved Clearance
Plan; inspections shall be planned and documented in accordance with GG-03, “Field
Inspections”, and shall include periodic water quality monitoring samples from the
sampling points defined in the approved Clearance Plan. Samples shall be analyzed for
at least oil and grease and total suspended solids (TSS) per (IFC, 2007) Table 1
requirements. At the end of the clearance activity, at least one final round of samples
shall be analysed for the full list of constituents in (IFC, 2007), Table 1. If any
nonconformances are noted, they will be documented on a Corrective and Preventive
Action Request (CPAR) form and resolved as required by GG-04, “Identification of Non-
4.6 Records
Training records, copies of approved Clearance Plans, final footprint survey reports,
water quality monitoring data, field inspection reports, and copies of any required CPARs
will be retained in accordance with GG-05, “Records Management.”

5.0 REFERENCES
 GGI ESMS Plan

 GGI Influx Management Plan.
 GGI Erosion Prevention and Control Plan
 GG-03, “Field Inspections”
 GG-08, “Environmental and Social Footprint Surveys”
 GG-12, “First Aid and Medical Response;
 GG-27, “Chainsaw Safety”
 GG-40, “Site Security”
 IFC, 2007; “Environmental, Health and Safety Guidelines for Mining”, December 10,
2007; accessed online at http://www.ifc.org/ifcext/enviro.nsf /AttachmentsByTitle/gui_
EHSGuidelines2007_Mining/$FILE/Final+-+Mining.pdf ; World Bank

Figure 1: Land Clearance Process
Construction/Exploration Construction/Exploration
Supervisors Supervisors
Prepare Clearance Plan,
Install erosion
identify proposed
prevention/control
clearance area(s) and
measures per
define:
Construction/Exploration • coordinates/boundaries
Clearance Plan,
Supervisors • cut blocks
Erosion Prevention and
Control Plan, and GG-37
Review clearance area, • skid road/access road
identify reductions, alignments
relocate as required • timber storage areas
• topsoil stockpile areas
• organic/mulch material Environmental Officer
stockpile areas
Collect background
• locations and specs for
water sample, analyze
erosion prevention &
per (IFC, 2007) Table 1
control structures
Construction/Exploration
Construction, Exploration Supervisors
and Env. Managers
Train staff per GG-06;
Review options for
Initiate clearances,
minimizing footprint/
reserve topsoil, salvage
other clearance impacts
timber, and reserve
organic/mulch materials
Con/Ex/
Env. Mgrs Environmental Officer
Yes
Reduce Monitor downgradient
footprint? water quality,
inspect clearance
per GG-03
No
Field Ecologist/
Biologist
Conduct footprint Env. Officer Env. Officer
survey per GG-08, No No
Erosion or TSS issues Other water quality
prepare Environmental
observed? or other issues?
and Social Footprint Report
Yes Yes
Env. Mgr. Environmental Officer Environmental Officer

No
Positive footprint
survey results? Initiate erosion Initiate CPARs
control action per as required,
GG-37 resolve per GG-04
Yes
Forward approved
Clearance Plan Records Clerk
and Environmental
and Social
Footprint Report to File records
Construction/Exploration per GG-05
Managers/Supervisors

Aurora Gold Project

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Aurora Gold Project

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Aurora Gold Project

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Appendix 7C:

Standard Operating Procedures

Approved by: Approved by:

1.0 PURPOSE AND SCOPE

 the development of engineered onsite hazardous waste storage, municipal solid

 completion of municipal solid waste landfill permitting requirements pursuant to

 identification of potential recycling/reuse options for selected waste streams, and

 completion of a comprehensive Waste Management Plan for the major

GG-01 1 Revision -1-

2.2 Other Solid Waste

2.2 Special Waste

2.3 Hazardous Waste

3.1 Environmental Officer

The Environmental Officer is responsible for monitoring overseeing the proper

3.2 Environmental Manager

The Environmental Manager is responsible for establishing appropriate solid waste

GG-01 2 Revision -1-

4.2 Monitoring of Waste Segregation and Disposal Actions

Progress in the implementation of Table 4-1 requirements shall be periodically

GG-01 3 Revision -1-

GG-01 4 Revision -1-

GG-01 5 Revision -1-

Radioactive hazardous None N/A None

GG-01 6 Revision -1-

GG-01 7 Revision -1-

Ship-generated waste N/A None; no ship-generated N/A N/A

Aircraft waste N/A None; no onsite aircraft N/A N/A

GG-01 8 Revision -1-

 GG-04, “Identification of Non-conformances and Corrective /Preventive Action”

 GG-05, “Records Management”

 PDAC, 2009; “e3-Plus Excellence in Environmental Stewardship e-toolkit (EES)”,

GG-01 9 Revision -1-

Resolve CPAR per

Environmental Manager Records

Issue Waste Management

1.0 PURPOSE AND SCOPE

2.1 Standard Operating Procedure

3.1 Operations Managers

3.2 Environmental Manager

The Environmental Manager or his designee will:

 identify or confirm the need for the development or revision of an SOP;

GG-02 1 Revision -1-

3.3 Vice President (VP), Aurora Project

4.1 Prepare or Update an SOP

SOPs will be prepared by the Environmental Manager or a designated preparer. SOP

1. Purpose and Scope

Describe the purpose that the procedure is attempting to fulfil. Provide a

List any regulatory requirements, voluntary standards, plans, procedures or other

6. Figures, Tables, or Attachments.

Any diagrams, forms, photographs, or tables used to illustrate or support the

4.2 Review and Approval

4.3 Controlled Distribution

GG-02 3 Revision -1-

4.5 Project Records

 GGI ESMS Plan

GG-02 4 Revision -1-

GG-02 5 Revision -1-

Approved by: Approved by:

This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) defines minimum requirements for

Approval: ________________________________ Date:_

4. Inspection Date: Start time: End time:

Inspector: _____ Date: Approval: Date:

Approved:___________________ Date:_ Approved:___________________ Date:_

Closure verified:______________ Date:_